Extreme Networks AP3917E Wireless 802.11 a/ac+b/g/n Access Point User Manual ExtremeWireless V10 41 06 User Guide

Extreme Networks, Inc. Wireless 802.11 a/ac+b/g/n Access Point ExtremeWireless V10 41 06 User Guide

Extreme Wireless V10.41.06 User Guide Part 1 PDF Download & Text

Extreme Wireless V10.41.06 User Guide Part 1

Download:
Mirror Download [FCC.gov]
Document ID	3831181
Application ID	1vEiqYghBbOtWV0jNCvQWg==
Document Description	Extreme Wireless V10.41.06 User Guide Part 1
Short Term Confidential	No
Permanent Confidential	No
Supercede	No
Document Type	User Manual
Display Format	Adobe Acrobat PDF - pdf
Filesize	461.04kB (5763001 bits)
Date Submitted	2018-04-27 00:00:00
Date Available	2017-11-30 00:00:00
Creation Date	2018-04-26 17:57:00
Producing Software	Acrobat Distiller 18.0 (Windows)
Document Lastmod	2018-04-26 17:57:13
Document Title	ExtremeWireless V10.41.06 User Guide
Document Creator	AH XSL Formatter V6.3 MR2 for Linux64 : 6.3.3.24511 (2016/05/17 13:57JST)
Document Author:	Extreme Networks, Inc.

™
ft
ra
ExtremeWireless V10.41.06
User Guide
9035198-03-REV01
Published April 2018
Copyright © 2018 Extreme Networks, Inc. All rights reserved.
Legal Notice
Extreme Networks, Inc. reserves the right to make changes in speciﬁcations and other information
contained in this document and its website without prior notice. The reader should in all cases
consult representatives of Extreme Networks to determine whether any such changes have been
made.
The hardware, ﬁrmware, software or any speciﬁcations described or referred to in this document
are subject to change without notice.
Trademarks
ft
ra
Extreme Networks and the Extreme Networks logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Extreme Networks, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.
All other names (including any product names) mentioned in this document are the property of
their respective owners and may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective
companies/owners.
For additional information on Extreme Networks trademarks, please see:
www.extremenetworks.com/company/legal/trademarks
Software Licensing
Some software ﬁles have been licensed under certain open source or third-party licenses. Enduser license agreements and open source declarations can be found at:
www.extremenetworks.com/support/policies/software-licensing
Support
For product support, phone the Global Technical Assistance Center (GTAC) at 1-800-998-2408
(toll-free in U.S. and Canada) or +1-408-579-2826. For the support phone number in other
countries, visit: http://www.extremenetworks.com/support/contact/
For product documentation online, visit: https://www.extremenetworks.com/documentation/
Table of Contents
Preface......................................................................................................................................... 7
Text Conventions................................................................................................................................................................... 7
Safety Information................................................................................................................................................................ 7
Sicherheitshinweise..............................................................................................................................................................8
Consignes De Sécurité....................................................................................................................................................... 9
Providing Feedback to Us...............................................................................................................................................10
Getting Help............................................................................................................................................................................ 11
Extreme Networks Documentation............................................................................................................................. 11
Chapter 1: About This Guide................................................................................................... 12
Who Should Use This Guide...........................................................................................................................................12
How to Use This Guide......................................................................................................................................................12
Chapter 2: Overview of the ExtremeWireless Solution...................................................... 14
ft
ra
Introduction............................................................................................................................................................................14
Conventional Wireless LANs.......................................................................................................................................... 15
Elements of the ExtremeWireless Solution.............................................................................................................15
ExtremeWireless and Your Network.......................................................................................................................... 19
ExtremeWireless Appliance Product Family.........................................................................................................29
Chapter 3: Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance....................................................31
System Conﬁguration Overview...................................................................................................................................31
Logging on to the ExtremeWireless Appliance...................................................................................................33
Wireless Assistant Home Screen................................................................................................................................ 34
Working with the Basic Installation Wizard.......................................................................................................... 39
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance for the First Time................................................................. 45
Using a Third-party Location-based Solution...................................................................................................... 95
Additional Ongoing Operations of the System................................................................................................... 99
Chapter 4: Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs.............................................................101
Wireless AP Overview..................................................................................................................................................... 101
Discovery and Registration..........................................................................................................................................120
Viewing a List of All APs................................................................................................................................................125
Wireless AP Default Conﬁguration...........................................................................................................................134
Conﬁguring Wireless AP Properties........................................................................................................................ 156
Outdoor Access Point Installation............................................................................................................................ 167
Assigning Wireless AP Radios to a VNS............................................................................................................... 168
Conﬁguring Wireless AP Radio Properties...........................................................................................................174
Conﬁguring IoT Applications...................................................................................................................................... 189
Setting Up the Wireless AP Using Static Conﬁguration................................................................................ 199
Setting Up 802.1x Authentication for a Wireless AP......................................................................................203
Conﬁguring Co-Located APs in Load Balance Groups.................................................................................. 213
Conﬁguring an AP Cluster...........................................................................................................................................220
Conﬁguring an AP as a Guardian.............................................................................................................................. 221
Conﬁguring a Captive Portal on an AP................................................................................................................. 222
AP3916ic Integrated Camera Deployment.......................................................................................................... 226
Performing AP Software Maintenance.................................................................................................................. 235
Understanding the ExtremeWireless LED Status............................................................................................ 242
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
Table of Contents
Chapter 5: Conﬁguring Topologies.....................................................................................262
Topology Overview......................................................................................................................................................... 262
Conﬁguring the Admin Port....................................................................................................................................... 263
Conﬁguring a Basic Data Port Topology..............................................................................................................266
Creating a Topology Group........................................................................................................................................ 270
Edit or Delete a Topology Group...............................................................................................................................271
Enabling Management Traffic.................................................................................................................................... 272
Layer 3 Conﬁguration.................................................................................................................................................... 272
Exception Filtering.......................................................................................................................................................... 278
Multicast Filtering..............................................................................................................................................................281
Chapter 6: Conﬁguring Roles.............................................................................................. 284
Roles Overview................................................................................................................................................................. 284
Conﬁguring Default VLAN and Class of Service for a Role........................................................................284
Policy Rules.........................................................................................................................................................................288
Chapter 7: Conﬁguring WLAN Services..............................................................................318
ft
ra
WLAN Services Overview.............................................................................................................................................318
Third-party AP WLAN Service Type....................................................................................................................... 319
Conﬁguring a Basic WLAN Service......................................................................................................................... 319
Conﬁguring Privacy.........................................................................................................................................................327
Conﬁguring Accounting and Authentication.....................................................................................................334
Conﬁguring QoS Modes............................................................................................................................................... 370
Conﬁguring Hotspots.................................................................................................................................................... 376
Chapter 8: Conﬁguring a VNS............................................................................................. 390
Conﬁguring a VNS.......................................................................................................................................................... 390
VNS Global Settings....................................................................................................................................................... 392
Methods for Conﬁguring a VNS............................................................................................................................... 423
Manually Creating a VNS............................................................................................................................................. 423
Creating a VNS Using the Wizard........................................................................................................................... 426
Enabling and Disabling a VNS...................................................................................................................................485
Renaming a VNS..............................................................................................................................................................486
Deleting a VNS................................................................................................................................................................. 486
Chapter 9: Conﬁguring Classes of Service........................................................................ 487
Classes of Service Overview...................................................................................................................................... 487
Conﬁguring Classes of Service................................................................................................................................. 487
CoS Rule Classiﬁcation.................................................................................................................................................490
Priority and ToS/DSCP Marking................................................................................................................................ 491
Rate Limiting......................................................................................................................................................................492
Chapter 10: Conﬁguring Sites............................................................................................. 494
VNS Sites Overview....................................................................................................................................................... 494
Conﬁguring Sites............................................................................................................................................................. 494
Recommended Deployment Guidelines...............................................................................................................495
Radius Conﬁguration..................................................................................................................................................... 499
Selecting AP Assignments......................................................................................................................................... 500
Selecting WLAN Assignments...................................................................................................................................501
Chapter 11: Working with a Mesh Network........................................................................ 502
About Mesh........................................................................................................................................................................ 502
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
Table of Contents
Simple Mesh Conﬁguration.........................................................................................................................................502
Wireless Repeater Conﬁguration.............................................................................................................................503
Wireless Bridge Conﬁguration..................................................................................................................................504
Examples of Deployment............................................................................................................................................ 505
Mesh WLAN Services.................................................................................................................................................... 505
Key Features of Mesh.................................................................................................................................................... 509
Deploying the Mesh System......................................................................................................................................... 511
Changing the Pre-shared Key in a Mesh WLAN Service............................................................................... 517
Chapter 12: Working with a Wireless Distribution System...............................................518
ft
ra
About WDS..........................................................................................................................................................................518
Simple WDS Conﬁguration.......................................................................................................................................... 518
Wireless Repeater Conﬁguration.............................................................................................................................. 519
Wireless Bridge Conﬁguration.................................................................................................................................. 520
Examples of Deployment.............................................................................................................................................. 521
WDS WLAN Services...................................................................................................................................................... 521
Key Features of WDS.....................................................................................................................................................525
Deploying the WDS System....................................................................................................................................... 528
Changing the Pre-shared Key in a WDS WLAN Service.............................................................................. 536
Chapter 13: Availability and Session Availability.............................................................. 537
Availability........................................................................................................................................................................... 537
Session Availability..........................................................................................................................................................545
Viewing SLP Activity......................................................................................................................................................553
Chapter 14: Conﬁguring Mobility........................................................................................ 555
Mobility Overview............................................................................................................................................................ 555
Mobility Domain Topologies....................................................................................................................................... 556
Conﬁguring a Mobility Domain................................................................................................................................. 558
Chapter 15: Working with Third-party APs.........................................................................561
Deﬁning Authentication by Captive Portal for the Third-party AP WLAN Service......................... 561
Deﬁning the Third-party APs List............................................................................................................................. 561
Deﬁning Policy Rules for the Third-party APs....................................................................................................561
Chapter 16: Working with ExtremeWireless Radar.......................................................... 563
Radar Overview................................................................................................................................................................ 563
Radar Components.........................................................................................................................................................564
Radar License Requirements..................................................................................................................................... 565
Enabling the Analysis Engine.....................................................................................................................................565
Radar Scan Proﬁles.........................................................................................................................................................566
AirDefense Proﬁle............................................................................................................................................................567
Viewing Existing Radar Proﬁles................................................................................................................................. 571
Adding a New Radar Proﬁle....................................................................................................................................... 573
Conﬁguring an In-Service Scan Proﬁle..................................................................................................................574
Conﬁguring a Guardian Scan Proﬁle...................................................................................................................... 577
Assigning an AP to a Proﬁle........................................................................................................................................ 581
Viewing the List of Assigned APs.............................................................................................................................581
Maintaining the Radar List of APs........................................................................................................................... 582
Working with Radar Reports..................................................................................................................................... 593
Chapter 17: Working with Location Engine....................................................................... 605
Location Engine Overview..........................................................................................................................................605
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
Table of Contents
Location Engine on the Controller..........................................................................................................................607
Deploying APs for Location Aware Services..................................................................................................... 608
Conﬁguring the Location Engine............................................................................................................................ 609
ExtremeLocation Support............................................................................................................................................ 619
Chapter 18: Working with Reports and Statistics..............................................................621
Application Visibility and Device ID.........................................................................................................................621
Viewing AP Reports and Statistics..........................................................................................................................627
Available Client Reports............................................................................................................................................... 642
Viewing Role Filter Statistics..................................................................................................................................... 646
Viewing Topology Reports......................................................................................................................................... 648
Viewing Mobility Reports............................................................................................................................................ 650
Viewing Controller Status Information..................................................................................................................654
Viewing Routing Protocol Reports..........................................................................................................................657
Viewing RADIUS Reports............................................................................................................................................660
Call Detail Records (CDRs)......................................................................................................................................... 663
Chapter 19: Performing System Administration................................................................669
ft
ra
Performing Wireless AP Client Management.................................................................................................... 669
Deﬁning Wireless Assistant Administrators and Login Groups................................................................ 673
Chapter 20: Logs, Traces, Audits and DHCP Messages................................................... 676
ExtremeWireless Appliance Messages..................................................................................................................676
Working with Logs..........................................................................................................................................................676
Viewing Wireless AP Traces....................................................................................................................................... 684
Viewing Audit Messages..............................................................................................................................................684
Viewing the DHCP Messages.....................................................................................................................................685
Viewing the NTP Messages........................................................................................................................................ 686
Viewing Software Upgrade Messages...................................................................................................................687
Viewing Conﬁguration Restore/Import Messages.......................................................................................... 689
Chapter 21: Working with GuestPortal Administration................................................... 690
About GuestPortals........................................................................................................................................................690
Adding New Guest Accounts....................................................................................................................................690
Enabling or Disabling Guest Accounts................................................................................................................. 693
Editing Guest Accounts................................................................................................................................................693
Removing Guest Accounts......................................................................................................................................... 694
Importing and Exporting a Guest File...................................................................................................................695
Viewing and Printing a GuestPortal Account Ticket......................................................................................698
Working with the Guest Portal Ticket Page.......................................................................................................700
Conﬁguring Guest Password Patterns................................................................................................................... 701
Conﬁguring Web Session Timeouts....................................................................................................................... 704
Appendix A: Regulatory Information................................................................................. 705
ExtremeWireless APs 37XX , 38XX, and 39XX................................................................................................. 705
Appendix B: Default GuestPortal Ticket Page.................................................................. 706
Example Ticket Page..................................................................................................................................................... 706
Glossary.........................................................................................................................................709
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
Preface
This section discusses the conventions used in this guide, ways to provide feedback, additional help, and
other Extreme Networks publications.
Text Conventions
The following tables list text conventions that are used throughout this guide.
Table 1: Notice Icons
Icon
Notice Type
Alerts you to...
General Notice
Helpful tips and notices for using the product.
Note
Important features or instructions.
ft
ra
New!
Caution
Risk of personal injury, system damage, or loss of data.
Warning
Risk of severe personal injury.
New Content
Displayed next to new content. This is searchable text within the PDF.
Table 2: Text Conventions
Convention
Description
Screen displays
This typeface indicates command syntax, or represents information as it appears on the
screen.
The words enter and
type
When you see the word “enter” in this guide, you must type something, and then press
the Return or Enter key. Do not press the Return or Enter key when an instruction
simply says “type.”
[Key] names
Key names are written with brackets, such as [Return] or [Esc]. If you must press two
or more keys simultaneously, the key names are linked with a plus sign (+). Example:
Press [Ctrl]+[Alt]+[Del]
Words in italicized type
Italics emphasize a point or denote new terms at the place where they are deﬁned in
the text. Italics are also used when referring to publication titles.
Safety Information
Dangers
•
•
Replace the power cable immediately if it shows any sign of damage.
Replace any damaged safety equipment (covers, labels and protective cables) immediately.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
Preface
•
•
Use only original accessories or components approved for the system. Failure to observe these
instructions may damage the equipment or even violate safety and EMC regulations.
Only authorized Extreme Networks service personnel are permitted to service the system.
Warnings
•
•
•
•
This device must not be connected to a LAN segment with outdoor wiring.
Ensure that all cables are run correctly to avoid strain.
Replace the power supply adapter immediately if it shows any sign of damage.
Disconnect all power before working near power supplies unless otherwise instructed by a
maintenance procedure.
•
Exercise caution when servicing hot swappable components: power supplies or fans. Rotating fans
can cause serious personal injury.
This unit may have more than one power supply cord. To avoid electrical shock, disconnect all power
supply cords before servicing. In the case of unit failure of one of the power supply modules, the
module can be replaced without interruption of power to the ExtremeWireless Appliance. However,
this procedure must be carried out with caution. Wear gloves to avoid contact with the module,
which will be extremely hot.
•
ft
ra
•
•
•
There is a risk of explosion if a lithium battery is not correctly replaced. The lithium battery must be
replaced only by an identical battery or one recommended by the manufacturer.
Always dispose of lithium batteries properly.
Do not attempt to lift objects that you think are too heavy for you.
Cautions
•
•
•
•
Check the nominal voltage set for the equipment (operating instructions and type plate). High
voltages capable of causing shock are used in this equipment. Exercise caution when measuring
high voltages and when servicing cards, panels, and boards while the system is powered on.
Only use tools and equipment that are in perfect condition. Do not use equipment with visible
damage.
To protect electrostatic sensitive devices (ESD), wear a wristband before carrying out any work on
hardware.
Lay cables so as to prevent any risk of them being damaged or causing accidents, such as tripping.
Sicherheitshinweise
Gefahrenhinweise
•
•
Sollte das Netzkabel Anzeichen von Beschädigungen aufweisen, tauschen Sie es sofort aus.
•
Tauschen Sie beschädigte Sicherheitsausrüstungen (Abdeckungen, Typenschilder und Schutzkabel)
sofort aus.
Verwenden Sie ausschließlich Originalzubehör oder systemspeziﬁsch zugelassene Komponenten.
Die Nichtbeachtung dieser Hinweise kann zur Beschädigung der Ausrüstung oder zur Verletzung
von Sicherheits- und EMV-Vorschriften führen.
•
Das System darf nur von autorisiertem Extreme Networks-Servicepersonal gewartet werden.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
Preface
Warnhinweise
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Dieses Gerät darf nicht über Außenverdrahtung an ein LAN-Segment angeschlossen werden.
Stellen Sie sicher, dass alle Kabel korrekt geführt werden, um Zugbelastung zu vermeiden.
Sollte das Netzteil Anzeichen von Beschädigung aufweisen, tauschen Sie es sofort aus.
Trennen Sie alle Stromverbindungen, bevor Sie Arbeiten im Bereich der Stromversorgung
vornehmen, sofern dies nicht für eine Wartungsprozedur anders verlangt wird.
Gehen Sie vorsichtig vor, wenn Sie an Hotswap-fähigen Wireless Controller-Komponenten
(Stromversorgungen oder Lüftern) Servicearbeiten durchführen. Rotierende Lüfter können
ernsthafte Verletzungen verursachen.
Dieses Gerät ist möglicherweise über mehr als ein Netzkabel angeschlossen. Um die Gefahr eines
elektrischen Schlages zu vermeiden, sollten Sie vor Durchführung von Servicearbeiten alle Netzkabel
trennen. Falls eines der Stromversorgungsmodule ausfällt, kann es ausgetauscht werden, ohne die
Stromversorgung zum Wireless Controller zu unterbrechen. Bei dieser Prozedur ist jedoch mit
Vorsicht vorzugehen. Das Modul kann extrem heiß sein. Tragen Sie Handschuhe, um Verbrennungen
zu vermeiden.
ft
ra
Bei unsachgemäßem Austausch der Lithium-Batterie besteht Explosionsgefahr. Die Lithium-Batterie
darf nur durch identische oder vom Händler empfohlene Typen ersetzt werden.
Achten Sie bei Lithium-Batterien auf die ordnungsgemäße Entsorgung.
•
•
Versuchen Sie niemals, ohne Hilfe schwere Gegenstände zu heben.
Vorsichtshinweise
•
Überprüfen Sie die für die Ausrüstung festgelegte Nennspannung (Bedienungsanleitung und
Typenschild). Diese Ausrüstung arbeitet mit Hochspannung, die mit der Gefahr eines elektrischen
Schlages verbunden ist. Gehen Sie mit großer Vorsicht vor, wenn Sie bei eingeschaltetem System
Hochspannungen messen oder Karten, Schalttafeln und Baugruppen warten.
•
Verwenden Sie nur Werkzeuge und Ausrüstung in einwandfreiem Zustand. Verwenden Sie keine
Ausrüstung mit sichtbaren Beschädigungen.
Tragen Sie bei Arbeiten an Hardwarekomponenten ein Armband, um elektrostatisch gefährdete
Bauelemente (EGB) vor Beschädigungen zu schützen.
•
•
Verlegen Sie Leitungen so, dass sie keine Unfallquelle (Stolpergefahr) bilden und nicht beschädigt
werden.
Consignes De Sécurité
Dangers
•
•
Si le cordon de raccordement au secteur est endommagé, remplacez-le immédiatement.
•
Remplacez sans délai les équipements de sécurité endommagés (caches, étiquettes et conducteurs
de protection).
Utilisez uniquement les accessoires d'origine ou les modules agréés spéciﬁques au système. Dans le
cas contraire, vous risquez d'endommager l'installation ou d'enfreindre les consignes en matière de
sécurité et de compatibilité électromagnétique.
•
Seul le personnel de service Extreme Networks est autorisé à maintenir/réparer le système.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
Preface
Avertissements
•
•
•
•
Cet appareil ne doit pas être connecté à un segment de LAN à l'aide d'un câblage extérieur.
•
Prenez toutes les précautions nécessaires lors de l'entretien/réparations des modules du Wireless
Controller pouvant être branchés à chaud : alimentations électriques ou ventilateurs.Les ventilateurs
rotatifs peuvent provoquer des blessures graves.
Cette unité peut avoir plusieurs cordons d'alimentation.Pour éviter tout choc électrique, débranchez
tous les cordons d'alimentation avant de procéder à la maintenance.En cas de panne d'un des
modules d'alimentation, le module défectueux peut être changé sans éteindre le Wireless Controller.
Toutefois, ce remplacement doit être effectué avec précautions. Portez des gants pour éviter de
toucher le module qui peut être très chaud.
•
•
Vériﬁez que tous les câbles fonctionnent correctement pour éviter une contrainte excessive.
Si l'adaptateur d'alimentation présente des dommages, remplacez-le immédiatement.
Coupez toujours l'alimentation avant de travailler sur les alimentations électriques, sauf si la
procédure de maintenance mentionne le contraire.
Le remplacement non conforme de la batterie au lithium peut provoquer une explosion. Remplacez
la batterie au lithium par un modèle identique ou par un modèle recommandé par le revendeur.
ft
ra
•
•
Sa mise au rebut doit être conforme aux prescriptions en vigueur.
N'essayez jamais de soulever des objets qui risquent d'être trop lourds pour vous.
Précautions
•
Contrôlez la tension nominale paramétrée sur l'installation (voir le mode d'emploi et la plaque
signalétique). Des tensions élevées pouvant entraîner des chocs électriques sont utilisées dans cet
équipement. Lorsque le système est sous tension, prenez toutes les précautions nécessaires lors de
la mesure des hautes tensions et de l'entretien/réparation des cartes, des panneaux, des plaques.
•
N'utilisez que des appareils et des outils en parfait état. Ne mettez jamais en service des appareils
présentant des dommages visibles.
Pour protéger les dispositifs sensibles à l'électricité statique, portez un bracelet antistatique lors du
travail sur le matériel.
•
•
Acheminez les câbles de manière à ce qu'ils ne puissent pas être endommagés et qu'ils ne
constituent pas une source de danger (par exemple, en provoquant la chute de personnes).
Providing Feedback to Us
We are always striving to improve our documentation and help you work better, so we want to hear
from you! We welcome all feedback but especially want to know about:
• Content errors or confusing or conﬂicting information.
•
•
Ideas for improvements to our documentation so you can ﬁnd the information you need faster.
Broken links or usability issues.
If you would like to provide feedback to the Extreme Networks Information Development team about
this document, please contact us using our short online feedback form. You can also email us directly at
internalinfodev@extremenetworks.com.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
10
Preface
Getting Help
If you require assistance, contact Extreme Networks using one of the following methods:
•
GTAC (Global Technical Assistance Center) for Immediate Support
• Phone: 1-800-998-2408 (toll-free in U.S. and Canada) or +1 408-579-2826. For the support
phone number in your country, visit: www.extremenetworks.com/support/contact
• Email: support@extremenetworks.com. To expedite your message, enter the product name or
model number in the subject line.
•
•
Extreme Portal — Search the GTAC knowledge base, manage support cases and service contracts,
download software, and obtain product licensing, training, and certiﬁcations.
The Hub — A forum for Extreme customers to connect with one another, answer questions, and
share ideas and feedback. This community is monitored by Extreme Networks employees, but is not
intended to replace speciﬁc guidance from GTAC.
Before contacting Extreme Networks for technical support, have the following information ready:
•
ft
ra
Your Extreme Networks service contract number and/or serial numbers for all involved Extreme
Networks products
•
•
•
A description of the failure
A description of any action(s) already taken to resolve the problem
•
•
Network load at the time of trouble (if known)
The device history (for example, if you have returned the device before, or if this is a recurring
problem)
Any related RMA (Return Material Authorization) numbers
•
A description of your network environment (such as layout, cable type, other relevant environmental
information)
Extreme Networks Documentation
To ﬁnd Extreme Networks product guides, visit our documentation pages at:
Current Product Documentation
www.extremenetworks.com/documentation/
Archived Documentation (for earlier
versions and legacy products)
www.extremenetworks.com/support/documentation-archives/
Release Notes
www.extremenetworks.com/support/release-notes
Open Source Declarations
Some software ﬁles have been licensed under certain open source licenses. More information is
available at: www.extremenetworks.com/support/policies/software-licensing.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
11
1 About This Guide
Who Should Use This Guide
How to Use This Guide
This guide describes how to install, conﬁgure, and manage the Extreme Networks ExtremeWireless
software. This guide is also available as an online help system.
To access the online help, click Help in the ExtremeWireless Assistant top menu bar.
Who Should Use This Guide
This guide is a reference for system administrators who install and manage the ExtremeWireless system.
ft
ra
Any administrator performing tasks described in this guide must have an account with administrative
privileges.
How to Use This Guide
To locate information about various subjects in this guide, refer to the following table.
For...
Refer to...
An overview of the product, its features and functionality.
Overview of the ExtremeWireless Solution on
page 14
Information about how to perform the installation, ﬁrst time setup Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance on
and conﬁguration of the controller, as well as conﬁguring the data page 31
ports and deﬁning routing.
Information on how to install the ExtremeWireless AP, how it
discovers and registers with the controller, and how to view and
modify radio conﬁguration.
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs on page
101
An overview of topologies and provides detailed information
about how to conﬁgure them.
Conﬁguring Topologies on page 262
An overview of roles and provides detailed information about
how to conﬁgure them.
Conﬁguring Roles on page 284
An overview of WLAN (Wireless Local Area Network) services
and provides detailed information about how to conﬁgure them.
Conﬁguring WLAN Services on page 318
An overview of Virtual Network Services (VNS), provides detailed Conﬁguring a VNS on page 390
instructions in how to conﬁgure a VNS, either using the Wizards
or by manually creating the component parts of a VNS.
Information about conﬁguring CoS (Class of Service) which are a
conﬁguration entity containing QoS Marking (802.1p and ToS/
DSCP), Inbound/Outbound Rate Limiting and Transmit Queue
Assignments.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
Conﬁguring Classes of Service on page 487
12
About This Guide
For...
Refer to...
Information about conﬁguring Sites which is a mechanism for
grouping APs and refers to speciﬁc Roles, Classes of Service
(CoS) and RADIUS servers that are grouped to form a single
conﬁguration.
Conﬁguring Sites on page 494
An overview of Mesh networks and provides detailed information Working with a Mesh Network on page 502
about how to create a Mesh network.
An overview of a Wireless Distribution System (WDS) network
conﬁguration and provides detailed information about how to
create a Mesh network.
Working with a Wireless Distribution System
on page 518
Information on how to set up the features that maintain service
availability in the event of a controller failover.
Availability and Session Availability on page
537
Information on how to set up the mobility domain that provides
Conﬁguring Mobility on page 555
mobility for a wireless device user when the user roams from one
ExtremeWireless AP to another in the mobility domain.
Working with Third-party APs on page 561
Information on the security tool that scans for, detects, provides
countermeasures, and reports on rogue APs.
Working with ExtremeWireless Radar on page
563
Information on the various reports and displays available in the
system.
Working with Reports and Statistics on page
621
Information on system administration activities, such as
performing ExtremeWireless AP client management, deﬁning
management users, conﬁguring the network time, and
conﬁguring Web session timeouts.
Performing System Administration on page
669
Information on how to view and interpret the logs, traces, audits
and DHCP (Dynamic Host Conﬁguration Protocol) messages.
Logs, Traces, Audits and DHCP Messages on
page 676
Information on how to conﬁgure GuestPortal accounts.
Working with GuestPortal Administration on
page 690
A list of terms and deﬁnitions for the ExtremeWireless Appliance
and the ExtremeWireless AP as well as standard industry terms
used in this guide.
Glossary terms are displayed as links in the
text. Hover over a glossary term to display the
deﬁnition, or click the link to go to the
Glossary.
Regulatory information for the ExtremeWireless Appliances and
the ExtremeWireless APs.
Regulatory Information on page 705
The default GuestPortal ticket page source code.
Default GuestPortal Ticket Page on page 706
ft
ra
Information on how to use the ExtremeWireless AP features with
third-party wireless access points.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
13
2 Overview of the ExtremeWireless
Solution
Introduction
Conventional Wireless LANs
Elements of the ExtremeWireless Solution
ExtremeWireless and Your Network
ExtremeWireless Appliance Product Family
Introduction
ft
ra
The next generation of wireless networking devices provides a truly scalable WLAN (Wireless Local Area
Network) solution. ExtremeWireless Access Points (APs, wireless APs) are ﬁt access points controlled
through a sophisticated network device, the controller. This solution provides the security and
manageability required by enterprises and service providers for huge industrial wireless networks.
The ExtremeWireless system is a highly scalable Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) solution. Based
on a third generation WLAN topology, the ExtremeWireless system makes wireless practical for service
providers as well as medium and large-scale enterprises.
The ExtremeWireless controller provides a secure, highly scalable, cost-effective solution based on the
IEEE 802.11 standard. The system is intended for enterprise networks operating on multiple ﬂoors in
more than one building, and is ideal for public environments, such as airports and convention centers
that require multiple access points.
This chapter provides an overview of the fundamental principles of the ExtremeWireless System.
The ExtremeWireless Appliance
The ExtremeWireless Appliance is a network device designed to integrate with an existing wired Local
Area Network (LAN). The rack-mountable controller provides centralized management, network access,
and routing to wireless devices that use Wireless APs to access the network. It can also be conﬁgured to
handle data traffic from third-party access points.
The controller provides the following functionality:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Controls and conﬁgures Wireless APs, providing centralized management.
Authenticates wireless devices that contact a Wireless AP.
Assigns each wireless device to a VNS when it connects.
Routes traffic from wireless devices, using VNS, to the wired network.
Applies ﬁltering roles to the wireless device session.
Provides session logging and accounting capability.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
14
Overview of the ExtremeWireless Solution
Conventional Wireless LANs
Wireless communication between multiple computers requires that each computer be equipped with a
receiver/transmitter—a WLAN Network Interface Card (NIC)—capable of exchanging digital information
over a common radio frequency. This is called an ad hoc network conﬁguration. An ad hoc network
conﬁguration allows wireless devices to communicate together. This setup is deﬁned as an independent
basic service set (IBSS).
An alternative to the ad hoc conﬁguration is the use of an access point. This may be a dedicated
hardware bridge or a computer running special software. Computers and other wireless devices
communicate with each other through this access point. The 802.11 standard deﬁnes access point
communications as devices that allow wireless devices to communicate with a distribution system. This
setup is deﬁned as a basic service set (BSS) or infrastructure network.
To allow the wireless devices to communicate with computers on a wired network, the access points
must be connected to the wired network providing access to the networked computers. This topology is
called bridging. With bridging, security and management scalability is often a concern.
ft
ra
Figure 1: Standard Wireless Network Solution Example
The wireless devices and the wired networks communicate with each other using standard networking
protocols and addressing schemes. Most commonly, Internet Protocol (IP) addressing is used.
Elements of the ExtremeWireless Solution
The ExtremeWireless solution consists of two devices:
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
15
Overview of the ExtremeWireless Solution
•
•
ExtremeWireless Appliance
ExtremeWireless AP
This architecture allows a single controller to control many APs, making the administration and
management of large networks much easier.
There can be several controllers in the network, each with a set of registered APs. The controllers can
also act as backups to each other, providing stable network availability.
In addition to the controllers and APs, the solution requires three other components, all of which are
standard for enterprise and service provider networks:
•
•
RADIUS Server (Remote Access Dial-In User Service) or other authentication server
DHCP (Dynamic Host Conﬁguration Protocol) Server (Dynamic Host Conﬁguration Protocol). If you
do not have a DHCP Server on your network, you can enable the local DHCP Server on the controller.
The local DHCP Server is useful as a general purpose DHCP Server for small subnets. For more
information, see Setting Up the Data Ports on page 51.
•
SLP (Service Location Protocol)
ft
ra
Figure 2: ExtremeWireless Appliance Solution
As illustrated in ExtremeWireless Appliance Solution, the ExtremeWireless Appliance appears to the
existing network as if it were an access point, but in fact one controller controls many APs. The
controller has built-in capabilities to recognize and manage the APs. The controller:
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
16
Overview of the ExtremeWireless Solution
•
•
•
•
•
Activates the APs
Enables APs to receive wireless traffic from wireless devices
Processes the data traffic from the APs
Forwards or routes the processed data traffic out to the network
Authenticates requests and applies access roles
Simplifying the APs makes them cost-effective, easy to manage, and easy to deploy. Putting control on
an intelligent centralized controller enables:
•
•
•
•
Centralized conﬁguration, management, reporting, and maintenance
High security
Flexibility to suit enterprise
Scalable and resilient deployments with a few controllers controlling hundreds of APs
The ExtremeWireless system:
•
Scales up to Enterprise capacity — ExtremeWireless Appliances are scalable:
C5215 — Up to 1000 APs, 2000 APs in Controller availability mode
C5210 — Up to 1000 APs, 2000 APs in Controller availability mode
C5110 — Up to 525 APs, 1050 APs in Controller availability mode
ft
ra
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
C4110 — Up to 250 APs, 500 APs in Controller availability mode
C25 — Up to 50 APs, 100 APs in Controller availability mode
C35 — Up to 125 APs, 250 APs in Controller availability mode
V2110 (Small Proﬁle) — Up to 50 APs, 100 APs in Controller availability mode
V2110 (Medium Proﬁle) — Up to 250 APs, 500 APs in Controller availability mode
V2110 (Large Proﬁle) — Up to 525 APs, 1050 APs in Controller availability mode
In turn, each wireless AP can handle a mixture of secure and non-secure clients. AP per radio
support is up to 200 clients, of which 127 are clients with security. With additional controllers, the
number of wireless devices the solution can support can reach into the thousands.
Integrates with existing network — A controller can be added to an existing enterprise network as a
new network device, greatly enhancing its capability without interfering with existing functionality.
Integration of the controllers and APs does not require any re-conﬁguration of the existing
infrastructure (for example, VLAN (Virtual LAN)s).
Integrates with the Extreme Networks Extreme Management Center Suite of products. For more
information, see Extreme Networks Extreme Management Center Integration on page 18.
Plug-in applications include:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Automated Security Manager
Inventory Manager
NAC Manager
Role Control Console
Policy Manager
Offers centralized management and control — An administrator accesses the controller in its
centralized location to monitor and administer the entire wireless network. From the controller the
administrator can recognize, conﬁgure, and manage the APs and distribute new software releases.
Provides easy deployment of APs — The initial conﬁguration of the APs on the centralized controller
can be done with an automatic “discovery” technique.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
17
Overview of the ExtremeWireless Solution
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Provides security via user authentication — Uses existing authentication (AAA) servers to
authenticate and authorize users.
Provides security via ﬁlters and privileges — Uses virtual networking techniques to create separate
virtual networks with deﬁned authentication and billing services, access roles, and privileges.
Supports seamless mobility and roaming — Supports seamless roaming of a wireless device from
one wireless AP to another on the same controller or on a different controller.
Integrates third-party access points — Uses a combination of network routing and authentication
techniques.
Prevents rogue devices — Unauthorized access points are detected and identiﬁed as either harmless
or dangerous rogue APs.
Provides accounting services — Logs wireless user sessions, user group activity, and other activity
reporting, enabling the generation of consolidated billing records.
Offers troubleshooting capability — Logs system and session activity and provides reports to aid in
troubleshooting analysis.
Offers dynamic RF management — Automatically selects channels and adjusts Radio Frequency
(RF) signal propagation and power levels without user intervention.
ft
ra
Extreme Networks Extreme Management Center Integration
The ExtremeWireless solution now integrates with the Extreme Management Center suite of products, a
collection of tools to help you manage networks. Its client/server architecture lets you manage your
network from a single workstation or, for networks of greater complexity, from one or more client
workstations. It is designed to facilitate speciﬁc network management tasks while sharing data and
providing common controls and a consistent user interface.
The Extreme Management Center is a family of products comprising the Extreme Management Center
Console and a suite of plug-in applications, including:
•
Automated Security Manager — Automated Security Manager is a unique threat response solution
that translates security intelligence into security enforcement. It provides sophisticated identiﬁcation
and management of threats and vulnerabilities. For information on how the ExtremeWireless
solution integrates with the Automated Security Manager application, see the Maintenance Guide.
•
Inventory Manager — Inventory Manager is a tool for efficiently documenting and updating the
details of the ever-changing network. For information on how the ExtremeWireless solution
integrates with the Automated Security Manager application, see the Maintenance Guide .
•
NAC Manager — NAC Manager is a leading-edge NAC solution to ensure only the right users have
access to the right information from the right place at the right time. The Extreme Networks NAC
solution performs multi-user, multi-method authentication, vulnerability assessment and assisted
remediation. For information on how the ExtremeWireless solution integrates with the Extreme
Networks NAC solution, see NAC Integration with the Wireless WLAN on page 24.
•
Policy Manager — Policy Manager recognizes the ExtremeWireless suite as role capable devices that
accept partial conﬁguration from Policy Manager. Currently this integration is partial in the sense
that Extreme Management Center is unable to create WLAN services directly; The WLAN services
need to be directly provisioned on the controller and are represented to Policy Manager as logical
ports.
The ExtremeWireless Appliance allows Policy Manager to:
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
18
Overview of the ExtremeWireless Solution
• Attach Topologies (assign VLAN to port) to the ExtremeWireless Appliance physical ports
(Console).
• Attach role to the logical ports (WLAN Service/SSID),
• Assign a Default Role/Role to a WLAN Service, thus creating the VNS.
• Perform authentication operations which can then reference deﬁned roles for station-speciﬁc
role enforcement.
This can be seen as a three-step process:
Deploy the controller and perform local conﬁguration
•
The ExtremeWireless Appliance ships with a default SSID, attached by default to all AP radios,
when enabled.
•
Use the basic installation wizard to complete the ExtremeWireless Appliance conﬁguration.
2 Use Policy Manager to:
• Push the VLAN list to the ExtremeWireless Appliance (Topologies)
•
Attach VLANs to ExtremeWireless Appliance physical ports (Console - Complete Topology
deﬁnition)
ft
ra
•
•
•
Push RADIUS server conﬁguration to the ExtremeWireless Appliance
Push role deﬁnitions to the ExtremeWireless Appliance
Attach the default role to create a VNS
3 Fine tune controller settings. For example, conﬁguring ﬁltering at APs and ExtremeWireless
Appliance for a bridged at controller or routed topologies and associated VNSs.
Note
Complete information about integration with Policy Manager is outside the scope of this
document.
ExtremeWireless and Your Network
This section is a summary of the components of the ExtremeWireless solution on your enterprise
network. The following are described in detail in this guide, unless otherwise stated:
•
ExtremeWireless Appliance — A rack-mountable network device or virtual appliance that provides
centralized control over all access points and manages the network assignment of wireless device
clients associating through access points.
•
•
Wireless AP — A wireless LAN ﬁt access point that communicates with a controller.
RADIUS Server (Remote Access Dial-In User Service) (RFC2865), or other authentication server —
An authentication server that assigns and manages ID and Password protection throughout the
network. Used for authentication of the wireless users in either 802.1x or Captive Portal security
modes. The RADIUS Server system can be set up for certain standard attributes, such as ﬁlter ID, and
for the Vendor Speciﬁc Attributes (VSAs). In addition, RADIUS Disconnect (RFC3576) which permits
dynamic adjustment of user role (user disconnect) is supported.
•
DHCP Server (Dynamic Host Conﬁguration Protocol) (RFC2131) — A server that assigns dynamically
IP addresses, gateways, and subnet masks. IP address assignment for clients can be done by the
DHCP server internal to the controller, or by existing servers using DHCP relay. It is also used by the
APs to discover the location of the controller during the initial registration process using Options 43,
60, and Option 78. Options 43 and 60 specify the vendor class identiﬁer (VCI) and vendor speciﬁc
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
19
Overview of the ExtremeWireless Solution
•
information. Option 78 speciﬁes the location of one or more SLP Directory Agents. For SLP, DHCP
should have Option 78 enabled.
Service Location Protocol (SLP) (SLP RFC2608) — Client applications are User Agents and services
that are advertised by a Service Agent. In larger installations, a Directory Agent collects information
from Service Agents and creates a central repository. The Extreme Networks solution relies on
registering “Extreme Networks” as an SLP Service Agent.
•
Domain Name Server (DNS) — A server used as an alternate mechanism (if present on the
enterprise network) for the automatic discovery process. Controller, Access Points and Convergence
Software relies on the DNS for Layer 3 deployments and for static conﬁguration of the APs. The
controller can be registered in DNS, to provide DNS assisted AP discovery. In addition, DNS can also
be used for resolving RADIUS server hostnames.
•
Web Authentication Server — A server that can be used for external Captive Portal and external
authentication. The controller has an internal Captive portal presentation page, which allows web
authentication (web redirection) to take place without the need for an external Captive Portal server.
RADIUS Accounting Server (Remote Access Dial-In User Service) (RFC2866) — A server that is
required if RADIUS Accounting is enabled.
•
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) — A Manager Server that is required if forwarding
SNMP messages is enabled.
Network Infrastructure — The Ethernet switches and routers must be conﬁgured to allow routing
between the various services noted above. Routing must also be enabled between multiple
controllers for the following features to operate successfully:
ft
ra
•
•
• Availability
• Mobility
• ExtremeWireless Radar for detection of rogue access points
Some features also require the deﬁnition of static routes.
•
•
•
•
Web Browser — A browser provides access to the controller Management user interface to conﬁgure
the ExtremeWireless system.
SSH Enabled Device — A device that supports Secure Shell (SSH) is used for remote (IP) shell access
to the system.
Zone Integrity — The Zone integrity server enhances network security by ensuring clients accessing
your network are compliant with your security roles before gaining access. Zone Integrity Release 5
is supported.
(Optional) Online Signup Server — For use with Hotspot Networks.
Network Traffic Flow
Figure 3 illustrates a simple conﬁguration with a single controller and two APs, each supporting a
wireless device. A RADIUS server on the network provides authentication, and a DHCP server is used by
the APs to discover the location of the controller during the initial registration process. Network interconnectivity is provided by the infrastructure routing and switching devices.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
20
Overview of the ExtremeWireless Solution
ft
ra
Figure 3: Traffic Flow Diagram
Each wireless device sends IP packets in the 802.11 standard to the AP. The AP uses a UDP (User
Datagram Protocol) based tunnelling protocol. In tunneled mode of operation, it encapsulates the
packets and forwards them to the controller. The controller decapsulates the packets and routes these
to destinations on the network. In a typical conﬁguration, access points can be conﬁgured to locally
bridge traffic (to a conﬁgured VLAN) directly at their network point of attachment.
The controller functions like a standard L3 router or L2 switch. It is conﬁgured to route the network
traffic associated with wireless connected users. The controller can also be conﬁgured to simply forward
traffic to a default or static route if dynamic routing is not preferred or available.
Network Security
The Extreme Networks ExtremeWireless system provides features and functionality to control network
access. These are based on standard wireless network security practices.
Current wireless network security methods provide protection. These methods include:
•
•
•
•
Shared Key authentication that relies on Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) keys
Open System that relies on Service Set Identiﬁers (SSIDs)
802.1x that is compliant with Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA)
Captive Portal based on Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) protocol
The Extreme Networks ExtremeWireless system provides the centralized mechanism by which the
corresponding security parameters are conﬁgured for a group of users.
•
Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) is a security protocol for wireless local area networks deﬁned in the
802.11b standard
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
21
Overview of the ExtremeWireless Solution
•
•
Wi-Fi Protected Access version 1 (WPA1™) with Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP)
Wi-Fi Protected Access version 2 (WPA2™) with Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) and Counter
Mode with Cipher Block Chaining Message Authentication Code (CCMP)
Authentication
The controller relies on a RADIUS server, or authentication server, on the enterprise network to provide
the authentication information (whether the user is to be allowed or denied access to the network). A
RADIUS client is implemented to interact with infrastructure RADIUS servers.
The controller provides authentication using:
•
•
Captive Portal — a browser-based mechanism that forces users to a Web page
RADIUS (using IEEE 802.1x)
ft
ra
The 802.1x mechanism is a standard for authentication developed within the 802.11 standard. This
mechanism is implemented at the wireless port, blocking all data traffic between the wireless device
and the network until authentication is complete. Authentication by 802.1x standard uses Extensible
Authentication Protocol (EAP) for the message exchange between the controller and the RADIUS
server.
When 802.1x is used for authentication, the controller provides the capability to dynamically assign perwireless-device WEP keys (called per session WEP keys in 802.11). In the case of WPA, the controller is
not involved in key assignment. Instead, the controller is involved in the information exchange between
RADIUS server and the user’s wireless device to negotiate the appropriate set of keys. With WPA2 the
material exchange produces a Pairwise Master Key which is used by the AP and the user to derive their
temporal keys. (The keys change over time.)
The Extreme Networks ExtremeWireless solution provide a RADIUS redundancy feature that enables
you to deﬁne a failover RADIUS server in the event that the active RADIUS server becomes
unresponsive.
Privacy
Privacy is a mechanism that protects data over wireless and wired networks, usually by encryption
techniques.
Extreme Networks ExtremeWireless supports the Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) standard common to
conventional access points.
It also provides Wi-Fi Protected Access version 1 (WPA v.1) encryption, based on Pairwise Master Key
(PMK) and Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP). The most secure encryption mechanism is WPA
version 2, using Advanced Encryption Standard (AES).
Virtual Network Services
Virtual Network Services (VNS) provide a versatile method of mapping wireless networks to the
topology of an existing wired network.
In releases prior to V7.0, a VNS was a collection of operational entities. Starting with Release V7.0, a
VNS becomes the binding of reusable components:
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
22
Overview of the ExtremeWireless Solution
•
•
WLAN Service components that deﬁne the radio attributes, privacy and authentication settings, and
QoS attributes of the VNS
Role components that deﬁne the topology (typically a VLAN), policy rules, and Class of Service
applied to the traffic of a station.
Figure 4 illustrates the transition of the concept of a VNS to a binding of reusable components.
ft
ra
Figure 4: VNS as a Binding of Reusable Components
WLAN Service components and Role components can be conﬁgured separately and associated with a
VNS when the VNS is created or modiﬁed. Alternatively, they can be conﬁgured during the process of
creating a VNS.
Additionally, Roles can be created using the Extreme Networks Extreme Management Center Policy
Manager or Extreme Management Center Wireless Manager and pushed to the ExtremeWireless
Appliance. Role assignment ensures that the correct topology and traffic behavior are applied to a user
regardless of WLAN service used or VNS assignment.
When VNS components are set up on the controller, among other things, a range of IP addresses is set
aside for the controller’s DHCP server to assign to wireless devices.
If the OSPF (Open Shortest Path First) routing protocol is enabled, the controller advertises the routed
topologies as reachable segments to the wired network infrastructure. The controller routes traffic
between the wireless devices and the wired network.
The controller also supports VLAN-bridged assignment for VNSs. This allows the controller to directly
bridge the set of wireless devices associated with a WLAN service directly to a speciﬁed core VLAN.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
23
Overview of the ExtremeWireless Solution
Each controller model can support a deﬁnable number and an active number of VNSs. See Table 3.
Table 3: VNS and WLAN
Service Capacity
Max Number of Deﬁned Max Number of Deﬁned
VNS
WLAN Services
Max Number of Active
WLAN Services
C5110
256
256
128
C4110
128
128
64
C25
32
32
16
V2110 Small
32
32
16
V2110 Medium
V2110-HyperV
128
128
64
V2110 Large
256
256
128
C5215
256
256
128
C5210
256
256
128
C35
32
16
32
ft
ra
Controller Model
The AP radios can be assigned to each of the conﬁgured WLAN services and, therefore, VNSs in a
system. Each AP can be the subject of 16 service assignments—eight assignments per radio—which
corresponds to the number of SSIDs it can support. Once a radio has all eight slots assigned, it is no
longer eligible for further assignment.
The AP3912 has three additional client ports that can be assigned to a single WLAN Service. For more
information, see Assigning WLAN Services to Client Ports on page 170.
NAC Integration with the Wireless WLAN
The Extreme Networks Wireless WLAN supports integration with a NAC (Network Admission Control)
Gateway. The NAC Gateway can provide your network with authentication, registration, assessment,
remediation, and access control for mobile users.
NAC Gateway integration with Wireless WLAN supports SSID VNSs when used in conjunction with
MAC-based external captive portal authentication.
Figure 5 depicts the topology and workﬂow relationship between Wireless WLAN that is conﬁgured for
external captive portal and a NAC Gateway. With this conﬁguration, the NAC Gateway acts like a
RADIUS proxy server. An alternative is to conﬁgure the NAC Gateway to perform MAC-based
authentication itself, using its own database of MAC addresses and permissions. For more information,
see Creating a NAC VNS Using the VNS Wizard on page 426.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
24
Overview of the ExtremeWireless Solution
ft
ra
Figure 5: WLAN and NAC Integration with External Captive Portal Authentication
1 The client laptop connects to the AP.
The AP determines that authentication is required, and sends an association request to the
appliance.
2 The appliance forwards to the NAC Gateway an access-request message for the client laptop, which is
identiﬁed by its MAC address.
The NAC Gateway forwards the access-request to the RADIUS server. The NAC Gateway acts like a
RADIUS proxy server.
3 The RADIUS server evaluates the access-request and sends an AccessAccept message back to the NAC.
Note
RADIUS servers with captive portal and EAP authentication can be tested for connectivity using the
radtest command. For more information, see the ExtremeWireless CLI Guide.
The NAC receives the access-accept packet. Using its local database, the NAC determines the
correct role to apply to this client laptop and updates the access-accept packet with the role
assignment. The updated AccessAccept message is forwarded to the appliance and AP.
4 The appliance and the AP apply role against the client laptop accordingly. The appliance assigns a set of ﬁlters
to the client laptop’s session and the AP allows the client laptop access to the network.
5 The client laptop interacts with a DHCP server to obtain an IP address.
6 Eventually the client laptop uses its web browser to access a website.
• The appliance determines that the target website is blocked and that the client laptop still requires
authentication.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
25
Overview of the ExtremeWireless Solution
•
•
The appliance sends an HTTP redirect to the client laptop’s browser. The redirect sends the browser to the
web server on the NAC Gateway.
The NAC displays an appropriate web page in the client laptop’s browser. The contents of the page depend
on the current role assignment (enterprise, remediation, assessing, quarantine, or unregistered) for the MAC
address.
7 When the NAC determines that the client laptop is ready for a different role assignment, it sends a ‘disconnect
message’ (RFC 3576) to the appliance.
When the appliance receives the ‘disconnect message’ sent by the NAC, the appliance terminates
the session for the client laptop.
The appliance forwards the command to terminate the client laptop’s session to the AP, which
disconnects the client laptop.
VNS Components
The distinct constituent high-level conﬁgurable umbrella elements of a VNS are:
Topology
Role
ft
ra
•
•
•
•
Classes of Service
WLAN Service
Topology
Topologies represent the networks with which the controller and its APs interact. The main conﬁgurable
attributes of a topology are:
•
•
•
•
Name - a string of alphanumeric characters designated by the administrator.
VLAN ID - the VLAN identiﬁer as speciﬁed in the IEEE 802.1Q deﬁnition.
VLAN tagging options.
Port of presence for the topology on the controller. (This attribute is not required for Routed and
Bridged at AP topologies.)
•
Interface. This attribute is the IP (L3) address assigned to the controller on the network described by
the topology. (Optional.)
•
Type. This attribute describes how traffic is forwarded on the topology. Options are:
• “Physical” - the topology is the native topology of a data plane and it represents the actual
Ethernet ports
• “Management” - the native topology of the controller management port
• “Routed” - the controller is the routing gateway for the routed topology.
• “Bridged at Controller” - the user traffic is bridged (in the L2 sense) between wireless clients and
the core network infrastructure.
• “Bridged at AP” - the user traffic is bridged locally at the AP without being redirected to the
controller
•
•
Exception Filters. Speciﬁes which traffic has access to the controller from the wireless clients or the
infrastructure network.
Certiﬁcates.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
26
Overview of the ExtremeWireless Solution
•
•
Multicast ﬁlters. Deﬁnes the multicast groups that are allowed on a speciﬁc topology segment.
For information about Topology groups, see Creating a Topology Group on page 270.
Role
A Role is a collection of attributes and rules that determine actions taken user traffic accesses the wired
network through the WLAN service (associated to the WLAN Service's SSID). Depending upon its type,
a VNS can have between one and three Authorization Roles associated with it:
ft
ra
Default non-authorized role — This is a mandatory role that covers all traffic from stations that have
not authenticated. At the administrator's discretion the default non-authorized role can be applied
to the traffic of authenticated stations as well.
2 Default authorized role — This is a mandatory role that applies to the traffic of authenticated stations
for which no other role was explicitly speciﬁed. It can be the same as the default non-authorized
role.
3 Third-party AP role — This role applies to the list of MAC addresses corresponding to the wired
interfaces of third party APs speciﬁcally deﬁned by the administrator to be providing the RF access
as an AP WLAN Service. This role is only relevant when applied to third party AP WLAN Services.
Classes of Service
In general, CoS (Class of Service) refers to a set of attributes that deﬁne the importance of a frame while
it is forwarded through the network relative to other packets, and to the maximum throughput per time
unit that a station or port assigned to a speciﬁc role is permitted. The CoS deﬁnes actions to be taken
when rate limits are exceeded.
All incoming packets may follow these steps to determine a CoS:
•
•
•
Classiﬁcation - identiﬁes the ﬁrst matching rule that deﬁnes a CoS.
Marking - modiﬁes the L2 802.1p and/or L3 ToS based on CoS deﬁnition.
Rate limiting (drop) is set.
The system limit for the number of CoS proﬁles on a controller is identical to the number of roles. For
example, the maximum number of CoS proﬁles on a C4110 is 512.
WLAN Services
A WLAN Service represents all the RF, authentication and QoS attributes of a wireless access service
offered by the controller and its APs. A WLAN Service can be one of the following types:
•
Standard — A conventional service. Only APs running ExtremeWireless software can be part of this
WLAN Service. This type of service can be used as a Bridged at Controller, Bridged at AP, or Routed
Topology. This type of service provides access for mobile stations. Roles can be associated with this
type of WLAN service to create a VNS. Hotspot can be enabled for standard WLAN services.
•
Third Party AP — A Wireless Service offered by third party APs. This type of service provides access
for mobile stations. Roles can be assigned to this type of WLAN service to create a VNS.
•
Dynamic Mesh and WDS (Static Mesh)— This is to conﬁgure a group of APs organized into a
hierarchy for purposes of providing a Wireless Distribution Service. This type of service is in essence
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
27
Overview of the ExtremeWireless Solution
•
a wireless trunking service rather than a service that provides access for stations. As such, this
service cannot have roles attached to it.
Remote — A service that resides on the edge (foreign) controller. Pairing a remote service with a
remoteable service on the designated home controller allows you to provision centralized WLAN
Services in the mobility domain. This is known as centralized mobility.
The components of a WLAN Service map to the corresponding components of a VNS in previous
releases. The administrator makes an explicit choice of the type of authentication to use on the WLAN
Service. If the choice of authentication option conﬂicts with any other authentication or privacy choices,
the WLAN Service cannot be enabled.
Routing
Routing can be used on the controller to support the VNS deﬁnitions. Through the user interface you
can conﬁgure routing on the controller to use one of the following routing techniques:
•
ft
ra
Static routes — Use static routes to set the default route of a controller so that legitimate wireless
device traffic can be forwarded to the default gateway.
OSPF (version 2) (RFC2328) — Use OSPF to allow the controller to participate in dynamic route
selection. OSPF is a protocol designed for medium and large IP networks with the ability to segment
routes into different areas by routing information summarization and propagation. Static Route
deﬁnition and OSPF dynamic learning can be combined, and the precedence of a static route
deﬁnition over dynamic rules can be conﬁgured by selecting or clearing the Override dynamic
routes option check box.
•
•
Next-hop routing — Use next-hop routing to specify a unique gateway to which traffic on a VNS is
forwarded. Deﬁning a next-hop for a VNS forces all the traffic in the VNS to be forwarded to the
indicated network device, bypassing any routing deﬁnitions of the controller's route table.
Mobility and Roaming
In typical simple conﬁgurations, APs are set up as bridges that bridge wireless traffic to the local subnet.
In bridging conﬁgurations, the user obtains an IP address from the same subnet as the AP, assuming no
VLAN trunking functionality. If the user roams between APs on the same subnet, it is able to keep using
the same IP address. However, if the user roams to another AP outside of that subnet, its IP address is
no longer valid. The user's client device must recognize that the IP address it has is no longer valid and
re-negotiate a new one on the new subnet. This mechanism does not mandate any action on the user.
The recovery procedure is entirely client device dependent. Some clients automatically attempt to
obtain a new address on roam (which affects roaming latency), while others will hold on to their IP
address. This loss of IP address continuity seriously affects the client's experience in the network,
because in some cases it can take minutes for a new address to be negotiated.
The Extreme Networks ExtremeWireless solution centralizes the user's network point of presence,
therefore abstracting and decoupling the user's IP address assignment from that of the APs location
subnet. That means that the user is able to roam across any AP without losing its own IP address,
regardless of the subnet on which the serving APs are deployed.
In addition, a controller can learn about other controllers on the network and then exchange client
session information. This enables a wireless device user to roam seamlessly between different APs on
different controllers.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
28
Overview of the ExtremeWireless Solution
Network Availability
The Extreme Networks ExtremeWireless solution provides availability against AP outages, controller
outages, and even network outages. The controller in a VLAN bridged topology can potentially allow
the user to retain the IP address in a failover scenario, if the VNS/VLAN is common to both controllers.
For example, availability is provided by deﬁning a paired controller conﬁguration by which each peer
can act as the backup controller for the other's APs. APs in one controller are allowed to fail over and
register with the alternate controller.
If the primary controller fails, all of its associated APs can automatically switch over to another
controller that has been deﬁned as the secondary or backup controller. If an AP reboots, the primary
controller is restored if it is active. However, active APs will continue to be connected to the backup
controller until the administrator releases them back to the primary home controller.
Quality of Service (QoS)
ft
ra
Extreme Networks ExtremeWireless solution provides advanced Quality of Service (QoS) management
to provide better network traffic ﬂow. Such techniques include:
•
WMM (Wi-Fi Multimedia) — WMM is enabled per WLAN service. The controller provides centralized
management of the AP features. For devices with WMM enabled, the standard provides multimedia
enhancements for audio, video, and voice applications. WMM shortens the time between
transmitting packets for higher priority traffic. WMM is part of the 802.11e standard for QoS. In the
context of the ExtremeWireless Solution, the ToS/DSCP ﬁeld is used for classiﬁcation and proper
class of service mapping, output queue selection, and priority tagging.
•
IP ToS (Type of Service) or DSCP (Diffserv Codepoint) — The ToS/DSCP ﬁeld in the IP header of a
frame indicates the priority and class of service for each frame. Adaptive QoS ensures correct
priority handling of client payload packets tunneled between the controller and AP by copying the
IP ToS/DSCP setting from client packet to the header of the encapsulating tunnel packet.
•
Rate Control — Rate Control for user traffic can also be considered as an aspect of QoS. As part of
Role deﬁnition, the user can specify (default) role that includes Ingress and Egress rate control.
Ingress rate control applies to traffic generated by wireless clients and Egress rate control applies to
traffic targeting speciﬁc wireless clients. The bit-rates can be conﬁgured as part of globally available
proﬁles which can be used by any particular conﬁguration. A global default is also deﬁned.
Quality of Service (QoS) management is also provided by:
•
•
•
Assigning high priority to a WLAN service
Adaptive QoS (automatic and all time feature)
Support for legacy devices that use SpectraLink Voice Protocol (SVP) for prioritizing voice traffic
(conﬁgurable)
ExtremeWireless Appliance Product Family
The ExtremeWireless Appliance is available in the following product families:
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
29
Overview of the ExtremeWireless Solution
Table 4: ExtremeWireless Product Families
ExtremeWireless Appliance Model
Number
Speciﬁcations
C5110
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Three data ports supporting up to 525 APs
2 ﬁber optic SR (10Gbps)
1 Ethernet port GigE
One management port (Ethernet) GigE
One console port (DB9 serial)
Four USB ports — two on each front and back panel (only one
port active at a time)
Redundant dual power supply unit
•
Four data ports supporting up to 1000 APs
2 SFP+ (10Gbps)
2 Ethernet port GigE
One management port (Ethernet) GigE
One console port (RJ-45 serial)
Five USB ports — two on front and three on back panel (only one
port active at a time)
Redundant dual power supply unit
C4110
•
•
•
•
•
Four GigE ports supporting up to 250 APs
One management port (Ethernet) GigE
One console port (DB9 serial)
Four USB ports (only one active at a time)
Redundant dual power supply unit
C25
•
•
•
•
Two GigE ports supporting up to 50 APs
One management port GigE
One console port (DB9 serial)
Two USB ports
V2110
•
•
•
Two GigE ports or 10G ﬁber ports supporting up to 525 APs
One management port GigE
USB ports (only one active at a time)
C35
•
•
•
•
Four GigE ports supporting up to 125 APs
One management port GigE
One console port
Two USB ports
C5210/C5215
ft
ra
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
30
3 Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless
Appliance
System Conﬁguration Overview
Logging on to the ExtremeWireless Appliance
Wireless Assistant Home Screen
Working with the Basic Installation Wizard
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance for the First Time
Using a Third-party Location-based Solution
Additional Ongoing Operations of the System
ft
ra
System Conﬁguration Overview
The following section provides a high-level overview of the steps involved in the initial conﬁguration of
ExtremeWireless:
Before you begin the conﬁguration process, research the type of WLAN (Wireless Local Area
Network) deployment that is required. For example, topology and VLAN (Virtual LAN) IDs, SSIDs,
security requirements, and ﬁlter roles.
2 Prepare the network servers. Ensure that the external servers, such as DHCP (Dynamic Host
Conﬁguration Protocol) and RADIUS servers (if applicable) are available and appropriately
conﬁgured.
3 Install the controller. For more information, see the documentation for your controller.
4 Perform the ﬁrst time setup of the controller on the physical network, which includes conﬁguring the
IP addresses of the interfaces on the controller.
a Create a new physical topology and provide the IP address to be the relevant subnet point of
attachment to the existing network.
b To manage the controller through the interface conﬁgured above, select the Mgmt check box on
the Interfaces tab.
c Conﬁgure the data port interfaces to be on separate VLANs, matching the VLANs conﬁgured in
step 3 above. Ensure also that the tagged vs. untagged state is consistent with the switch port
conﬁguration.
d Conﬁgure the time zone. Because changing the time zone requires restarting the controller, it is
recommended that you conﬁgure the time zone during the initial installation and conﬁguration of
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
31
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance
the controller to avoid network interruptions. For more information, see Conﬁguring Network
Time on page 89.
e Apply an activation key ﬁle. If an activation key is not applied, the controller functions with some
features enabled in demonstration mode. Not all features are enabled in demonstration mode.
For example, mobility is not enabled and cannot be used.
Caution
Whenever the licensed region changes on the ExtremeWireless Appliance, all APs are
changed to Auto Channel Select to prevent possible infractions to local RF regulatory
requirements. If this occurs, all manually conﬁgured radio channel settings will be
lost.Installing the new license key before upgrading will prevent the ExtremeWireless
Appliance from changing the licensed region, and in addition, manually conﬁgured
channel settings will be maintained. For more information, see the ExtremeWireless
Maintenance Guide.
5 Conﬁgure the controller for remote access:
ft
ra
a Set up an administration station (laptop) on subnet 192.168.10.0/24. By default, the controller's
Management interface is conﬁgured with the static IP address 192.168.10.1.
b Conﬁgure the controller’s management interface.
c Conﬁgure the data interfaces.
d Set up the controller on the network by conﬁguring the physical data ports.
e Conﬁgure the routing table.
f Conﬁgure static routes or OSPF (Open Shortest Path First) parameters, if appropriate to the
network.
For more information, see Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance for the First Time on page
45.
6 Conﬁgure the traffic topologies your network must support. Topologies represent the controller’s
points of network attachment, and therefore VLANs and port assignments need to be coordinated
with the corresponding network switch ports. For more information, see Conﬁguring a Basic Data
Port Topology on page 266.
7 Conﬁgure roles. Roles are typically bound to topologies. Role application assigns user traffic to the
corresponding network point.
•
•
Roles deﬁne user access rights (ﬁltering or ACL (Access Control List))
Polices reference user's rate control proﬁle.
For more information, see Conﬁguring Roles on page 284.
8 Conﬁgure WLAN services.
• Deﬁne SSID and privacy settings for the wireless link.
•
•
Select the set of APs/Radios on which the service is present.
Conﬁgure the method of credential authentication for wireless users (None, Internal CP, External
CP, GuestPortal, 802.1x[EAP])
For more information, see Conﬁguring WLAN Services on page 318.
9 Create the VNSs.
A VNS binds a WLAN Service to a Role that will be used for default assignment upon a user’s
network attachment.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
32
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance
You can create topologies, roles, and WLAN services ﬁrst, before conﬁguring a VNS, or you can
select one of the wizards (such as the VNS wizard), or you can simply select to create new VNS.
The VNS page then allows for in-place creation and deﬁnition of any dependency it may require,
such as:
•
•
•
•
•
Creating a new WLAN Service
Creating a new role
Creating a new class of service (within a role)
Creating a new topology (within a role)
Creating new rate controls, and other Class of Service parameters
The default shipping conﬁguration does not ship any pre-conﬁgured WLAN Services, VNSs, or
Roles.
10 Install, register, and assign APs to the VNS.
Conﬁrm the latest ﬁrmware version is loaded. For more information, see Performing AP Software
Maintenance on page 235.
•
•
Deploy APs to their corresponding network locations.
If applicable, conﬁgure a default AP template for common radio assignment, whereby APs
automatically receive complete conﬁguration. For typical deployments where all APs are to have
the same conﬁguration, this feature will expedite deployment, as an AP will automatically receive
full conﬁguration (including VNS-related assignments) upon initial registration with the
controller. If applicable, modify the properties or settings of the APs. For more information, see
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs on page 101.
•
•
Connect the APs to the controller.
Once the APs are powered on, they automatically begin the Discovery process of the controller,
based on factors that include:
ft
ra
•
• Their Registration mode (on the AP Registration screen)
• The enterprise network services that will support the discovery process
Logging on to the ExtremeWireless Appliance
Start your Web browser (Internet Explorer version 11 or later, FireFox, or Chrome).
See the Release Notes for the supported web browsers.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
33
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance
2 In the browser address bar, type the following, using the IP address of your controller:
https://192.168.10.1:5825
This launches the Wireless Assistant. The login screen displays.
ft
ra
3 Type your user name and password and click Login . The Wireless Assistant Home screen displays.
Note
The default User Name is "admin". The default Password is "abc123".
Wireless Assistant Home Screen
The Wireless Assistant Home screen provides real-time status information on the current state of the
wireless network. Information is grouped under multiple functional areas, and the Wireless Assistant
Home Screen provides a graphical representation of information related to the active APs (such as the
number of wired packets, stations, and total APs). Navigate the Wireless Assistant using the top menu
bar tabs.
Figure 6: Wireless Assistant Top Menu Bar
The bottom status bar displays the type and description of the current wireless controller, user and
admin login status, ﬂash status, software version and the number of admin users currently logged into
the controller.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
34
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance
ra
Figure 7: Wireless Assistant Home Screen
Table 5 describes the panes on the Wireless Assistant Home Screen.
ft
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
35
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance
Table 5: Wireless Assistant Home Screen
Description
Network Status
Includes real-time totals for the following components. Click the number
displayed to display additional information, such as name, serial number, and IP
address.
• Local APs - total number of active or inactive local conﬁgured APs.
• Foreign APs - total number of active or inactive foreign conﬁgured APs.
Availability pair must be conﬁgured to display additional information.
• Pending APs - total APs pending veriﬁcation.
• Load Groups - total active load groups. Click to display the Active Wireless
Load Groups report.
• Local Stations - total number of active mobile stations. Click to display the All
Active Client report.
• Local & Foreign - total number of active and foreign stations. Click to display
the All Active Client report.
• VNS - total deﬁned VNSs (enabled and disabled). Click to display the total
number of enabled and disabled VNS assignments, respectively, conﬁgured
on the system.
• Availability - status of the controller availability. Click to display controller
settings (Stand-alone, Paired, Fast Failover FFO).
• Mobility Tunnels - status of the mobility tunnel. Click to display controller
settings.
ft
ra
Home Screen Heading
Admin Sessions
Displays information on the total number of recent administrative activities
including:
• Read/Write sessions - total number of currently active GUI and CLI (either
SSH or serial console ones) Read/Write sessions.
• Read-only sessions - total number of currently active GUI and CLI (either SSH
or serial console ones) Read only sessions.
• Guest Access sessions - total number of currently active GuestPortal Manager
sessions that can only be achieved through the GUI.
• Auth Type - lists the presently conﬁgured login mode.
Click each heading to access the Wireless Controller > Login Management
screen. For more information, see Conﬁguring the Login Authentication Mode on
page 75.
Stations by Protocol
Displays a graphical representation of the total number of active stations
grouped by protocol.
Click the Stations by Protocol heading to access the All Active Clients Report.
For more information, see Viewing Statistics for APs on page 627.
APs by Channel
Displays a graphical representation of the total number of active stations and the
number of APs.
Click the APs by Channel heading to access the Active Wireless AP Report. For
more information, see Viewing Statistics for APs on page 627.
Stations by AP
Displays a graphical representation of the total number of active APs grouped by
channel.
Click the Status by AP heading to access the Active Clients by Wireless APs
Report. For more information, see Viewing Statistics for APs on page 627.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
36
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance
Table 5: Wireless Assistant Home Screen (continued)
Description
Applications by WLAN
If Application Visibility is enabled on the WLAN Conﬁguration screen, a pie chart
displaying the top ﬁve applications on that WLAN displays. If Application
Visibility is not enabled, click Enable Application Visibility to display the Apps,
operating systems, and devices used by clients.
The Application Visibility option displays the following information for clients
associated with a selected WLAN:
• IPv4 and IPv6 Addresses
• Host Name
• Operating System
• Device Type
• Top 5 Application Groups by Throughput (2-minute interval)
• Top 5 current Application Groups by Bytes, from session start.
• Throughput chart for an application group.
• Average TCP Round Trip Time.
• Average DNS Round Trip Time.
ft
ra
Home Screen Heading
For more information, see Enabling Application Visibility with Device
Identiﬁcation on page 626 and Device Identiﬁcation on page 625.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
37
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance
Table 5: Wireless Assistant Home Screen (continued)
Home Screen Heading
Description
Licensing
Displays licensing information including:
• License mode: License Manager can operate in Lone or Paired mode.
Lone (standalone) - Only local APs are counted against locally
installed capacity keys. ALL Radar In-Service and Guardian APs are
counted against locally installed Radar keys. This is the default license
mode. License Manager switches to Paired mode on the following
conditions: Availability is enabled while License Manager is running
and it receives a license request or Availability is enabled before the
License Manger starts up and the database has counters for the peers
capacity and Radar keys.
ft
ra
Paired - Both local and foreign APs are counted against sum of locally
installed capacity keys and capacity keys, pooled from the peer
controller. ALL Radar In-Service and Guardian APs are counted
against sum or locally installed Radar keys, installed on the peer
controller. License Manager switches to Lone (standalone) mode if
Availability is disabled or if the peer IP address is changed.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Unused AP Licenses: total number of unassigned AP licenses (for more
information, see Applying Product License Keys on page 47).
Local AP Licenses: total number of AP licenses local to the primary controller.
Foreign AP Licenses: total number of AP licenses local to the secondary
(backup) controller.
Local Radar Licenses: total number of Radar licenses local to the primary
controller.
Foreign Radar Licenses: total number of Radar licenses local to the secondary
(backup) controller.
Unused Radar Licenses: total number of unassigned licenses for Radar (for
more information, see Radar License Requirements on page 565).
Days Remaining: number of days remaining on this license key.
Regulatory Domain: Domain information for this license period.
Click the Licensing heading to access the Wireless Controller > Software
Maintenance screen. For more information, see Installing the License Keys on
page 49.
Health
Displays network health statistics including:
• Local AP Uptime (min)
• APs with > 30 clients
• APs in low power mode
This feature is for AP39xx only. This option displays when there is one
or more AP39xx in low power mode. Click to display details of the AP.
•
Failed VNS RADIUS Txs
Click each heading to access the Active Wireless APs Report. For more
information, see Viewing Statistics for APs on page 627.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
38
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance
Table 5: Wireless Assistant Home Screen (continued)
Home Screen Heading
Description
Radar
Displays totals for the following security related statistics:
• AP Remote Access - click to access the APs > AP Registration page
• Unsecured WLANs - click to access the WLAN Security Report
• Uncategorized APs - click to access the list of Uncategorized APs
• Active Threats - click to access the Active Threats Report
• Active Countermeasures - click to access the Active Countermeasures Report
• APs denied by license - click to access the list of APs denied by license
constraints.
For more information, see Wireless AP Registration on page 123, and Working
with Radar Reports on page 593.
Events
ft
ra
Displays major events that impact network performance and efficiency. Each
event listed includes a timestamp of the event, the type or classiﬁcation of the
event, which component is impacted by the event, and a log message providing
speciﬁc information for the event.
Click the Events heading to access the Log > Logs & Traces page. For more
information, see Working with Reports and Statistics on page 621.
Working with the Basic Installation Wizard
The Extreme Networks ExtremeWireless system provides a basic installation wizard that can help
administrators conﬁgure the minimum controller settings that are necessary to deploy a functioning
ExtremeWireless system solution on a network.
Use the Basic Installation Wizard to quickly conﬁgure the controller for deployment, and later to revise
the controller conﬁguration as needed.
The Basic Installation Wizard launches when you log on to the controller for the ﬁrst time and when the
system has been reset to the factory default settings. You can also launch the wizard from the left pane
of the controller Conﬁguration screen anytime.
To conﬁgure the controller using the Basic Installation Wizard:
Log on to the controller. For more information, see Logging on to the ExtremeWireless Appliance on
page 33.
2 From the top menu, click Controller. The Wireless Controller Conﬁguration screen displays.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
39
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance
3 In the left pane, click Administration > Installation Wizard.
The Basic Installation Wizard screen displays.
af
4 In the Time Settings section, conﬁgure the controller timezone:
•
•
Continent or Ocean — Select the continent for the time zone.
Time Zone Region — Select the appropriate time zone region for the selected continent.
5 To conﬁgure the controller’s time, do one of the following:
To manually set the controller time, click Set time. The Year, Month, Day, HR, and Min. ﬁelds
display, where you can use the drop-down lists to specify the time values.
•
To use the controller as the NTP time server, select the Run local NTP Server option. In the
Server ﬁeld, enter the IP address or Domain Name for the NTP server.
•
To use NTP to set the controller time, select the Use NTP option, and then type the IP address of
an NTP time server that is accessible on the enterprise network.
•
The Network Time Protocol is a protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems over
packet-switched data networks.
6 In the Server ﬁeld, enter the IP address or Domain Name for the NTP server.
Note
The Server Address ﬁeld supports both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
40
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance
7 In the Topology Conﬁguration section, the physical interface of the controller data port, the IP
Address and Netmask values for the data port, and the VLAN ID display as read-only values.
For information on how to obtain a temporary IP address from the network, click How to obtain a
temporary IP address.
8 Click Next. The Management screen displays
Basic Installation Wizard - Management Screen
The Management screen displays:
In the AP Password section, enter a password for the AP. Click Unmask to display the password
characters as you type. Access Points are shipped with default passwords. You must create a new
SSH Access Password here.
Note
Passwords can include the following characters: A-Z a-z 0-9 ~!@#$%^&*()_+|-=\{}[];<>?,.
Password cannot include the following characters: / ` ' " : or a space.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
41
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance
2 In the Management Port section, conﬁrm the port conﬁguration values that were deﬁned when the
controller was physically deployed on the network. If applicable, edit these values:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Static IP Address — Displays the IPv4 address for the controller’s management port. Revise this
as appropriate for the enterprise network.
Netmask — Displays the appropriate subnet mask for the IP address to separate the network
portion from the host portion of the address.
Gateway — Displays the default gateway of the network.
Static IPv6 Address — Displays the IPv6 address for the controller’s management port. Revise
this as appropriate for the enterprise network.
Preﬁx Length — Length of the IPv6 preﬁx. Maximum is 64 bits.
Gateway — Displays the default gateway of the network.
3 In the SNMP section, click V2c or V3 in the Mode drop-down list to enable SNMP (Simple Network
Management Protocol), if applicable.
If you selected V2c, the Community options display:
Read Community — Type the password that is used for read-only SNMP communication.
Write Community — Type the password that is used for write SNMP communication.
Trap Destination — Type the IP address of the server used as the network manager that will
receive SNMP messages.
ft
ra
•
•
•
Note
The Trap Destination Address ﬁeld supports both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses.
•
•
If you selected V3, the Syslog Server options display:
Enable — Click to enable Syslog Server.
IP Address — Enter the IP address for the Syslog Server.
4 In the OSPF section, select the Enable check box to enable OSPF, if applicable. Use OSPF to allow
the controller to participate in dynamic route selection. OSPF is a protocol designed for medium and
large IP networks with the ability to segment routes into different areas by routing information
summarization and propagation.
Do the following:
•
Area ID — Type the desired area. Area 0.0.0.0 is the main area in OSPF.
5 In the Syslog Server section, select the Enable check box to enable the syslog protocol for the
controller, if applicable. Syslog is a protocol used for the transmission of event notiﬁcation messages
across networks.
In the IP Address ﬁeld, type the IP address of the syslog server.
Note
The Syslog Server IP Address ﬁeld supports both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses.
6 Click Next. The Services screen displays.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
42
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance
Basic Installation Wizard - Services Screen
af
In the RADIUS section, select the Enable check box to enable RADIUS login authentication, if
applicable.
Do the following:
•
•
•
RADIUS login authentication uses a RADIUS server to authenticate user login attempts. RADIUS is a
client/server authentication and authorization access protocol used by a network access server
(NAS) to authenticate users attempting to connect to a network device.
Server Alias — Type a name that you want to assign to the RADIUS server. You can type a name
or IP address of the server.
IP Address — Type the RADIUS server's hostname or IP address.
Shared Secret — Type the password that will be used to validate the connection between the
controller and the RADIUS server.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
43
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance
2 In the Mobility section, select the Enable check box to enable the controller mobility feature, if
applicable. Mobility allows a wireless device user to roam seamlessly between different APs on the
same or different controllers.
A dialog informs you that NTP is required for the mobility feature and prompts you to conﬁrm you
want to enable mobility.
Note
If the ExtremeWireless Appliance is conﬁgured as a mobility agent, it will act as an NTP
client and use the mobility manager as the NTP server. If the appliance is conﬁgured as a
mobility manager, its local NTP will be enabled for the mobility domain.
3 Click OK to continue, and then do the following:
•
•
Role — Select the role for the controller, Manager or Agent. One controller on the network is
designated as the mobility manager and all other controllers are designated as mobility agents.
Port — Click the interface on the controller to be used for communication between mobility
manager and mobility agent. Ensure that the selected interface is routable on the network. For
more information, see Conﬁguring Mobility on page 555.
ft
ra
•
Manager IP — Type the IP address of the mobility manager port if the controller is conﬁgured as
the mobility agent.
4 In the Default VNS section, select the Enable check box to enable a default VNS for the controller.
Note
Refer to Virtual Network Services on page 22 for more information about the default VNS.
The default VNS parameters display.
5 Click Finish.
The Success screen displays.
Basic Installation Wizard - Success Screen
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
44
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance
We recommend that you change the factory default administrator password.
af
2 To change the administrator password:
a Type a new administrator password in the New Password.
b Conﬁrm the new password in the Conﬁrm Password ﬁeld.
c Click Save. Your new password is saved.
3 Click OK, and then click Close.
Note
The ExtremeWireless Appliance reboots after you click Save if the time zone is changed
during the Basic Install Wizard. If the IP address of the management port is changed
during the conﬁguration with the Basic Install Wizard, the ExtremeWireless Assistant
session is terminated and you will need to log back in with the new IP address.
The Wireless Assistant home screen displays.
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance for the First Time
After the ExtremeWireless Appliance is deployed, perform the following conﬁguration tasks:
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
45
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Changing the Administrator Password on page 46
Applying Product License Keys on page 47
Setting Up the Data Ports on page 51
Setting Up Internal VLAN ID and Multicast Support on page 58
Setting Up Static Routes on page 59
Setting Up OSPF Routing on page 61
Conﬁguring Filtering at the Interface Level on page 65
Protecting Controller Interfaces and the Internal Captive Portal Page on page 69
Conﬁguring the Login Authentication Mode on page 75
Conﬁguring SNMP on page 85
Conﬁguring Network Time on page 89
Conﬁguring DNS Servers for Resolving Host Names of NTP and RADIUS Servers on page 94
The basic installation wizard automatically conﬁgures aspects of the controller deployment. You can
modify that conﬁguration according to your network speciﬁcations.
ft
ra
Changing the Administrator Password
Extreme Networks recommends that you change your default administrator password once your
system is deployed. The ExtremeWireless Appliance default password is abc123. When the controller is
installed and you elect to change the default password, the new password must be a minimum of eight
characters.
The minimum eight character password length is not applied to existing passwords. For example, if a six
character password is already being used and an upgrade of the software is performed, the software
does not require the password to be changed to a minimum of eight characters. However, once the
upgrade is completed and a new account is created, or the password of an existing account is changed,
the new password length minimum will be enforced.
To Change the Administrator Password:
From the top menu, click Controller.
In the left pane, click Login Management.
In the Full Administrator table, click the administrator user name.
In the Password ﬁeld, type the new administrator password.
In the Conﬁrm Password ﬁeld, type the new administrator password again.
Click Change Password.
Note
The ExtremeWireless Controller provides you with local login authentication mode, the
RADIUS-based login authentication mode, and combinations of the two authentication
modes. The local login authentication is enabled by default. For more information, see
Conﬁguring the Login Authentication Mode on page 75.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
46
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance
Applying Product License Keys
The controller’s license system works on simple software-based key strings. A key string consists of a
series of numbers and/or letters. Using these key strings, you can license the software, and enhance the
capacity of the controller to manage additional APs.
The key strings can be classiﬁed into the following variants:
•
Activation Key — Activates the software. This key is further classiﬁed into sub-variants:
• Temporary Activation Key — Activates the software for a trial period of 90 days.
• Permanent Activation Key — Activates the software for an inﬁnite period.
• Cloud provider license.
• Subscription license.
Note
You must obtain a speciﬁc activation key to run release v10.01 or later. Once installed, the
number of available Radar licenses increments by 2.
•
ft
ra
Option Key — Activates the optional feature:
• Capacity Enhancement Key Format — For AP:
Enhances the capacity of the controller to manage additional APs.
You may have to add multiple capacity enhancement keys to reach the ExtremeWireless's limit.
Depending on the appliance model, a capacity enhancement key adds the following APs:
C5110 — Adds 25 wireless APs
C5210 — Adds 25 or 100 wireless APs
C5215 — Adds 25 or 100 wireless APs
C4110 — Adds 25 wireless APs
C25 — Adds 1 or 16 wireless APs
C35 — Adds 1 or 16 wireless APs
V2110 — Adds 1 or 16 wireless APs
Note
If you connect additional wireless APs to an ExtremeWireless controller that has a
permanent activation key without installing a capacity enhancement key, a grace
period of seven days will start. You must install the correct key during the grace period.
If you do not install the key, the controller will start generating event logs every 15
minutes, indicating that the key is required. In addition, you will not be able to edit the
Virtual Network Services (VNS) parameters.
• Capacity Enhancement Key Format — For Radar:
Enhances the capacity of the controller to manage Radar licenses for multiple APs. Radar
capacity licenses are only required for In-Service Scan Proﬁles (for more information, see Radar
License Requirements on page 565). The capacity enhancement key includes a capacity
increment which determines the number of APs supported as follows:
License format: RADCAP (where is the capacity increment):
RADCAP001 — Adds 1 wireless AP
RADCAP016 — Adds 16 wireless APs
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
47
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance
RADCAP025 — Adds 25 wireless APs
RADCAP100 — Adds 100 wireless APs
Note
Any AP assigned to an In-Service scan proﬁle counts as 1 against the licensed Radar
capacity.
The controller can be in the following licensing modes:
• Unlicensed — When the controller is not licensed, it operates in ‘demo mode.’ In ‘demo mode,’ the
controller allows you to operate as many APs as you want, subject to the maximum limit of the
platform type. In demo mode, you can use only the b/g radio, with channels 6, 11, and auto. 11n
support and Mobility are disabled in demo mode.
•
Licensed with a temporary activation key — A temporary activation key comes with a regulatory
domain. With the temporary activation key, you can select a country from the domain and operate
the APs on any channel permitted by the country. A temporary activation key allows you to use all
software features. You can operate as many APs as you want, subject to the maximum limit of the
platform type.
ft
ra
A temporary activation key is valid for 90 days. Once the 90 days are up, the temporary key expires.
You must get a permanent activation key and install it on the controller. If you do not install a
permanent activation key, the controller will start generating event logs every 15 minutes, indicating
that an appropriate license is required for the current software version. In addition, you will not be
able to edit the Virtual Network Services (VNS) parameters.
•
Cloud Provider — A Cloud Provider license is valid for a period of 5 years. License pooling is not
supported because the values are set at the platform limits. Cloud Provider licenses enable local APs
with the system limit of the platform, while the radar licenses are set at twice the system limits. e.g.
for V2110 medium, local AP licenses available are 250 and Local radar licenses available are 500.
•
Subscription — A subscription license can be generated for a period between 1 to 255 days. License
pooling is not supported because the values are set at the platform limits. A Subscription license
enables local APs with the system limit of the platform, while the radar licenses are set at twice the
system limits. e.g. for V2110 medium, local AP licenses available are 250 and Local radar licenses
available are 500.
•
Licensed with permanent activation key — A permanent activation key is valid for an inﬁnite
period. In addition, unlike the temporary activation key, the permanent activation key allows you to
operate a stipulated number of the APs, depending upon the platform type. If you want to connect
additional APs, you have to install a capacity enhancement key. You may even have to install multiple
capacity enhancement keys to reach the controller’s limit.
The Table 6 lists the platform type and the corresponding number of the APs allowed by the
permanent activation key.
Table 6: Platform Type / Wireless APs Allowed by Permanent Activation Key
Platform
Wireless APs permitted by
permanent activation key
Platform’s optimum
limit
Number of capacity enhancement
keys to reach the optimum limit
C25
16
50
4 to 34 (depending on the
enhancement license type used)
C35
50
125
15 to 75 (depending on the
enhancement license type used)
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
48
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance
Table 6: Platform Type / Wireless APs Allowed by Permanent Activation Key
(continued)
Wireless APs permitted by
permanent activation key
Platform’s optimum
limit
Number of capacity enhancement
keys to reach the optimum limit
C4110
50
250
C5110
150
525
15
C5210
100
1000
9 to 36 (depending on the
enhancement license type used)
C5215
100
1000
9 to 36 (depending on the
enhancement license type used)
V2110 (Small)
50
17 to 42 (depending on the
enhancement license type used)
V2110
(Medium)
250
12 to 242 (depending on the
enhancement license type used)
V2110 (Large)
525
37 to 517 (depending on the
enhancement license type used)
ft
ra
Platform
If the controller detects multiple license violations, such as capacity enhancement, a grace period
counter starts from the moment the ﬁrst violation occurred. The controller generates event logs for
every violation. To leave the grace period, clear all outstanding license violations.
The controller can be in an unlicensed state for an inﬁnite period. However, if you install a temporary
activation key, the unlicensed state is terminated. After the validity of a temporary activation key and
the related grace period expire, the controller generates event logs every 15 minutes, indicating that an
appropriate license is required for the current software version. In addition, you will not be able to edit
the Virtual Network Services (VNS) parameters.
License Pooling
If the controller is paired with an availability partner, you can redistribute licenses when a Capacity
Enhancement Key (AP or Radar) is installed. Both controllers must be running at least v9.01 and both
members must have a permanent license key. Separate pools will be introduced for each type of license,
and licenses installed on either member of an availability pair are shared across the pair automatically.
License pooling is supported in fast failover and legacy availability setups. The limit of distribution is set
by the license key; therefore if a controller has two keys of 25 APs each, then you will be allowed to
transfer 25 or 50 APs to the former peer controller (for more information, see Availability on page 537).
License pooling is not supported for Cloud Provider and Subscription license types since the values are
already set at the platform system limits.
Installing the License Keys
This section describes how to install the license key on the controller. It does not explain how to
generate the license key. For information on how to generate the license key, see the ExtremeWireless
License Certiﬁcate, which is sent to you via traditional mail.
For more information on licensing, see Licensing Considerations on page 108.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
49
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance
You have to type the license keys on the Wireless Assistant GUI.
To install the license keys:
1 From the top menu, click Controller.
2 In the left pane, click Administration > Software Maintenance.
3 Click the EWC Product Keys tab.
The bottom pane displays the license summary.
Figure 8: Product Keys Tab
4 If you are installing a temporary or permanent activation license key, type the key in the Activation
Key ﬁeld, and then click the Apply Activation Key button.
5 If you are installing a capacity enhancement, type the key in the Option Key ﬁeld, and then click the
Apply Option Key button.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
50
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance
6 To view installed keys, click View Installed Keys. The Installed Licensed Keys dialog displays.
ra
Figure 9: Installed License Keys
Setting Up the Data Ports
ft
A new controller is shipped from the factory with all its data ports set up. Support of management
traffic is disabled on all data ports. By default, data interface states are enabled. A disabled interface
does not allow data to ﬂow (receive/transmit).
Physical ports are represented by the L2 (Ethernet) Ports. The L2 port can be accessed from L2 Ports
tabs under ExtremeWireless Controller Conﬁguration. The L2 Ports cannot be removed from the system
but their operational status can be changed. Refer to Viewing and Changing the L2 Ports Information
on page 52.
Link Aggregation ports are represented by the L2 (peer-to-peer) LAG (Link Aggregation Group) Ports.
The L2 port and Topology information can be accessed from L2 Ports and Topology tabs under
ExtremeWireless Controller Conﬁguration. The LAG L2 Ports cannot be removed from the system but
their operational status can be changed. Refer to Viewing and Changing the L2 Ports Information on
page 52.
Note
You can redeﬁne a data port to function as a Third-Party AP Port. Refer to Viewing and
Changing the Physical Topologies on page 54 for more information.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
51
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance
Viewing and Changing the L2 Ports Information
To view and change the l2 port information:
1 From the top menu, click Controller.
2 In the left pane, click Network > L2 Ports. The L2 Ports tab is displayed.
ft
ra
3 The L2 Ports tab presents the Physical (that is, Ethernet) and LAG (peer to peer) data ports that
exist on the controller. These ports cannot be deleted and new ones cannot be created.
LAG ports are statically conﬁgured by adding/removing physical ports from the LAG. Physical port
belong to at most one LAG at one time. L2 port attached to a LAG port does not have any properties
and could not be attached to any topology. The L2 ports attached to LAG ports can be enabled or
disabled. Optional, if changes occur to the port physical parameters (speed, half or full duplex), a
warning will be displayed to indicate that the L2 port does not meet LAG conditions.
Considerations for attaching/detaching regular L2 ports to LAG ports:
•
•
•
•
Regular L2 port should not have any bridged and physical topologies associated with the port.
Regular L2 port should not be disabled.
•
After detaching the L2 port, it could be attached to any bridged or physical topology or points
via a routing table to the port any Routed topology.
Jumbo Frames support is a feature that allows the conﬁguration of physical Maximum
Transmission Unit (MTU) sizes larger than the standard 1500 bytes on the AP and controller.
When Jumbo Frames is enabled, the maximum MTU is 1800 bytes.
•
L2 ports can be detached from LAG ports regardless of any topologies attached to the LAG port.
If the L2 port is the last remaining in LAG, a warning will be issued. If last port of the LAG has
been detached, the LAG should be in operational DOWN state.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
52
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance
4 Assigning any bridged or physical topology without specifying an L2 port is not supported.
However, you can move any bridged and physical topology to either a physical or LAG L2 port.
Physical:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
C5110 — Three data ports, displayed as esa0, esa1, and esa2.
C5210 — Four data ports, displayed as esa0, esa1, esa2, and esa3.
C5215 — Four data ports, displayed as esa0, esa1, esa2, and esa3.
C4110 — Four data ports, displayed as Port1, Port2, Port3, and Port4.
C25 — Two data ports, displayed as esa0 and esa1.
C35 — Four data ports, displayed as esa0, esa1, esa2, and esa3.
V2110 — Two data ports, displayed as esa0 and esa1.
Link Aggregation:
•
•
•
•
•
•
C5110 — One data port, displayed as lag1
C5210 — Two data ports, displayed as lag1 and lag2.
C5215 — Two data ports, displayed as lag1 and lag2.
ft
ra
C4110 — Two data ports, displayed as lag1 and lag2.
C35 — Two data ports, displayed as lag1 and lag2.
C25 — One data port, displayed as lag1.
5 An “Admin” port is created by default. This represents a physical port, separate from the other data
ports, being used for management connectivity. For more information, see Conﬁguring the Admin
Port on page 263.
Parameters displayed for the L2 Ports are:
•
Operational status, represented graphically with a green checkmark (UP) or red X (DOWN). This
is the only conﬁgurable parameter.
•
•
•
•
•
Port name, as described above.
MAC address, as per Ethernet standard.
Untagged VLAN, displays the associated untagged VLAN ID. This ID is unique among topologies.
Tagged VLAN, displays the associated tagged VLAN ID.
Attached Physical L2 Ports (Link Aggregation L2 Ports only) select the physical L2 ports
associated with the link aggregation L2 Ports.
Note
Refer to Viewing and Changing the Physical Topologies on page 54 for more information
about L2 port topologies.
6 If desired, change the operational status by clicking the Enable check box.
You can change the operational state for each port. By default, data interface states are enabled. If
they are not enabled, you can enable them individually. A disabled interface does not allow data to
ﬂow (receive/transmit).
7 If support of MTU sizes above 1500 bytes is required, click Enable Jumbo Frames support. This will
extend the MTU size to 1800 bytes on the data link layer.
Enabling Jumbo Frames support requires that port speed to be 1Gbps or higher on the controller
and the APs which support Jumbo Frames. Jumbo Frames are not supported on 10 or 100 Mbps
speeds.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
53
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance
Viewing and Changing the Physical Topologies
To view and change the L2 Port topologies:
1 From the top menu, click Controller.
2 In the left pane, click Network > Topologies.
An associated topology entry is created by default for each L2 Port with the same name.
The Topologies tab is displayed.
ft
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
54
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance
3 To make changes, select a speciﬁc topology.
The Edit Topology dialog appears.
ft
ra
For the data ports predeﬁned in the system, Name and Mode are not conﬁgurable.
4 Optionally, conﬁgure one of the physical topologies for Third Party AP connectivity by clicking the
3rd Party AP Topology check box.
You must conﬁgure a topology to which you will be connecting third-party APs by checking this
box. Only one topology can be conﬁgured for third-party APs.
Third-party APs must be deployed within a segregated network for which the controller becomes
the single point of access (i.e., routing gateway). When you deﬁne a third-party AP topology, the
interface segregates the third-party AP from the remaining network.
5 To conﬁgure an interface for VLAN assignment, conﬁgure the VLAN Settings in the Layer 2 box.
When you conﬁgure a controller port to be a member of a VLAN, you must ensure that the VLAN
conﬁguration (VLAN ID, tagged or untagged attribute, and Port ID) is matched with the correct
conﬁguration on the network switch.
6 To replicate topology settings, click Synchronize in the Status ﬁeld.
7 If the desired IP conﬁguration is different from the one displayed, change the Interface IP and Mask
accordingly in the Layer 3 box.
For this type of data interface, the Layer 3 check box is selected automatically. This allows for IP
Interface and subnet conﬁguration together with other networking services.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
55
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance
8 The MTU value speciﬁes the Maximum Transmission Unit or maximum packet size for this topology.
The ﬁxed value is 1500 bytes for physical topologies.
If you are using OSPF, be sure that the MTU of all the interfaces in the OSPF link match.
Note
If the routed connection to an AP traverses a link that imposes a lower MTU than the
default 1500 bytes, the controller and AP participate in automatic MTU discovery and
adjust their settings accordingly. At the controller, MTU adjustments are tracked on a per
AP basis. If the ExtremeWireless software cannot discover the MTU size, it enforces the
static MTU size.
9 To enable AP registration through this interface, select the AP Registration check box.
Wireless APs use this port for discovery and registration. Other controllers can use this port to
enable inter-controller device mobility if this port is conﬁgured to use SLP or the controller is
running as a manager and SLP is the discovery protocol used by the agents.
10 To enable management traffic, select the Management Traffic check box. Enabling management
provides access to SNMP (v1/v2c, v3), SSH, and HTTPs management interfaces.
ft
ra
Note
This option does not override the built-in protection ﬁlters on the port. The built-in
protection ﬁlters for the port, which are restrictive in the types of packets that are allowed
to reach the management plane, are extended with a set of deﬁnitions that allow for
access to system management services through that interface (SSH, SNMP, HTTPS:5825).
11 To enable the local DHCP Server on the controller, in the DHCPﬁeld, select Local Server. Then, click
on the Conﬁgure button to open the DHCP conﬁguration pop-up window.
Note
The local DHCP Server is useful as a general-purpose DHCP Server for small subnets.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
56
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance
a In the Domain Name ﬁeld, type the name of the domain that you want the APs to use for DNS
Server’s discovery.
b In the Lease (seconds) default ﬁeld, type the time period for which the IP address will be
allocated to the APs (or any other device requesting it).
c In the Lease (seconds) max ﬁeld, type the maximum time period in seconds for which the IP
address will be allocated to the APs.
d In the DNS Servers ﬁeld, type the DNS Server’s IP address if you have a DNS Server.
e In the WINS ﬁeld, type the WINS Server’s IP address if you have a WINS Server.
Note
You can type multiple entries in the DNS Servers and WINS ﬁelds. Each entry must be
separate by a comma. These two ﬁelds are not mandatory to enable the local DHCP
feature.
In the Gateway ﬁeld, type the IP address of the default gateway.
ft
ra
Note
Since the controller is not allowed to be the gateway for the segment, including APs,
you cannot use the Interface IP address as the gateway address for physical and
Bridged at Controller topology. For Routed topology, the controller IP address must be
the gateway.
g Conﬁgure the address range from which the local DHCP Server will allocate IP addresses to the
APs.
•
•
In the Address Range: from ﬁeld, type the starting IP address of the IP address range.
In the Address Range: to ﬁeld, type the ending IP address of the IP address range.
h Click the Exclusion(s) button to exclude IP addresses from allocation by the DHCP Server. The
DHCP Address Exclusion window opens.
The controller automatically adds the IP addresses of the Interfaces (Ports), and the default gateway
to the exclusion list. You cannot remove these IP addresses from the exclusion list.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
57
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance
ft
ra
•
•
Select Range. In the From ﬁeld, type the starting IP address of the IP address range that you
want to exclude from the DHCP allocation.
In the To ﬁeld, type the ending IP address of the IP address range that you want to exclude from
the DHCP allocation.
•
To exclude a single address, select the Single Address radio button and type the IP address in the
adjacent ﬁeld.
•
In the Comment ﬁeld, type any relevant comment. For example, you can type the reason for
which a certain IP address is excluded from the DHCP allocation.
Click Add. The excluded IP addresses are displayed in the IP Address(es) to exclude from DHCP
Address Range ﬁeld.
•
•
•
To delete a IP Address from the exclusion list, select it in the IP Address(es) to exclude from
DHCP Range ﬁeld, and then click Delete.
To save your changes, click OK.
Note
The Broadcast (B’cast) Address ﬁeld is view only. This ﬁeld is computed from the mask
and the IP addresses.
Setting Up Internal VLAN ID and Multicast Support
You can conﬁgure the Internal VLAN ID, and enable multicast support. The internal VLAN used only
internally and is not visible on the external traffic. The physical topology used for multicast is
represented by a physical topology to/from which the multicast traffic is forwarded in conjunction with
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
58
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance
the virtual routed topologies (and VNSs) conﬁgured on the controller. Please note that no multicast
routing is available at this time.
To conﬁgure the Internal VLAN ID and enable multicast support:
1 From the top menu, click Controller.
2 In the left pane, click Network > Topologies.
The Topologies tab is displayed.
ft
3 In the Internal VLAN ID ﬁeld, type the internal VLAN ID.
4 From the Multicast Support drop-down list, select the desired physical topology.
5 To save your changes, click Save.
Setting Up Static Routes
When setting up a controller routing protocol, you must deﬁne a default route to your enterprise
network, either with a static route or by using the OSPF protocol. A default route enables the controller
to forward packets to destinations that do not match a more speciﬁc route deﬁnition.
To Set a Static Route on the controller:
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
59
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance
From the top menu, click Controller.
The Wireless Controller Conﬁguration screen displays.
2 In the left pane, click Network > Routing Protocols.
The Static Routes tab is displayed.
ra
3 To add a new route, click New, and in the Edit route dialog, enter the following information:
•
In the Destination Address ﬁeld, type the IP address of the destination controller.
To deﬁne a default static route for any unknown address not in the routing table, type 0.0.0.0.
In the Subnet Mask ﬁeld, type the appropriate subnet mask to separate the network portion from
the host portion of the IP address (typically 255.255.255.0). To deﬁne the default static route for
any unknown address, type 0.0.0.0.
•
In the Gateway ﬁeld, type the IP address of the adjacent router port or gateway on the same
subnet as the controller to which to forward these packets. This is the IP address of the next hop
between the controller and the packet’s ultimate destination.
•
Select the Override dynamic routes check box to give priority over the OSPF learned routes,
including the default route, which the controller uses for routing. This option is enabled by
default.
To remove this priority for static routes, so that routing is controlled dynamically at all times, clear
the Override dynamic routes check box.
•
ft
•
Note
If you enable dynamic routing (OSPF), the dynamic routes will normally have priority
for outgoing routing. For internal routing on the controller, the static routes normally
have priority.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
60
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance
4 To save your changes, click Save.
Viewing the Forwarding Table
You can view the deﬁned routes, whether static or OSPF, and their current status in the forwarding
table.
To view the forwarding table on the controller:
From the Routing Protocols Static Routes tab, click View Forwarding Table. The Forwarding Table
is displayed.
2 Alternatively, from the top menu, click Reports. The Available AP Reports screen displays.
3 In the left pane, click Routing Protocols, then click Forwarding Table.
The Forwarding Table is displayed.
ft
ra
This report displays all deﬁned routes, whether static or OSPF, and their current status.
4 To update the display, click Refresh.
Setting Up OSPF Routing
Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) is a robust link-state routing protocol. OSPF forms adjacencies with
neighbors and shares information via the Designated Router (DR) and Backup DR using link state
advertisements. Areas in OSPF are used to limit LSAs and summarize routes. Everyone connects to area
zero, the backbone.
Related Links
Enabling OSPF Routing on page 62
Setting OSPF Routing Settings on page 62
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
61
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance
Conﬁrming OSPF Ports on page 65
Enabling OSPF Routing
To enable OSPF (OSPF RFC2328) routing, you must:
Specify at least one topology on which OSPF is enabled on the Port Settings option of the OSPF tab.
This is the interface on which you can establish OSPF adjacency.
2 Enable OSPF globally on the controller.
3 Deﬁne the global OSPF parameters.
4 Ensure that the OSPF parameters deﬁned here for the controller are consistent with the adjacent
routers in the OSPF area. This consistency includes the following:
•
•
ft
ra
If the peer router has different timer settings, the protocol timer settings in the controller must
be changed to match to achieve OSPF adjacency.
The MTU of the ports on either end of an OSPF link must match. The MTU for ports on the
controller is ﬁxed at 1500. This matches the default MTU in standard routers. The maximum MTU
can be increased to 1800 bytes by enabling Jumbo Frames support (for more information, see
Setting Up the Data Ports on page 51).
It is important to ensure that the MTU of the ports on either end of an OSPF link match. If there is a
mismatch in the MTU, then the OSPF adjacency between the controller and the neighboring router
might not get established.
Related Links
Setting Up OSPF Routing on page 61
Setting OSPF Routing Settings on page 62
Conﬁrming OSPF Ports on page 65
Setting OSPF Routing Settings
To set OSPF routing global settings on the controller:
1 From the top menu, click Controller.
2 In the left pane, click Network > Routing Protocols. The Static Routes tab is displayed by default.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
62
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance
3 Click the OSPF tab.
ra
4 From the OSPF Status drop-down list, click On to enable OSPF.
In the Router ID ﬁeld, type the IP address of the controller. This ID must be unique across the OSPF
area. If left blank, the OSPF daemon automatically picks a router ID from one of the controller’s
interface IP addresses.
5 In the Area ID ﬁeld, type the area. 0.0.0.0 is the main area in OSPF.
6 In the Area Type drop-down list, click one of the following:
•
•
ft
•
Default — The default acts as the backbone area (also known as area zero). It forms the core of
an OSPF network. All other areas are connected to it, and inter-area routing happens via a router
connected to the backbone area.
Stub — The stub area does not receive external routes. External routes are deﬁned as routes
which were distributed in OSPF via another routing protocol. Therefore, stub areas typically rely
on a default route to send traffic routes outside the present domain.
Not-so-stubby — The not-so-stubby area is a type of stub area that can import autonomous
system (AS) external routes and send them to the default/backbone area, but cannot receive AS
external routes from the backbone or other areas.
7 To save your changes, click Save.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
63
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance
8 To add a new OSPF interface, click New or select a port to conﬁgure by clicking on the desired port
in the Port Settings table.
The Edit Port dialog displays.
ft
ra
9 In the Link Cost ﬁeld, type the OSPF standard value for your network for this port. This is the cost of
sending a data packet on the interface. The lower the cost, the more likely the interface is to be used
to forward data traffic.
Note
If more than one port is enabled for OSPF, it is important to prevent the controller from
serving as a router for other network traffic (other than the traffic from wireless device
users on routed topologies controlled by the controller). For more information, see Policy
Rules on page 288.
10 In the Authentication drop-down list, click the authentication type for OSPF on your network: None
or Password. The default setting is None.
11 If Password is selected as the authentication type, in the Password ﬁeld, type the password.
If None is selected as the Authentication type, leave this ﬁeld empty. This password must match on
either end of the OSPF connection.
12 Type the following:
•
Hello-Interval — Speciﬁes the time in seconds (displays OSPF default).The default setting is 10
seconds.
•
Dead-Interval — Speciﬁes the time in seconds (displays OSPF default). The default setting is 40
seconds.
Retransmit-Interval — Speciﬁes the time in seconds (displays OSPF default). The default setting
is 5 seconds.
•
•
Transmit Delay— Speciﬁes the time in seconds (displays OSPF default). The default setting is 1
second.
13 To save your changes, click Save.
Related Links
Setting Up OSPF Routing on page 61
Enabling OSPF Routing on page 62
Conﬁrming OSPF Ports on page 65
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
64
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance
Conﬁrming OSPF Ports
To conﬁrm that the ports are set up for OSPF, and that advertised routes from the upstream router are
recognized:
Click View Forwarding Table. The Forwarding Table is displayed.
The following additional reports display OSPF information when the protocol is in operation:
•
OSPF Neighbor — Displays the current neighbors for OSPF (routers that have interfaces to a
common network)
• OSPF Linkstate — Displays the Link State Advertisements (LSAs) received by the currently
running OSPF process. The LSAs describe the local state of a router or network, including the
state of the router’s interfaces and adjacencies.
2 To update the display, click Refresh.
Related Links
Setting Up OSPF Routing on page 61
Enabling OSPF Routing on page 62
ft
ra
Setting OSPF Routing Settings on page 62
Conﬁguring Filtering at the Interface Level
The ExtremeWireless solution has a number of built-in ﬁlters that protect the system from unauthorized
traffic. These ﬁlters are speciﬁc only to the controller. These ﬁlters are applied at the network interface
level and are automatically invoked. By default, these ﬁlters provide stringent-level rules to allow only
access to the system's externally visible services. In addition to these built-in ﬁlters, the administrator
can deﬁne speciﬁc exception ﬁlters at the interface-level to customize network access. These ﬁlters
depend on Topology Modes and the conﬁguration of an L3 interface for the topology.
For Bridged at Controller topologies, exception ﬁlters are deﬁned only if L3 (IP) interfaces are speciﬁed.
For Physical, Routed, and 3rd Party AP topologies, exception ﬁltering is always conﬁgured since they all
have an L3 interface presence.
Built-in Interface-based Exception Filters
On the controller, various interface-based exception ﬁlters are built in and invoked automatically. These
ﬁlters protect the controller from unauthorized access to system management functions and services
via the interfaces. Access to system management functions is granted if the administrator selects the
allow management traffic option in a speciﬁc topology.
Allow management traffic is possible on the topologies that have L3 IP interface deﬁnitions. For
example, if management traffic is allowed on a physical topology (esa0), only users connected through
ESA0 will be able to get access to the system. Users connecting on any other topology, such as Routed
or Bridged Locally at Controller, will no longer be able to target ESA0 to gain management access to
the system. To allow access for users connected on such a topology, the given topology conﬁguration
itself must have allow management traffic enabled and users will only be able to target the topology
interface speciﬁcally.
On the controller’s L3 interfaces (associated with either physical, Routed, or Bridged Locally at
Controller topologies), the built-in exception ﬁlter prohibits invoking SSH, HTTPS, or SNMP. However,
such traffic is allowed, by default, on the management port.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
65
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance
If management traffic is explicitly enabled for any interface, access is implicitly extended to that
interface through any of the other interfaces (VNS). Only traffic speciﬁcally allowed by the interface’s
exception ﬁlter is allowed to reach the controller itself. All other traffic is dropped. Exception ﬁlters are
dynamically conﬁgured and regenerated whenever the system's interface topology changes (for
example, a change of IP address for any interface).
Enabling management traffic on an interface adds additional rules to the exception ﬁlter, which opens
up the well-known IP(TCP/UDP) ports, corresponding to the HTTPS, SSH, and SNMP applications.
The interface-based built-in exception policy rules, in the case of traffic from wireless users, are
applicable to traffic targeted directly for the topology L3 interface. For example, a ﬁlter speciﬁed by a
Role may be generic enough to allow traffic access to the controller's management (for example, Allow
All [*.*.*.*]). Exception policy rules are evaluated after the user's assigned ﬁlter role, as such, it is
possible that the role allows the access to management functions that the exception ﬁlter denies. These
packets are dropped.
To enable SSH, HTTPS, or SNMP access through a physical data interface:
1 From the top menu, click Controller.
2 In the left pane, click Network > Topologies. The Topologies tab is displayed.
3 On the Topologies tab, click the appropriate data port topology. The Edit Topology window displays.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
66
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance
4 Select the Management Traffic check box if the topology has speciﬁed an L3 IP interface presence.
5 To save your changes, click Save.
Working with Administrator-deﬁned Interface-based Exception Filters
You can add speciﬁc policy rules at the interface level in addition to the built-in rules. Such rules give
you the capability of restricting access to a port, for speciﬁc reasons, such as a Denial of Service (DoS)
attack.
The policy rules are set up in the same manner as policy rules deﬁned for a Role — specify an IP
address, select a protocol if applicable, and then either allow or deny traffic to that address. For more
information, see Policy Rules on page 288.
The rules deﬁned for port exception ﬁlters are prepended to the normal set of restrictive exception
ﬁlters and have precedence over the system's normal protection enforcement (that is, they are
evaluated ﬁrst).
ft
ra
Warning
If deﬁned improperly, user exception rules may seriously compromise the system’s normal
security enforcement rules. They may also disrupt the system's normal operation and even
prevent system functionality altogether. It is advised to only augment the exception-ﬁltering
mechanism if absolutely necessary.
To deﬁne interface exception ﬁlters:
1 From the top menu, click Controller.
2 In the left pane, click Network > Topologies. The Topologies screen displays.
3 Select a topology to be conﬁgured. The Edit Topology window is displayed.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
67
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance
4 If the topology has an L3 interface deﬁned, an Exception Filters tab is available. Select this tab.
The Exception Filter rules are displayed.
af
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
68
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance
5 Add rules by either:
•
Click Add Predeﬁned , select a ﬁlter from the drop down list, and click Add.
ft
ra
•
Click Add, conﬁgure the following parameters, then click OK:
In the IP / subnet:port ﬁeld, type the destination IP address. You can also specify an IP range, a
port designation, or a port range on that IP address.
10
In the Protocol drop-down list, click the protocol you want to specify for the ﬁlter. This list may
include UDP, TCP, GRE, IPsec-ESP, IPsec-AH, ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol). The
default is N/A.
The new ﬁlter is displayed in the upper section of the screen.
Click the new ﬁlter entry.
To allow traffic, select the Allow check box.
To adjust the order of the policy rules, click Up or Down to position the rule. The policy rules are
executed in the order deﬁned here.
To save your changes, click Save.
Protecting Controller Interfaces and the Internal Captive Portal Page
By default, the controller is shipped with a self-signed certiﬁcate used to perform the following tasks:
•
•
Protect all interfaces that provide administrative access to the controller
Protect the internal Captive Portal page
This certiﬁcate is associated with topologies that have a conﬁgured L3 (IP) interface.
If you continue to use the default certiﬁcate to secure the controller and internal Captive Portal page,
your web browser will likely produce security warnings regarding the security risks of trusting self-
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
69
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance
signed certiﬁcates. To avoid the certiﬁcate-related web browser security warnings, you can install
customized certiﬁcates on the controller.
Note
To avoid the certiﬁcate-related web browser security warnings when accessing the controller,
you must also import the customized certiﬁcates into your web browser application.
Before Installing a Certiﬁcate
Before you create and install a certiﬁcate:
Select a certiﬁcate format to install. The controller supports several types of certiﬁcates, as shown in
Table 7.
Table 7: Supported Certiﬁcate and CA Formats
Description
PKCS#12
The PKCS#12 certiﬁcate (.pfx) ﬁle contains both a certiﬁcate and the
corresponding private key.
The controller will accept the PKCS#12 ﬁle as long as the format of
the private key and certiﬁcate are valid.
ft
ra
Certiﬁcate Format
PEM/DER
The PEM/DER certiﬁcate (.crt) ﬁle requires a separate PEM/DER
private key (.key) ﬁle. The controller uses OpenSSL PKCS12
command to convert the .crt and .key ﬁles into a single .pfx PKCS#12
certiﬁcate ﬁle.
The controller will accept the PEM/DER ﬁle as long as the format of
the private key and certiﬁcate are valid.
PEM-formatted CA public certiﬁcate ﬁle If you choose to install this optional certiﬁcate, you must do so when
specifying the PCKCS#12 or PEM/DER certiﬁcates.
Note
When generating the PKCS#12 certiﬁcate ﬁle or PEM/DER certiﬁcate and key ﬁles, you
must ensure that the interface identiﬁed in the certiﬁcate corresponds to the controller’s
interface for which the certiﬁcate is being installed.
2 Understand how the controller monitors the expiration date of installed certiﬁcates.
The controller generates an entry in the events information log as the certiﬁcate expiry date
approaches, based on the following schedule: 15, 8, 4, 2, and 1 day prior to expiration. The log
messages cease when the certiﬁcate expires. For more information, refer to the Extreme Networks
ExtremeWireless Maintenance Guide.
3 Understand how the controller manages certiﬁcates during upgrades and migrations.
Installed certiﬁcates will be backed up and restored with the controller conﬁguration data. Installed
certiﬁcates will also be migrated during an upgrade and during a migration.
Installing a Certiﬁcate for a Controller Interface
To install a certiﬁcate for a Controller Data Interface:
From the top menu, click Controller.
2 In the left pane, click Network > Topologies. The Topologies tab is displayed.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
70
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance
3 Click the Certiﬁcates tab. Topologies with an L3 interface will be listed.
4 In the Interface Certiﬁcates table, click to select the topology for which you want to install a
certiﬁcate.
The Conﬁguration for Topologies section displays.
Note
There are separate certiﬁcates if IPv4 and IPv6 is conﬁgured for Admin topology.
The Conﬁguration for Topologies section and the Generate Signing Request button become
available. Use the ﬁeld and button descriptions in Table 8 to create and install certiﬁcates.
Note
The certiﬁcate Common Name (CN) must match the interface IP or DNS addresses (Admin
only).
Table 8: Topologies Page: Certiﬁcates Tab Fields and Buttons
Field/Button
Description
Interface Certiﬁcates
Topology
Topology name
Expiry Date
Date when the certiﬁcate expires
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
71
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance
Table 8: Topologies Page: Certiﬁcates Tab Fields and Buttons (continued)
Field/Button
Description
CA Cert.
Identiﬁes whether or not a CA certiﬁcate has been installed on the
topology.
Name (CN)
The IP address of DNS address associated with the topology that
the certiﬁcate applies to.
Note: The Name ﬁeld supports both IPv4 or IPv6 addresses.
Org Unit (OU)
Name of the organization’s unit.
Organization
Name of the organization
Conﬁguration for Topology
Replace/Install selected Topology’s
certiﬁcate
To replace/install the existing port’s certiﬁcate and key using this
option, do the following:
ft
ra
From the click the Generate Signing Request button to create
the certiﬁcate and key.
2 Download the CSR when prompted.
3 Use a 3rd party certiﬁcate service to sign the CSR and create a
certiﬁcate and a Certiﬁcate Authority (CA) ﬁle.
4 Save the certiﬁcate on your computer.
5 Return to the Certiﬁcates tab on the ExtremeWireless UI.
6 Select the topology for which you created the certiﬁcate and
select Replace/Install selected Topologies certiﬁcate.
7 Click Browse next to the Signed certiﬁcate to install ﬁeld.
8 Navigate to the certiﬁcate ﬁle you want to install for this port,
and then click Open. The certiﬁcate ﬁle name is displayed in the
Certiﬁcate ﬁle to install ﬁeld.
9 (Optional) Click Browse next to the Optional:Enter PEMencoded CA public certiﬁcates ﬁle ﬁeld. The Choose ﬁle dialog
is displayed.
10 (Optional) Navigate to the certiﬁcate ﬁle you want to install for
this port, and then click Open. The certiﬁcate ﬁle name is
displayed in the Optional:Enter PEM-encoded CA public
certiﬁcates ﬁle ﬁeld.
Note: If you choose to install a CA public certiﬁcate, you must install
it when you install the PEM/DER certiﬁcate and key.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
72
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance
Table 8: Topologies Page: Certiﬁcates Tab Fields and Buttons (continued)
Field/Button
Description
Replace/Install selected Topology’s
certiﬁcate and key from a single ﬁle
To replace the existing port’s certiﬁcate and key using this option,
do the following:
ft
ra
Click Browse next to the PKCS #12 ﬁle to install ﬁeld. The
Choose ﬁle dialog is displayed.
Navigate to the certiﬁcate ﬁle you want to install for this port,
and then click Open. The certiﬁcate ﬁle name is displayed in the
PKCS #12 ﬁle to install ﬁeld.
In the Private key password box, type the password for the key
ﬁle. The key ﬁle is password protected.
(Optional) Click Browse next to the Optional:Enter PEMencoded CA public certiﬁcates ﬁle ﬁeld. The Choose ﬁle dialog
is displayed.
(Optional) Navigate to the certiﬁcate ﬁle you want to install for
this port, and then click Open. The certiﬁcate ﬁle name is
displayed in the Optional:Enter PEM-encoded CA public
certiﬁcates ﬁle ﬁeld.
Note: If you choose to install a CA public certiﬁcate, you must install
it when you install the PEM/DER certiﬁcate and key.
Replace/Install selected Topology’s
certiﬁcate and key from separate ﬁles
To replace the existing port’s certiﬁcate and key using this option,
do the following:
Click Browse next to the PKCS #12 ﬁle to install ﬁeld. The
Choose ﬁle dialog is displayed.
Navigate to the certiﬁcate ﬁle you want to install for this port,
and then click Open. The certiﬁcate ﬁle name is displayed in the
PKCS #12 ﬁle to install ﬁeld.
Click Browse next to the Private key ﬁle to install ﬁeld. The
Choose ﬁle dialog is displayed.
Navigate to the key ﬁle you want to install for this port, and then
click Open. The key ﬁle name is displayed in the Private key ﬁle
to install ﬁeld.
In the Private key password box, type the password for the key
ﬁle. The key ﬁle is password protected.
(Optional) Click Browse next to the Optional:Enter PEMencoded CA public certiﬁcates ﬁle ﬁeld. The Choose ﬁle dialog
is displayed.
(Optional) Navigate to the certiﬁcate ﬁle you want to install for
this port, and then click Open. The certiﬁcate ﬁle name is
displayed in the Optional:Enter PEM-encoded CA public
certiﬁcates ﬁle ﬁeld.
Note: If you choose to install a CA public certiﬁcate, you must install
it when you install the PEM/DER certiﬁcate and key.
Reset selected Topology to the factory
default certiﬁcate and key
Remove custom certiﬁcate that user installed.
No change
No change.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
73
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance
Table 8: Topologies Page: Certiﬁcates Tab Fields and Buttons (continued)
Field/Button
Description
Generate Signing Request
To generate a CSR for the controller, click Generate Signing Request.
The Generate Certiﬁcate Signing Request window displays (Figure
10).
Save
Click to save the changes to this Topology.
Note
To avoid the certiﬁcate-related web browser security warnings when accessing the
Wireless Assistant, you must also import the customized certiﬁcates into your web
browser application.
ft
ra
Figure 10: Generate Certiﬁcate Signing Request Window
Table 9: Generate Certiﬁcate Signing Request Page - Fields and Buttons
Field/Button
Description
Country name
The two-letter ISO abbreviation of the name of the country
State or Province name
The name of the State/Province
Locality name (city)
The name of the city.
Organization name
The name of the organization
Organizational Unit name
The name of the unit within the organization.
Common Name
Set the common name to be one of the following:
the IP address of the interface that the CSR applies to.
a DNS address associated with the IP address of the interface that
the CSR applies to.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
74
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance
Table 9: Generate Certiﬁcate Signing Request Page - Fields and Buttons
(continued)
Field/Button
Description
Email address
The email address of the organization
Generate Signing Request
Click to generate a signing request. A certiﬁcate request ﬁle is
generated (.csr ﬁle extension). The name of the ﬁle is the IP address
of the topology you created the CSR for. The File Download dialog is
displayed.
Conﬁguring the Login Authentication Mode
You can conﬁgure the following login authentication modes to authenticate administrator login
attempts:
•
ft
ra
Local authentication — The controller uses locally conﬁgured login credentials and passwords. See
Conﬁguring the Local Login Authentication Mode and Adding New Users on page 75.
RADIUS authentication — The controller uses login credentials and passwords conﬁgured on a
RADIUS server. See Conﬁguring the RADIUS Login Authentication Mode on page 78.
•
•
Local authentication ﬁrst, then RADIUS authentication — The controller ﬁrst uses locally conﬁgured
login credentials and passwords. If this login fails, the controller attempts to validate login
credentials and passwords conﬁgured on a RADIUS server. See Conﬁguring the Local, RADIUS Login
Authentication Mode on page 82.
•
RADIUS authentication ﬁrst, then local authentication — The controller ﬁrst uses login credentials
and passwords conﬁgured on a RADIUS server. If this login fails, the controller attempts to validate
login credentials and passwords conﬁgured locally. See Conﬁguring the RADIUS, Local Login
Authentication Mode on page 84.
Note
The ExtremeWireless Appliance enables you to recover the controller via the Rescue mode
if you have lost its login password. For more information, see the ExtremeWireless
Maintenance Guide.
Conﬁguring the Local Login Authentication Mode and Adding New Users
Local login authentication mode is enabled by default. If the login authentication was previously set to
another authentication mode, you can change it to the local authentication. You can also add new users
and assign them to a login group — as full administrators, read-only administrators, or as a GuestPortal
managers. For more information, see Deﬁning Wireless Assistant Administrators and Login Groups on
page 673.
To conﬁgure the local login authentication mode:
From the top menu, click Controller.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
75
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance
2 In the left pane, click Administration > Login Management.
The Login Management screen displays.
af
3 In the Authentication mode section, click Conﬁgure.
The Login Authentication Mode Conﬁguration window is displayed.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
76
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance
4 Select the Local check box.
If the RADIUS check box is selected, deselect it.
5 Click OK.
6 In the Add User section, select one of the following from the Group drop-down list:
•
•
•
Full Administrator — Grants the administrator’s access rights to the administrator.
Read-only Administrator — Grants read-only access right to the administrator.
GuestPortal Manager — Grants the user GuestPortal manager rights.
7 In the User ID box, type the user’s ID.
8 In the Password box, type the user’s password.
Note
UNICODE characters are not supported in passwords for local and remote RADIUS/
TACACS+ authentication. All passwords must be 8 to 24 characters long.
ft
ra
9 In the Conﬁrm Password box, re-type the password.
10 To add the user, click Add User. The new user is added.
11 Click Save.
The Administrator Password Conﬁrmation window is displayed.
12 Select the appropriate option.
•
Yes — Change authentication mode to local. Use the administrator password currently deﬁned on
the controller.
•
Yes, but I want to change administrator’s password ﬁrst — Change authentication mode to
local and change the administrator password currently deﬁned on the controller.
• No — Do not change the authentication mode to local.
13 Click Submit.
14 If you chose Yes, but I want to change administrator’s password ﬁrst, you are prompted to change
the administrator’s password.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
77
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance
Conﬁguring the RADIUS Login Authentication Mode
The local login authentication mode is enabled by default. You can change the local login authentication
mode to RADIUS-based authentication.
Note
Before you change the default local login authentication to RADIUS-based authentication,
you must conﬁgure the RADIUS Server on the Global Settings screen. For more information,
see VNS Global Settings on page 392.
RADIUS is a client/server authentication and authorization access protocol used by a network access
server (NAS) to authenticate users attempting to connect to a network device. The NAS functions as a
client, passing user information to one or more RADIUS servers. The NAS permits or denies network
access to a user based on the response it receives from one or more RADIUS servers. RADIUS uses User
Datagram Protocol (UDP) for sending the packets between the RADIUS client and server.
ft
ra
You can conﬁgure a RADIUS key on the client and server. If you conﬁgure a key on the client, it must be
the same as the one conﬁgured on the RADIUS servers. The RADIUS clients and servers use the key to
encrypt all RADIUS packets transmitted. If you do not conﬁgure a RADIUS key, packets are not
encrypted. The key itself is never transmitted over the network.
Note
Before you conﬁgure the system to use RADIUS-based login authentication, you must
conﬁgure the Service-Type RADIUS attribute on the RADIUS server.
EWC uses the standard RADIUS attribute Service-Type to put the user into the
appropriate groups:
•
•
•
Administrator Service-Type = 6
Read-Only Service-Type = 7
GuestPortal Manager Service-Type = 8
To conﬁgure the RADIUS login authentication mode:
1 From the top menu, click Controller.
2 In the left pane, click Administration > Login Management. The Login Management screen displays.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
78
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance
3 Click the RADIUS Authentication tab.
af
4 In the Authentication mode section, click Conﬁgure.
The Login Authentication Mode Conﬁguration window is displayed.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
79
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance
5 Deselect Local and select the RADIUS check box.
ft
ra
6 Click OK.
7 From the drop-down list, located next to the Use button, select the RADIUS Server that you want to
use for the RADIUS login authentication, and then click Use. The RADIUS Server’s name is displayed
in the Conﬁgured Servers box, and in the Auth section, and the following default values of the
RADIUS Server are displayed.
Note
The RADIUS Servers displayed in the list located against the Use button are deﬁned on
Global Settings screen. For more information, see VNS Global Settings on page 392.
The following values can be edited:
•
•
•
•
NAS IP address — The IP address of Network Access Server (NAS).
NAS Identiﬁer — The Network Access Server (NAS) identiﬁer. The NAS identiﬁer is a RADIUS
attribute that identiﬁes the server responsible for passing information to designated RADIUS
servers, and then acting on the response returned.
Auth Type — The authentication protocol type (PAP, CHAP, MS-CHAP, or MS-CHAP2).
Set as Primary Server — Speciﬁes the primary RADIUS server when there are multiple RADIUS
servers.
8 To add additional RADIUS servers, repeat step 7.
Note
You can add up to three RADIUS servers to the list of login authentication servers. When
you add two or more RADIUS servers to the list, you must designate one of them as the
Primary server. The controller ﬁrst attempts to connect to the Primary server. If the
Primary Server is not available, it tries to connect to the second and third server according
to their order in the Conﬁgured Servers box. You can change the order of RADIUS servers
in the Conﬁgured Servers box by clicking on the Up and Down buttons.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
80
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance
9 Click Test to test connectivity to the RADIUS server.
Note
You can also test the connectivity to the RADIUS server after you save the conﬁguration. If
you do not test the RADIUS server connectivity, and you have made an error in conﬁguring
the RADIUS-based login authentication mode, you will be locked out of the controller
when you switch the login mode to the RADIUS login authentication mode. If you are
locked out, access Rescue mode via the console port to reset the authentication method
to local.
The following window is displayed.
ft
ra
10 In the User ID and the Password ﬁelds, type the user’s ID and the password, which were conﬁgured
on the RADIUS Server, and then click Test.
The RADIUS connectivity result is displayed.
Note
To learn how to conﬁgure the User ID and the Password on the RADIUS server, refer to your
RADIUS server’s user guide.
If the test is not successful, the following message will be displayed:
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
81
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance
11 If the RADIUS connectivity test displays “Successful” result, click Save on the RADIUS Authentication
screen to save your conﬁguration.
ft
ra
The following window is displayed:
12 If you tested the RADIUS server connectivity earlier in this procedure, click No. If you click Yes, you
will be asked to enter the RADIUS server user ID and password.
13 To change the authentication mode to RADIUS authentication, click OK.
You will be logged out of the controller immediately. You must use the RADIUS login user name and
password to log on the controller.
To cancel the authentication mode changes, click Cancel.
Conﬁguring the Local, RADIUS Login Authentication Mode
To conﬁgure the Local, RADIUS login authentication mode:
From the top menu, click Controller.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
82
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance
2 In the left pane, click Administration > Login Management. The Login Management screen displays.
af
3 In the Authentication mode section, click Conﬁgure.
4 Select the Local and RADIUS check box.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
83
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance
5 If necessary, select Local and use the Move Up button to move Local to the top of the list.
6 Click OK.
7 On the Login Management screen, click Save.
For information on setting local login authentication settings, see Conﬁguring the Local Login
Authentication Mode and Adding New Users on page 75.
For information on setting RADIUS login authentication settings, see Conﬁguring the RADIUS Login
Authentication Mode on page 78.
Conﬁguring the RADIUS, Local Login Authentication Mode
To conﬁgure the RADIUS, Local login authentication mode:
From the top menu, click Controller.
2 In the left pane, click Administration > Login Management. The Login Management screen displays.
3 In the Authentication mode section, click Conﬁgure.
The Login Authentication Mode Conﬁguration window is displayed.
4 Select the Local and RADIUS check box.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
84
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance
5 If necessary, select the RADIUS ﬁeld and use the Move Up button to move RADIUS to the top of the
list.
ft
ra
6 Click OK.
7 On the Login Management screen, click Save.
For information on setting RADIUS login authentication settings, see Conﬁguring the RADIUS Login
Authentication Mode on page 78.
For information on setting local login authentication settings, see Conﬁguring the Local Login
Authentication Mode and Adding New Users on page 75.
Conﬁguring SNMP
The controller supports the SNMP for retrieving statistics and conﬁguration information. If you enable
SNMP on the controller, you can choose either SNMPv3 or SNMPv1/v2 mode. If you conﬁgure the
controller to use SNMPv3, then any request other than SNMPv3 request is rejected. The same is true if
you conﬁgure the controller to use SNMPv1/v2.
To conﬁgure SNMP:
From the top menu, click Controller. The Wireless Controller Conﬁguration screen displays.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
85
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance
2 In the left pane, click Network > SNMP.
The SNMP screen displays.
ra
3 In the SNMP Common Settings section, conﬁgure the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Mode — Select SNMPv1/v2c or SNMPv3 to enable SNMP.
Contact Name — The name of the SNMP administrator.
•
•
Conﬁguring SNMPv1/v2c-speciﬁc Parameters on page 87
Conﬁguring SNMPv3-speciﬁc Parameters on page 87
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
ft
Location — The physical location of the controller running the SNMP agent.
SNMP Port — The destination port for the SNMP traps. Possible ports are 0–65555.
Forward Traps — The lowest severity level of SNMP trap that you want to forward.
Publish AP as interface of controller — Enable or disable SNMP publishing of the access point as
an interface to the controller.
4 Select the tab for the SNMP version you are conﬁguring. For more information, see:
86
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance
Conﬁguring SNMPv1/v2c-speciﬁc Parameters
Conﬁgure the following parameters on the SNMPv1/v2c tab:
•
•
•
Read Community Name — The password that is used for read-only SNMP communication.
Read/Write Community Name — The password that is used for write SNMP communication.
•
Manager B — The IP address of the server used as the secondary network manager that will
receive SNMP messages.
Manager A — The IP address of the server used as the primary network manager that will receive
SNMP messages.
Note
Manager A and Manager B address ﬁelds support both IPv4 or IPv6 addresses.
2 Click Save.
Conﬁguring SNMPv3-speciﬁc Parameters
Conﬁgure the parameters following on the SNMPv3 tab:
ft
ra
•
•
Context String — A description of the SNMP context.
Engine ID — The SNMPv3 engine ID for the controller running the SNMP agent. The engine ID
must be from 5 to 32 characters long.
• RFC3411 Compliant — The engine ID will be formatted as deﬁned by SnmpEngineID textual
convention (that is, the engine ID will be prepended with SNMP agents' private enterprise
number assigned by IANA as a formatted HEX text string).
2 Click Add User Account. The Add SNMPv3 User Account window displays.
3 Conﬁgure the following parameters:
•
•
•
•
•
User — Enter the name of the user account.
Security Level — Select the security level for this user account. Choices are: authPriv, authNoPriv,
noAuthnoPriv.
Auth Protocol — If you have selected a security level of authPriv or authNoPriv, select the
authentication protocol. Choices are: MD5 (Message-Digest algorithm 5), SHA, None.
Auth Password — If you have selected a security level of authPriv or authNoPriv, enter an
authentication password.
Privacy Protocol — If you have selected the security level of authPriv, select the privacy protocol.
Choices are: DES, None
•
•
Privacy Password — If you have selected the security level of authPriv, enter a privacy password.
Engine ID — If desired, enter an engine ID. The ID can be between 5 and 32 bytes long, with no
spaces, control characters, or tabs.
•
Destination IP — If desired, enter the IP address of a trap destination.
Note
The Destination IP address ﬁeld supports both IPv4 or IPv6 addresses.
4 Click OK. The Add SNMPv3 User Account window closes.
5 Repeat steps 2 through 4 to add additional users.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
87
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance
6 In the Trap 1 and Trap 2 sections, conﬁgure the following parameters:
•
Destination IP — The IP address of the machine monitoring SNMPv3 traps
Note
The Destination IP address ﬁeld supports both IPv4 or IPv6 addresses.
•
User Name — The SNMPv3 user to conﬁgure for use with SNMPv3 traps
7 Click Save.
Editing an SNMPv3 User
To edit an SNMPv3 user:
1 From the top menu, click Controller.
2 In the left pane, click SNMP. The SNMP screen displays.
3 Click the SNMPv3 tab.
4 Select an SNMP user.
ft
ra
5 Click Edit Selected User. The Edit SNMPv3 User Account window displays.
6 Edit the user conﬁguration as desired.
7 Click OK. The Edit SNMPv3 User Account window closes.
8 Click Save.
Deleting an SNMPv3 User
To delete an SNMPv3 user:
From the top menu, click Controller.
In the left pane, click SNMP. The SNMP screen displays.
Click the SNMPv3 tab.
Select an SNMP user.
5 Click Delete Selected User. You are prompted to conﬁrm that you want to delete the selected user.
6 Click OK.
SNMP Trap Types
The SNMP agent generates traps to notify the administrator of events such as conﬁguration changes,
component failures, and disconnection of Access Points. Administrators can conﬁgure the Agent and
the Controller, deﬁning the level of trap to receive. The following trap types are supported by
ExtremeWireless Controllers:
•
•
•
Interfaces MIB (IF-MIB) linkDown (.1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.3)
Interfaces MIB (IF-MIB) linkUp (.1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.4)
HIPATH-WIRELESS-HWC-MIB apTunnelAlarm (.1.3.6.1.4.1.4329.15.3.19.4)
• Sent by the controller when it detects that it has lost the connection to an AP. The trap identiﬁes
•
the AP that the controller can no longer contact.
HIPATH-WIRELESS-HWC-MIB hiPathWirelessLogAlarm (.1.3.6.1.4.1.4329.15.3.9.6)
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
88
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance
• A generic trap that contains speciﬁc information relevant to the event. The information is carried
in the trap, and the information varies from event to event.
• The trap contains the trap severity, the component on the controller that raised the event, and
the text string associated with the event, as it appears in the controller GUI.
• A trap containing one event that also is displayed in the controller’s Event / Log report page. The
trap is sent when the event is raised and recorded on the controller.
• This trap accounts for the vast majority of traps messages sent by the controller at most sites.
Conﬁguring Network Time
You should synchronize the clocks of the controller and the APs to ensure that the logs and reports
reﬂect accurate time stamps. For more information, see Working with Reports and Statistics on page
621.
ft
ra
The normal operation of the controller will not be affected if you do not synchronize the clock. The clock
synchronization is necessary to ensure that the logs display accurate time stamps. In addition, clock
synchronization of network elements is a prerequisite for the following conﬁguration:
•
•
Mobility Manager
Session Availability
Network Time Synchronization
Network time is synchronized in one of two ways:
•
•
Using the system’s time — The system’s time is the controller’s time.
Using Network Time Protocol (NTP) — The Network Time Protocol is a protocol for synchronizing
the clocks of computer systems over packet-switched data networks.
The controller automatically adjusts for any time change due to Daylight Savings time.
Conﬁguring the Network Time Using the System’s Time
From the top menu, click Controller.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
89
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance
2 In the left pane, click Network > Network Time. The Network Time screen displays.
ft
ra
3 From the Continent or Ocean drop-down list, click the appropriate large-scale geographic grouping
for the time zone.
4 From the Time Zone Region drop-down list, click the appropriate time zone region for the selected
country.
5 Click Apply Time Zone.
6 In the System Time ﬁeld, type the system time.
7 Click Set Clock. The WLAN network time is synchronized in accordance with the controller’s time.
Conﬁguring the Network Time Using an NTP Server
From the top menu, click Controller.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
90
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance
2 In the left pane, click Network > Network Time. The Network Time screen displays.
af
3 From the Continent or Ocean drop-down list, click the appropriate large-scale geographic grouping
for the time zone.
4 From the Time Zone Region drop-down list, click the appropriate time zone region for the selected
country.
5 Click Apply Time Zone.
6 In the System Time box, type the system time.
7 Select the Use NTP check box.
Note
If you want to use the controller as the NTP Server, select the Run local NTP Server check
box, and click Apply.
8 In the Time Server 1 text box, type the IP address or FQDN (Full Qualiﬁed Domain Name) of an NTP
time server that is accessible on the enterprise network.
Note
The Time Server ﬁelds supports both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses.
9 Repeat for Time Server2 and Time Server3 text boxes.
If the system is not able to connect to the Time Server 1, it will attempt to connect to the additional
servers that have been speciﬁed in Time Server 2 and Time Server 3 text boxes.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
91
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance
10 Click Apply. The WLAN network time is synchronized in accordance with the speciﬁed time server.
Conﬁguring Secure Connections
The controllers communicate amongst themselves using a secure protocol. Among other things, this
protocol is used to share between controllers the data required for high availability. They also use this
protocol to communicate with NMS Wireless Manager. The protocol requires the use of a shared secret
for mutual authentication of the end points.
By default the controllers and NMS Wireless Manager use a well known factory default shared secret.
This makes it easy to get up and running but is not as secure as some sites require.
The controllers and NMS Wireless Manager allow the administrator to change the shared secret used by
the secure protocol. In fact the controllers and Wireless Manager can use a different shared secret for
each individual end point to which they connect with the protocol.
To conﬁgure the shared secret for a connection on the controller:
ft
ra
From the top menu, click Controller.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
92
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance
2 In the left pane, click Network > Secure Connections.
The Secure Connections screen displays.
ft
3 Select Enable Weak Ciphers to enable weak ciphers for the remote connections. Disabling weak
ciphers prevents users from accessing various web pages on the controller using less secure
methods.
4 Enter the Server IP address of the other end of the secure protocol tunnel and the shared secret to
use.
5 Click Add/Update.
6 Click Save.
Note
Conﬁgure the same shared secret onto the devices at each end of the connection.
Otherwise, the two controllers or controller and NMS Wireless Manager will not be able to
communicate.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
93
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance
Conﬁguring DNS Servers for Resolving Host Names of NTP and RADIUS
Servers
Because the Global Settings screen allows you to set up NTP and RADIUS servers by deﬁning their host
names, you have to conﬁgure your DNS servers to resolve the host names of NTP and RADIUS servers
to the corresponding IP addresses. Go to VNS > Global Settings.
Note
For more information on RADIUS server conﬁguration, see Deﬁning RADIUS Servers and MAC
Address Format on page 394.
You can conﬁgure up to three DNS servers to resolve NTP and RADIUS server host names to their
corresponding IP addresses.
The controller sends the host name query to the ﬁrst DNS server in the stack of three conﬁgured DNS
servers. The DNS server resolves the queried domain name to an IP address and sends the result back
to the controller.
ft
ra
If for some reason, the ﬁrst DNS server in the stack of conﬁgured DNS servers is not reachable, the
controller sends the host name query to the second DNS server in the stack. If the second DNS server is
also not reachable, the query is sent to the third DNS server in the stack.
To conﬁgure DNS servers for resolving host names of NTP and RADIUS servers:
From the top menu, click Controller.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
94
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance
2 In the left pane, click Administration > Host Attributes.
The Host Attributes screen displays.
af
3 In the DNS box, type the DNS server’s IP address in the Server Address ﬁeld and then click Add
Server. The new server is displayed in the DNS servers’ list.
Note
You can conﬁgure up to three DNS servers. The Server Address ﬁeld supports both IPv4
and IPv6 addresses.
5 To save your changes, click Save.
4 Int the Default Gateway IP box, enter the IP address of the Default Gateway.
Using a Third-party Location-based Solution
ExtremeWireless supports the following location-based solutions:
•
•
•
AeroScout
Ekahau
Centrak
On the controller, conﬁgure the AeroScout/Ekahau/Centrak server IP address and enable the locationbased service. When using AeroScout or Ekahau, the location-based server is aware of the controller IP
address. And if using AeroScout, the controller notiﬁes the AeroScout server of the operational APs.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
95
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance
Enable the location-based service on the APs that you want to participate.
Note
Participating APs must use the 2.4 GHz band and the radio that receives location-based
service tags must have at least one WLAN service associated with it.
Once you have enabled the location-based service on the controller and the participating APs, at least
one of the participating APs will receive reports from a location-based service Wi-Fi RFID tag in the 2.4
GHz band. The tag reports are collected by the AP and forwarded to the location-based server by
encapsulating the tag reports in a WASSP tunnel and routing them as IP packets through the controller.
When using Ekahau or Centrak, the controller does not converse directly with the location-based
service server.
Note
Tag reports are marked with UP=CS5, and DSCP = 0xA0. On the wireless controller, tag
reports are marked with UP=CS5 to the core (if 802.1p exists).
ft
ra
An AP’s tag report collection status is reported in the AP Inventory report. For more information, see
Viewing Routing Protocol Reports on page 657.
If availability is enabled, tag report transmission pauses on failed over APs until they are conﬁgured and
notiﬁed by the location-based server. With an availability pair, it is good practice to conﬁgure both
controllers with the same location-based service.
When location-based service support is disabled on the controller, the controller does not communicate
with the location-based server and the APs do not perform any location-based functionality.
Ensure that your location-based service tags are conﬁgured to transmit on all non-overlapping channels
(1, 6 and 11) and also on channels above 11 for countries where channels above 11 are allowed. For
information about proper deployment of the location-based solution, refer to the third-party
documentation (AeroScout/Ekahau/Centrak).
Related Links
Conﬁguring Location-Based Services on page 96
AP Multi-Edit Properties on page 111
AP Properties Tab - Advanced Settings on page 164
Conﬁguring Location-Based Services
To conﬁgure a controller for use with an AeroScout/Ekahau/Centrak solution:
From the top menu, click Controller.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
96
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance
2 In the left pane, click Services > Location-based Service.
3 Select the desired location-based service for the controller.
ft
ra
•
•
Enter the IP address of the location based service server.
Centrak and Ekahau conﬁguration offer a default port number and multicast address, but you
can modify the default values if necessary.
4 Click Save.
Now assign APs to participate in the location-based service.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
97
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance
5 From the top menu, click AP. In the left pane, click APs.
Note
You can enable location-based service on APs using the Location-based service ﬁeld on
the AP Multi-edit screen and the Advanced window of the AP Default Settings screen. The
following procedure shows you how to enable location-based services on one AP at a
time.
6 Click on an AP row.
The AP Status dashboard displays.
7 Click Conﬁgure to display the Conﬁguration dialog.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
98
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance
8 Click Advanced.
The Advanced dialog displays.
af
9 Select Enable location-based service and close the dialog.
10 Enable Location-based services on each additional AP that you want to participate.
11 Click Save.
Related Links
Using a Third-party Location-based Solution on page 95
AP Multi-Edit Properties on page 111
AP Properties Tab - Advanced Settings on page 164
Additional Ongoing Operations of the System
Ongoing operations of the Extreme Networks ExtremeWireless system can include the following:
•
•
•
•
Controller System Maintenance
Client Disassociate
Logs and Traces
Reports and Displays
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
99
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance
For more information, see Performing System Administration on page 669 or the Extreme Networks
ExtremeWireless Maintenance Guide.
ft
ra
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
100
4 Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless
APs
ft
ra
Wireless AP Overview
Discovery and Registration
Viewing a List of All APs
Wireless AP Default Conﬁguration
Conﬁguring Wireless AP Properties
Outdoor Access Point Installation
Assigning Wireless AP Radios to a VNS
Conﬁguring Wireless AP Radio Properties
Conﬁguring IoT Applications
Setting Up the Wireless AP Using Static Conﬁguration
Setting Up 802.1x Authentication for a Wireless AP
Conﬁguring Co-Located APs in Load Balance Groups
Conﬁguring an AP Cluster
Conﬁguring an AP as a Guardian
Conﬁguring a Captive Portal on an AP
AP3916ic Integrated Camera Deployment
Performing AP Software Maintenance
Understanding the ExtremeWireless LED Status
Wireless AP Overview
Extreme Networks ExtremeWireless APs use the 802.11 wireless standards (802.11a/b/g/n/ac) for
network communications, and bridge network traffic to an Ethernet LAN. In addition to the Wireless
APs that run proprietary software and communicate with a controller only, Extreme Networks offers a
Cloud-enabled APs. The 3805i and the AP39xx series are radar capable, Cloud-enabled APs that
interoperate fully with ExtremeCloud and other ExtremeWireless products.
A wireless AP physically connects to a LAN infrastructure and establishes an IP connection to a
controller, which manages the AP conﬁguration through the Wireless Assistant. The controller also
provides centralized management (veriﬁcation and upgrade) of the AP ﬁrmware image.
A UDP-based protocol enables communication between an AP and a controller. The UDP-based
protocol encapsulates IP traffic from the AP and directs it to the controller. The controller decapsulates
the packets and routes them to the appropriate destinations, while managing sessions and applying
roles.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
101
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
AP Model Firmware Support
Refer to the ExtremeWireless Hardware Firmware Support Matrix to easily determine the currently
supported ﬁrmware version and the minimum ﬁrmware version for each ExtremeWireless access point.
Wireless Protocol Standards (802.11)
Most current wireless networks and end-user devices use the IEEE 802.11n wireless protocol standard.
The 802.11n APs are backward-compatible with existing 802.11a/b/g networks and devices. The AP38xx
and AP39xx series APs support the 802.11ac wireless protocol.
• The AP3705i delivers data rates up to 300 Mbps per radio; the AP37xx series APs except for the
AP3705i deliver data rates up to 450 Mbps per radio.
•
•
The AP38xx series APs deliver data rates up to 1.3 Gbps on Radio 1 (the 5 GHz radio) and 450 Mbps
on Radio 2 (the 2.4 GHz radio)
The AP39xx series supports an internal antenna array and active/active E/N data ports that deliver
data rates up to 1.7 Gbps on Radio 1 and 600 Mbps on Radio 2.
ft
ra
To conﬁgure an 802.11n/ac AP to achieve this high link rate, see Achieving High Throughput with 11n and
11ac Wireless APs on page 187.
Antennas
Some wireless AP models have built-in, internal antennas; some support external antennas. APs with
internal antennas are certiﬁed as a complete unit. External antennas are individually certiﬁed for
maximum transmitting power and determination of available channels in each country in which the AP
is deployed.
The latest AP3915i/e and AP3917i/e models offer both Wi-Fi antennas and IoT antennas that are used to
receive iBeacon signals from IoT devices.
For a list of the external antennas that can be used with each AP model and how to install them, refer to
the Installation Guide for each AP and to the ExtremeWireless External Antenna Site Preparation and
Installation Guide.
Wireless APs with external antenna ports must be conﬁgured to associate the external antenna
connected to each antenna port. For more information, see Conﬁguring Wireless AP Properties on page
156.
AP Types (Features)
AP model types are differentiated by their feature design, particularly:
•
Indoor/Outdoor — APs are built for either indoor or outdoor service.
• Indoor APs are built for use in enclosed, protected areas (like inside buildings) where they are not
exposed to harsh weather or temperature extremes. Indoor APs have optional mounting brackets
for mounting the AP on walls or drop ceilings.
• Outdoor APs are built weather-hardened, with watertight ﬁttings for cables and antennas, splash
guards, and a greater resistance to temperature extremes (both cold and heat). Outdoor APs can
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
102
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
•
extend your Wireless LAN to outdoor locations without Ethernet cabling. Mounting brackets are
available to enable quick and easy mounting of the Outdoor APs to walls, rails, and poles.
Controller-based — Controller-based APs are intended to be controlled centrally by an
ExtremeWireless Appliance. All AP and service conﬁguration, bridging, and networking is done on
the controller, with the AP acting as the remote access point relaying communications between the
network (the controller) and end-user devices.
•
Cloud-enabled — Cloud-enabled APs are intended to be controlled by ExtremeCloud™ an easy to use
and scalable cloud-based management platform that supports and transforms with your business.
Combined with enterprise-grade wired and wireless cloud-managed devices, ExtremeCloud delivers
a scalable and highly available pay-as-you go subscription solution.
•
IoT ready, smoke detector models — ExtremeWireless offers APs that are equipped with IoT
antennas for receiving iBeacon signals from IoT devices. The controller collects and ﬁlters data based
on conﬁguration parameters, and forwards the data to an Application Server for reporting. The
AP3915i/e and AP3917i/e are equipped with IoT antennas.
Additionally, the indoor model (AP3915i/e) is equipped with a smoke detector.
ft
ra
The AP3912 and AP3916 models are equipped with BLE radios that send iBeacon signals to IoT
devices.
•
•
•
AP 3916ic (Integrated Camera) — 2x2 11ac AP with an integral security camera (2MP camera with
resolution up to 1080p) that lets you extend your Wireless LAN and provide simultaneous wireless
service, BLE or 802.15.4 coverage and security in public spaces, such as classrooms and offices. This
fully featured access point can be mounted on the ceiling or wall. The integral ONVIF compatible
security camera is connected to an internal wired Ethernet port. The AP3916ic provides ﬂow based
data handling for the wireless and wired connections. Enabled for ExtremeCloud™ support.
AP 3912 Wall Plate — 2x2 11ac AP that is installed replacing other existing Ethernet wall plates with
one or two ports. One Ethernet port on the wall plate must be connected to the LAN1 uplink
connection on the AP (black). This link provides AF or AT POE to the AP and uplink data
connectivity to the network. The other Ethernet port on the wall plate can be connected to the passthrough port on the AP (blue), allowing connection options for wired devices like IP phones. The
AP3912 is intended to take advantage existing wired Ethernet outlets and a switch port. The AP3912
is installed over an existing wall plate, and it is connected to the existing cable / switch port. The AP
offers an integrated BTLE/802.15.4 radio for connectivity to Internet of Things (IoT) sensors and
devices. Enabled for ExtremeCloud™ support.
Threat Detection and Prevention Capability —As the potential for wireless security threats grows,
APs must evolve to detect and counter hostile intrusion and attacks. The AP37xx, AP38xx, AP39xx
and W78xC series of access points are designed to support Radar channel monitoring and are
conﬁgurable for protection against detected attacks.
The Radar and Mitigator functions are described in greater detail in Threat Detection and Prevention
Features on page 105. Conﬁguration of these functions on controllers is described in Working with
ExtremeWireless Radar on page 563.
Other differentiating features in an AP product series are the number of internal or external antennas
(see Antennas on page 102) or the number of radios the AP has (see Radios on page 103).
Radios
All wireless APs are equipped with at least two radios — Radio 1 and Radio 2:
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
103
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
•
•
Radio 1 supports a 5 GHz radio band
Radio 2 supports a 2.4 GHz radio band
Note
The following APs offer integrated BLE/802.15.4 radios: AP3912i , AP3915i/e, AP3916ic,
AP3917i/e/k.
The AP39xx supports up to 1.7 Gbps on the 5 GHz radio and 600 Mbps on the 2.4 GHz radio using four
spatial streams.
The 38xx and AP37xx series radios (except AP3705i) support up to 450Mbps using three spatial
streams.
The radios are enabled or disabled through the Wireless Assistant. For more information, see Modifying
11n and 11ac Wireless AP Radio Properties on page 178.
The Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure (U-NII) bands all lie within the 5 GHz band, designed
for short-range, high-speed, wireless networking communication.
ft
ra
802.11n APs support the full range of frequencies available in the 5 GHz band:
•
•
•
•
5150 to 5250 MHz - U-NII Low band
5250 to 5350 MHz - U-NII Middle Band
5470 to 5700 MHz - U-NII Worldwide
5725 to 5825 MHz - U-NII High Band
Note
802.11n-compliant wireless APs can achieve link rates of up to 300 Mbps. You can
conﬁgure the controller for this higher level link rate. For more information, see Achieving
High Throughput with 11n and 11ac Wireless APs on page 187.
AP3916ic (Integrated Camera)
The AP3916ic is an 11ac Wave 2 AP with an integral security camera that lets you extend your Wireless
LAN and provide simultaneous wireless service, BLE or 802.15.4 coverage and security in public spaces,
such as classrooms and offices.
The AP3916 can be mounted on the ceiling, wall or in a junction/gang box. The integral ONVIF
compatible security camera is connected to an internal wired Ethernet port, and the AP provides policy
enforcement control for the wireless and wired connections.
The AP3916ic has the following speciﬁcations:
•
•
•
•
•
Integrated 2MP camera with resolution up to 1080p, with manual view adjustment.
Radios: Two concurrent Wi-Fi radios (2.4 GHz and 5 GHz) and one additional radio that can operate
as Bluetooth or 802.15.4.
Antennas: Four internal single band Wi-Fi antennas and one internal antenna for Bluetooth (BLE) or
802.15.4.
LEDs: Six
802.3af compliant for full functionality. Optional AC adapter.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
104
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
•
•
•
•
•
Supports the 802.11ac and 802.11n wireless standards, with full backward compatibility with legacy
802.11abg.
10/100/1000 Mbps operation.
Adjustable mounting bracket (included) for drop-ceiling T-bar rail.
Optional mounts can be purchased separately for junction/gang box, indoor wall and solid ceiling
installation.
Enabled for ExtremeCloud™ support.
ExtremeWireless support for the AP3916ic:
• Camera is powered by the AP3916i PoE power supply:
• Camera port (CAM) can be assigned through policy to B@AP or B@AC virtual network service
topologies. Default and speciﬁc assignment is supported. You can use policy deﬁnition and
assignment to provide network segmentation for network access and camera (CAM) functions.
•
The AP3916ic's camera function is identiﬁed as "EXTR2MP-CAM" device type. Filter the appliance
client list to obtain a list of cameras under the appliance management.
•
The controller provides factory reset and restart functions for the camera.
ft
ra
Related Links
AP3916ic Integrated Camera Deployment on page 226
Upgrading the Camera Image Manually on page 237
AP3916ic-Camera Web User Interface on page 227
Threat Detection and Prevention Features
ExtremeWireless Appliances and the wireless APs they manage, provide Wireless Intrusion Detection
Services (WIDS) and Wireless Intrusion Prevention Services (WIPS) to detect, report, and protect
against potential wireless network attacks and threats such as rogue APs, AP spooﬁng, honeypot APs,
password cracking, man-in-the-middle, denial of service (DoS), and others. The latest generation of
controllers and the APs (AP39xx, AP38xx, AP37xx and W78xC series) implement the Radar feature and
its major functions:
•
•
•
•
•
Scanning channels for threat identiﬁcation
Analyzing and detecting a wide range of wireless security threats
Taking active countermeasures (if conﬁgured to do so) against identiﬁed threats
Validating WLAN (Wireless Local Area Network) Service conﬁguration to protect against security
weakness
Generating threat event reports and forwarding them to Extreme Management Center™
All APs can simultaneously perform channel bridging and scan (monitor) the channels they are
bridging. These APs can also be conﬁgured (on their controller) to perform countermeasures against
detected threats. Radar threat detection scanning of channels on the APs is conﬁgured on In-Service
Scan Proﬁles.
You can conﬁgure APs to operate as full time Radar agents by adding them to a Guardian Scan Proﬁle.
When operating in this mode, they are referred to as "Guardians." Once assigned to the Guardian Scan
Proﬁle, the APs stop forwarding traffic on both radios and devote all of their resources to threat
detection and countermeasures. Any AP added to a Guardian Scan Proﬁle is done so in its entirety.
Therefore, it is not possible to dedicate one radio to scanning, and the other to forwarding. Guardian AP
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
105
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
can scan on multiple channels, which you can conﬁgure from the Scan Proﬁle Detection Settings user
interface. The AP cannot scan or transmit on channels that are prohibited by the regulations of the
countries in which it is deployed.
Related Links
Guardian Scan Proﬁle Detection Settings on page 578
Working with ExtremeWireless Radar on page 563
802.11n- and 802.11ac-Compliant Access Point Features
All 802.11n-compatible APs have the following features:
MIMO
ft
ra
Wireless APs use MIMO (multiple input, multiple output) — a technology that uses advanced signal
processing with multiple antennas to improve throughput. MIMO takes advantage of multipath
propagation to decrease packet retries to improve the ﬁdelity of the wireless network. MIMO increases
throughput by using multiple streams.
MIMO radios send out one, two or three radio signals through each antenna. Each signal is called a
spatial stream. The antennas on the AP are deliberately spaced so that each spatial stream follows a
slightly different path to the client device. Two spatial streams get multiplied into several streams as
they bounce off obstructions in the vicinity. This phenomenon is called multipath. As the streams are
bounced from different surfaces, they follow different paths to the client device. The client device also
has multiple antennas. Each of the antennas independently decodes the arriving signal. Then the
decoded signal from each antenna combines with the decoded signals from the other antennas. A
software algorithm uses this redundancy to extract one or two spatial streams and enhances the signal
to noise ratio of the streams.
The client device also sends out one or two spatial streams through its multiple antennas. These spatial
streams get multiplied into several steams as they bounce off the obstructions in the vicinity en route to
the AP. MIMO receivers receive these multiple streams with three antennas. Each of the three antennas
independently decodes the arriving signal. Then the decoded signal of each antennas is combined with
the decoded signals from the other antennas. The receiving AP's MIMO receiver also uses redundancy to
extract one or two spatial streams and enhances the streams' signal to noise ratio.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
106
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
Operating with multiple antennas, an AP with MIMO is capable of picking up even the weakest signals
from the client devices.
Figure 11: MIMO in Wireless APs
ft
The AP39xx models offer Multi-User MIMO that enables Wave2 APs to communicate with multiple
Wave2 clients concurrently, in the downstream direction. Up to 3 MU-MIMO conversations concurrently.
Channel Bonding
In addition to MIMO technology, the 802.11n-compliant APs have additional radio features that increase
the effective throughput of the wireless LAN. Second-generation wireless APs use radio channels that
are 20 MHz wide. The channels must be spaced at 20 MHz to avoid interference. The radios of 802.11ncompliant wireless APs can use two channels at the same time to create a 40-MHz-wide channel. The
802.11ac radio of the AP38xx and AP39xx series can use four channels at the same time to create an 80MHz-wide channel. By using multiple 20-MHz channels in this manner, the wireless AP achieves more
than double the throughput. The 40-MHz and 80-MHz channels in 802.11n and 802.11ac are adjacent 20-
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
107
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
MHz channels, bonded together. This technique of using multiple channels at the same time is called
channel bonding.
Shortened Guard Interval
The purpose of the guard interval is to introduce immunity to propagation delays, echoes and
reﬂections of symbols in orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) — a method by which
information is transmitted via a radio signal in APs.
In OFDM, the beginning of each symbol is preceded by a guard interval. As long as the echoes fall
within this interval, they do not affect the safe decoding of the actual data, as data is interpreted only
outside the guard interval. Longer guard periods reduce the channel efficiency. 802.11n-compliant APs
provide reduced guard periods, thereby increasing the throughput.
MAC Enhancements
802.11n-compliant APs also have an improved MAC layer protocol that reduces overhead (in the MAC
layer protocol) and contention losses, resulting in increased throughput.
ft
ra
Wireless AP International Licensing
A wireless AP must be conﬁgured to operate on the appropriate radio band in accordance with the
regulations of the country in which it is being used. For more information, see Regulatory Information
on page 705.
To conﬁgure the appropriate radio band according to the country of operation, use the controller. For
more information, see Conﬁguring Wireless AP Properties on page 156.
Related Links
Licensing Considerations on page 108
Licensing Considerations
With ExtremeWireless v10.01 and later each controller is licensed in a speciﬁc domain. The domain
licenses include:
•
•
•
•
FCC
ROW
MNT
EGY
The user interface reﬂects the domain of the controller. The following are use cases for each domain:
•
A wireless appliance with an FCC license can manage access points deployed in the United States,
Puerto Rico, or Colombia.
•
A wireless appliance with a ROW license can manage access points deployed in any country except
the United States, Puerto Rico, Egypt, or Colombia.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
108
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
•
A wireless appliance with a EGY license will continue to require ROW hardware, but the license will
restrict country selection to Egypt only. A wireless controller with a EGY license can manage access
points deployed in Egypt.
Note
If upgrading from v10.21 with an EGY license, call customer support for assistance.
•
•
A wireless appliance with a MNT license can manage only domain-locked access points, which are
the AP39xx-FCC, AP39xx-ROW, and the AP3805i-FCC, AP3805i-ROW only. The FCC models must
be deployed in the United States, Puerto Rico, or Colombia. The ROW must be deployed in any
country except the United States, Puerto Rico, or Colombia.
Note
The AP37xx and AP38xx will NOT be able to connect to a controller licensed in the MNT
domain.
ft
ra
First-time Conﬁguration Guidelines
Wireless AP Default IP Address
Wireless APs are shipped from the factory with a default IP address — 192.168.1.20. The default IP
address simpliﬁes the ﬁrst-time IP address conﬁguration process for APs. If an AP fails in its discovery
process, it returns to its default IP address. This AP behavior ensures that only one AP at a time can use
the default IP address on a subnet. For more information, see Discovery and Registration on page 120.
Wireless APs can acquire their IP addresses by one of two methods:
•
DHCP assignment — When an AP is powered on, it attempts to reach the DHCP (Dynamic Host
Conﬁguration Protocol) server on the network to acquire an IP address. If successful, the DHCP
server assigns an IP address to the AP.
• If the DHCP assignment is not successful in the ﬁrst 60 seconds, the AP returns to its default IP
address.
• After 30 seconds in the default IP address mode, it attempts again to acquire an IP address from
the DHCP server.
• The process repeats until the DHCP assignment is successful, or until an administrator assigns the
AP an IP address, using static conﬁguration.
DHCP assignment is the default method for AP conﬁguration. DHCP assignment is part of the
discovery process. For more information, see Discovery and Registration on page 120.
•
Static conﬁguration —Use the static conﬁguration option to assign a static IP address to a wireless
AP. For more information, see the following section.
You can establish an SSH session with an AP during the time window of 30 seconds when the AP
returns to its default IP address mode. If a static IP address is assigned during this period, reboot the
AP for the conﬁguration to take effect. For more information, see Assigning a Static IP Address to a
Wireless AP on page 110.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
109
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
Assigning a Static IP Address to a Wireless AP
Depending upon the network condition, you can assign a static IP address to a wireless AP using the
Wireless Assistant (Controller’s GUI). Refer to Setting Up the Wireless AP Using Static Conﬁguration on
page 199 for more information.
Conﬁguring Wireless APs for the First Time
Before conﬁguring an AP for the ﬁrst time, conﬁrm that the following tasks have already been
performed:
•
The ExtremeWireless Appliance has been installed and connected to the network. For more
information, see Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless Appliance on page 31.
•
The ExtremeWireless Appliance has been conﬁgured. For more information, see Conﬁguring the
ExtremeWireless Appliance on page 31.
The wireless APs have been installed.
•
For installation information, refer to the respective AP Installation Guide.
ft
ra
Once the APs are installed, continue with the AP initial conﬁguration:
Deﬁne parameters for the discovery process. For more information, see Wireless AP Registration on
page 123.
2 Connect the AP to a power source to initiate the discovery and registration process. For installation
information, refer to the respective AP Installation Guide.
General Conﬁguration Methods
This section describes the methods you can use to modify the properties of APs in your network.
Modifying the Properties of Wireless APs Based on a Default AP Conﬁguration
To reset the AP to the default conﬁguration, select AP Properties > Reset To Defaults.
To conﬁgure a wireless AP with the system default AP settings:
1 From the top menu, click AP and select the AP to modify.
2 Click Reset to Defaults and click OK to conﬁrm your changes.
Caution
If you reset an AP to defaults, its Search List is deleted, regardless of the settings in
Common Conﬁguration.
Modifying the Default Setting of Wireless APs Using the Copy to Defaults Feature
The Copy to Defaults feature allows the properties of an already conﬁgured AP to become the system’s
default AP settings.
To modify the system default AP settings based on an already conﬁgured AP:
From the main menu, click AP and select the AP whose properties you want to use as the default.
You can modify the properties here if necessary.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
110
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
2 Click Copy to Defaults and click OK to conﬁrm your changes.
AP Multi-Edit Properties
When you use the Multi-edit function, only options that are explicitly modiﬁed are changed by the
update. The APs shown in the Wireless APs list are supported by various versions of software. Only
attributes that are common between software versions are available for multi-edit. Setting an attribute
that does not apply to an AP does not cause an abort of the multi-edit operation.
Table 10: Multi-Edit AP Properties
Field
Description
AP Properties
Location
ft
ra
Deﬁne the location of the AP.
When a client roams to an AP with a different location, Area
Notiﬁcation is triggered. The Area Notiﬁcation feature is designed to
track client locations within pre-deﬁned areas using either the
Location Engine (for more information, see Conﬁguring the Location
Engine on page 609) or the AP Location ﬁeld. When the clients change
areas, a notiﬁcation is sent.
Location functionality on the AP is useful when access to Extreme
Management Center OneView is not available.
Zone
Zone allows the RADIUS client to send the AP Zone name as the
BSSID instead of the radio MAC address. This feature can be enabled
regardless of whether the Site is using centrally located or local
RADIUS servers. Zone name is limited to 32 bytes. Each AP can have
its own Zone label although it is often useful to assign the same Zone
to multiple APs. It can be easier to base authorization decisions on the
zone label rather than on the BSSID.
Poll Timeout
Type the timeout value, in seconds. The AP uses this value to trigger
re-establishing the link with the Controller if the AP does not get an
answer to its polling. The default value is 10 seconds.
Note: If you are conﬁguring session availability, the Poll Timeout value
should be 1.5 to 2 times of Detect link failure value on AP Properties
screen. For more information, see Session Availability on page 545.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
111
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
Table 10: Multi-Edit AP Properties (continued)
Field
Description
Secure Tunnel
This feature, when enabled, provides encryption, authentication, and
key management between the AP and/or controllers.
Select the desired Secure Tunnel mode from the drop-down list:
• Disabled — Secure Tunnel is turned off and no traffic is encrypted.
All SFTP/SSH/TFTP traffic works normally.
• Encrypt control traffic between AP & Controller — An IPSEC tunnel
is established from the AP to the controller and all SFTP/SSH/
TFTP/WASSP control traffic is encrypted. The AP skips the
registration and authentication phases and when selected, the
Secure Tunnel Lifetime feature can be conﬁgured.
• Encrypt control and data traffic between AP & Controller — This
mode only beneﬁts routed/bridged@Controller Topologies. An
IPSEC tunnel is established from the AP to the controller and all
SFTP/SSH/TFTP/WASSP control and data traffic is encrypted. The
AP skips the registration and authentication phases, and when
selected, the Secure Tunnel Lifetime feature can be conﬁgured.
ft
ra
Note: This option is not available for AP3805 models.
•
Debug mode — An IPSEC tunnel is established from the AP to the
controller, no traffic is encrypted, and all SFTP/SSH/TFTP traffic
works normally. The AP skips the registration and authentication
phases and when selected, the Secure Tunnel Lifetime feature can
be conﬁgured.
Note: Changing a Secure Tunnel mode will automatically disconnect
and reconnect the AP.
Secure Tunnel Lifetime (hours)
Enter an interval (in hours) at which time the keys of the IPSEC tunnel
are renegotiated.
Note: Changing the Secure Tunnel Lifetime setting will not cause any
AP disruption.
Remote Access
Determines if the AP can be accessed remotely.
Location-based Service
Enable or disable third-party location based services on this AP.
ExtremeWireless supports the following third-party services:
• AeroScout
• Ekahau
• Centrak
Maintain client session in event of poll
failure
Determines if the AP remains active when a link loss with the
controller occurs. Select this option when using a bridged at AP VNS.
This option is enabled by default.
Restart service in the absence of
controller
Determines if the AP’s radios continue providing service when the
AP’s connection to the controller is lost. Select this option when using
a bridged at AP VNS. When this option is enabled, the AP starts a
bridged at AP VNS in the absence of a controller.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
112
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
Table 10: Multi-Edit AP Properties (continued)
Description
Use broadcast for disassociation
Determines if the AP uses broadcast disassociation when
disconnecting all clients, instead of disassociating each client one by
one. This setting affects the behavior of the AP when the AP is
preparing to reboot or preparing to enter one of the special modes
(DRM initial channel selection). and when a BSSID is deactivated or
removed on the AP. This option is disabled by default.
LLDP
Determines if the AP broadcasts LLDP (Link Layer Discovery Protocol)
information. This option is disabled by default.
If SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) is enabled on the
controller and you enable LLDP, the LLDP Conﬁrmation dialog is
displayed.
Select one of the following:
• Proceed (not recommended) — Select this option to enable LLDP
and keep SNMP running.
• Disable SNMP publishing, and proceed — Select this option to
enable LLDP and disable SNMP.
• For more information on enabling SNMP, see the ExtremeWireless
Maintenance Guide.
ft
ra
Field
Multicast prioritized as voice
Ensures that multicast data has the highest priority in the wireless
network. Prioritizes multicast data to the level of voice data. This
setting must be enabled when deploying healthcare patient
monitoring devices.
IP Multicast Assembly
Determines if IP Multicast Assembly runs on the wireless AP. If
enabled, IP Multicast Assembly joins together fragmented multicast
data packets that are too large to ﬁt the MTU size of the tunnel header.
This feature is disabled by default.
Balanced Channel List Power
Simplify power settings so settings function across all channels in the
channel plan.
LED
Select the desired LED pattern from the drop-down list. Options
include: Off, WDS Signal Strength, Identify, and Normal.
Country
Indicates the country of operation. The antenna you select determines
the available channel list and the maximum transmitting power for the
country in which the AP is deployed.
Antennas
The Professional Install option is only available for AP models with
external antennas. The ﬁelds and corresponding antenna value options
that appear on the Professional Install dialog depend on the selected
AP and the antenna models that are available. Select an antenna for
each available port. By default, the two antennas must be identical.
However, you have the option to select No Antenna for the second
antenna port. The AP3915e and AP3917e access point models offer an
external IoT antenna. Select the antenna model from the drop-down
ﬁeld. Choose the desired attenuation for each radio from the dropdown list. Selectable range is from 0 to 30 dBI.
Radio Settings
Admin Mode
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
Determines if the radio mode. Select On to enable the radio. Select Off
to disable the radio.
113
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
Table 10: Multi-Edit AP Properties (continued)
Field
Description
Radio Mode
Select the radio mode based on the type of AP. Available radio
settings are dependent on the selected radio mode.
Channel Width
Determines the channel width for the radio. Valid values are:
20 MHz — Allows 802.11n clients to use the primary channel (20
MHz) and non-802.11n clients, beacons, and multicasts to use the
802.11b/g radio protocols.
• 40 MHz — Allows 802.11n clients that support the 40 MHz
frequency to use 40 MHz, 20 MHz, or the 802.11b/g radio protocols.
802.11n clients that do not support the 40 MHz frequency can use
20 MHz or the 802.11b/g radio protocols and non-802.11n clients,
beacons, and multicasts use the 802.11b/g radio protocols.
• 80 MHz — Allows 802.11ac clients to use the 80 MHz frequency.
Applies to AP38xx and AP39xx Radio 1 only.
• Auto — Automatically switches between 20 MHz, 40 MHz, and 80
MHz channel widths, depending on how busy the extension
channels are.
•
ft
ra
DTIM
Type the desired DTIM (Delivery Traffic Indication Message) period —
the number of beacon intervals between two DTIM beacons. To ensure
the best client power savings, use a large number. Use a small number
to minimize broadcast and multicast delay. The default value is 5.
Beacon Period
Deﬁnes the time, in milliseconds, between beacon transmissions. The
default value is 100 milliseconds.
RTS/CTS (Bytes)
(Request to Send/Clear to Send) handshake. Determines the
maximum packet size, in bytes, that triggers a RTS/CTS handshake.
The default value is 2346 (the maximum 802.11 frame size) which
means all packets are sent without RTS/CTS. If the transmitted packet
size is greater than the threshold value, the RTS/CTS handshake
occurs. Otherwise, the data frame is sent immediately. Reduce this
value only if necessary. Note: In order for RTS/CTS to take affect, the
RTS threshold must be less than or equal to the Frag threshold.
Frag Threshold (Bytes)
Determines the maximum packet size, in bytes, that triggers packet
fragmentation. The default value is 2346. At 2346, all packets are sent
unfragmented. Any value above the frag threshold triggers packet
fragmentation by the AP prior to transmission.
RF Domain
Deﬁnes a group of APs that cooperate in managing RF channels and
transmission power levels. The maximum string length is 16 characters.
Channel
Select Auto to use Automatic Channel Selection. For more
information, see Dynamic Radio Management (DRM) on page 174.
Auto Tx Power Control
Determines if the AP automatically adapts transmission power signals
according to the coverage provided by the AP. After a period of time,
the system stabilizes itself based on the RF coverage of your wireless
APs. When enabled, Min Tx Power and Auto Tx Power Ctrl Adjust
parameters can be edited, and the ATPC algorithm adjusts the AP
power between the Max Tx and Min Tx settings. When disabled, the
radio uses the Max Tx Power value or the largest value in the
compliance table,whichever is smaller.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
114
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
Table 10: Multi-Edit AP Properties (continued)
Description
Max Tx Power
Determines the maximum power level used by the radio in dBm. The
values are governed by compliance requirements based on the
country, radio, and antenna selected, and vary by AP. Changing this
value below the current Min Tx Power value will lower the Min Tx
Power to a level lower than the selected Max TX Power. If Auto Tx
Power Ctrl (ATPC) is disabled, the radio uses the selected value or the
largest value in the compliance table as the power level, whichever is
smaller.
Min Tx Power
Determines the minimum power level for the radio. Use the lowest
supported value in order to not limit the potential Tx power level range
that can be used. If ATPC is enabled, select the Min Tx power level that
is equal or lower than the Max Tx power level. The Min Tx Power
setting cannot be set higher than the Max Tx Power setting.
Auto Tx Ctrl Adjust
Determines if the AP automatically adapts transmission power signals
according to the coverage provided by the AP. After a period of time,
the system stabilizes itself based on the RF coverage of your wireless
APs. When enabled, Min Tx Power and Auto Tx Power Ctrl Adjust
parameters can be edited, and the ATPC algorithm adjusts the AP
power between the Max Tx and Min Tx settings. When disabled, the
radio uses the Max Tx Power value or the largest value in the
compliance table,whichever is smaller.
ft
ra
Field
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
115
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
Table 10: Multi-Edit AP Properties (continued)
Description
Channel Plan
If ACS is enabled you can deﬁne a channel plan for the AP. Deﬁning a
channel plan allows you to control which channels are available for use
during an ACS scan. For example, you may want to avoid using
speciﬁc channels because of low power, regulatory domain, or radar
interference.
• For 5 GHz Radio nodes, click one of the following:
• All channels — ACS scans all channels for an operating channel
and, when ACS is triggered, the optimal channel is selected
from all available channels.
• All Non-DFS Channels — ACS scans all non-DFS channels for
an operating channel. With ACS, the AP selects the best nonDFS channel.
• Custom — To conﬁgure individual channels from which the ACS
selects an operating channel, click Conﬁgure. The Custom
Channel Plan dialog displays. By default, all channels
participate in the channel plan. Click the individual channels
you want to include in the channel plan. To select contiguous
channels, use the Shift key. To select multiple, non-contiguous
channels in the list, use the CTRL key. Click OK to save the
conﬁguration.
• All channels including weather radar — ACS selects the best
channel from the available channels list. Selected channel may
be DFS, weather-radar DFS or non-DFS. Weather-radar
channels are approved for selected AP models in selected
countries. Consult the compliance information for the selected
AP.
The weather channel includes 5600-5650MHz sub-bands
and requires a listening period before the AP can provide
wireless service. During the listening period, the Current
Channel ﬁeld for DFS channels displays the value DFS
Timeout, and the weather channel ﬁelds display DFS
Timeout . In Europe, the listening period can be up to 10
minutes. In the U.S., this period is 1 minute.
• For 2.4 GHz Radio nodes, click one of the following:
• 3 Channel Plan — ACS scans the following channels: 1, 6, and 11
in North America, and 1, 7, and 13 in the rest of the world.
• 4 Channel Plan — ACS scans the following channels: 1, 4, 7, and
11 in North America, and 1, 5, 9, and 13 in the rest of the world.
• Auto — ACS scans the default channel plan channels: 1, 6, and
11 in North America, and 1, 5, 9, and 13 in the rest of the world.
• Custom — If you want to conﬁgure individual channels from
which the ACS selects an operating channel, click Conﬁgure.
The Add Channels dialog is displayed. Click the individual
channels you want to add to the channel plan while pressing
the CTRL key, and then click OK.
ft
ra
Field
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
116
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
Table 10: Multi-Edit AP Properties (continued)
Field
Description
Dynamic Channel Selection
Determines behavior when traffic or noise levels exceed the
conﬁgured DCS thresholds. Valid values are:
• Monitor Mode — An alarm is triggered and an information log is
generated.
• Active Mode — An alarm is triggered, an information log is
generated, the AP stops operating on the current channel,and ACS
automatically selects an alternate channel for the AP to operate
on.
DCS Noise Threshold
Deﬁnes the noise interference limit, measured in dBm. If the noise
interface exceeds this threshold, ACS scans for a new operating
channel for the AP.
DCS Channel Occupancy Threshold
Deﬁnes the channel utilization level, measured as a percentage. If the
threshold is exceeded, ACS scans for a new operating channel for the
AP.
ft
ra
DCS Update Period (Minutes)
Deﬁnes a period of time, in minutes, where the average values for DCS
Noise and Channel Occupancy are measured. If the average value for
either setting exceeds the deﬁned threshold for that setting, then the
AP triggers Automatic Channel Scan (ACS).
Dynamic Channel Selection (DCS) events Indicates items that can affect DCS (Dynamic Channel Selection).
Enable one or more events if they are part of the wireless network:
• Bluetooth
• Microwave
• Cordless Phone
• Constant Wave
• Video Bridge
Interference Wait Time
Length of the delay (in seconds) before logging an alarm. Default
setting is 10 seconds.
Preamble
Select a preamble type for 11b-speciﬁc (CCK) rates: Short, or Long.
Click Short if you are sure that there is no 11b APs or client in the
vicinity of this AP. Click Long if compatibility with 11b clients is
required.
Protection Mode
When data collides on a given channel, CTS (clear to send) protection
determines which device transmits at a given time.
• Auto. The default and recommended setting.
• None. Select if 11b APs and clients are not expected.
• Always. Select if you expect many 11b-only clients.
Protection Rate
A CTS (Clear to Send) packet is always sent out at the MBR (Minimum
Basic Rate) conﬁgured for the radio. Protection is used when the
sending rate (to the client) is greater than the conﬁgured protection
rate. For example,if the protection rate is 11Mbps it means that 802.11
protection is used.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
117
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
Table 10: Multi-Edit AP Properties (continued)
Field
Protection Type
Description
Select a protection type:
CTS (Clear to Send) Only.
RTS (Request to Send) and CTS. Recommended when a 40 MHz or
80 MHz channel is used. This protects high throughput
transmissions on extension channels from interference from
non-11n APs and clients.
•
•
Deﬁnes the minimum data rate that must be supported by all stations
in a BSS (Base Station Subsystem):
• Select 1, 2, 5.5, or 11 Mbps for 11b and 11b+11g modes.
• Select 6, 12, or 24 Mbps for 11g-only mode.
• Select 6, 12, or 24 Mbps for 11a mode.
Probe Suppression
Used to remedy "sticky clients", that is clients that do not probe on
other channels and remain associated to an AP when a better AP is
available. Conﬁgure per radio (Enable/Disable and Threshold). Applies
to AP37xx, AP38xx, and AP39xx series APs. Probe Suppression
accomplishes the following:
• RSS threshold (Adjustable “Cell Size”)
• Reduces the number of Probe Responses.
• Prevents clients with RSS below the threshold from associating.
ft
ra
Min Basic Rate
Force Disassociate
Field is available when Probe Suppression is enabled. This setting does
the following:
• Disassociates “Sticky Clients”
• Occurs 5dBm below the suppression threshold.
• Prevents clients from re-associating to the AP.
• Encourages/Forces roaming to a better AP.
Conﬁgure per radio (Enable/Disable).
RSS Threshold (dBm)
90 (Range of -50 to -100). Field is available when Probe Suppression is
enabled.
Max % of non-unicast traffic per Beacon
period
Deﬁnes the maximum percentage of time that the AP transmits nonunicast packets (broadcast and multicast traffic) for each conﬁgured
Beacon Period. For each non-unicast packet transmitted, the system
calculates the airtime used by each packet and drops all packets that
exceed the conﬁgured maximum percentage. Restrict non-unicast
traffic, to limit the impact of broadcasts and multicasts on overall
system performance.
Optimized Multicast for power save
Enables several performance enhancements applicable to clients in
power save mode. One of these enhancements converts multicast to
unicast for power save clients when the ratio of active to power save
clients is sufficiently large.
Adaptable rate for Multicast
Determines if the AP tracks the lowest unicast transmission speed of
any station currently associated to the AP. Multicast frames are then
forwarded at that speed or at the Minimum Basic Rate, whichever is
higher.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
118
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
Table 10: Multi-Edit AP Properties (continued)
Field
Description
Multicast to Unicast delivery
Determines if multicast packets are replaced by one unicast packet per
destination station. Each unicast packet is transmitted at the highest
speed the destination station will accept. Note: It is possible that some
client devices will not handle frames properly when the L2 MAC is
unicast and the L3 IP address is multicast in which case the "Multicast
to Unicast Delivery" option should be disabled.
Note: The AP converts a multicast frame to unicast frames only when
it determines that it is more efficient to do so. With the exception of
“Optimized Multicast for power save” these options can be enabled at
any time without service disruption.
11n Radio Settings
Guard Interval
ft
ra
Ensures that individual transmissions do not interfere with one
another. It is the space between the symbols being transmitted.
Selecting Short increases throughput, but can increase interference.
Selecting Long can increase overhead due to additional idle time. The
wireless 802.11n AP provides a shorter guard interval, which increases
channel throughput. Long guard periods reduce channel efficiency.
Protection Mode
When data collides on a given channel, CTS (clear to send) protection
determines which device transmits at a given time.
• Auto. The default and recommended setting.
• None. Select if 11b APs and clients are not expected.
• Always. Select if you expect many 11b-only clients.
Protection Type
Select a protection type:
• CTS (Clear to Send) Only.
• RTS (Request to Send) and CTS. Recommended when a 40 MHz or
80 MHz channel is used. This protects high throughput
transmissions on extension channels from interference from
non-11n APs and clients.
Extension Channel Busy Threshold
CTS Only or RTS CTS, when a 40 MHz channel is used. This protects
high throughput transmissions on extension channels from
interference from non-11n APs and clients.
Aggregate MSDUs
Determines MAC Service Data Unit (MSDU) aggregation. Enable to
increase the maximum frame transmission size.
Aggregate MPDUs
Determines MAC Protocol Data Unit (MPDU) aggregation. Enable to
increase the maximum frame transmission size, providing a signiﬁcant
improvement in throughput.
Aggregate MPDU Max Length
Deﬁnes the maximum length of the MAC Protocol Data Unit (MPDU)
aggregation. Valid values range from 1024-65535 bytes. For the
802.11ac radio (Radio 1 of the AP38xx), the range is 1024-1048575.
Agg. MPDU Max # of Sub-frames
Determines the maximum number of sub frames in the aggregate
MAC Protocol Data Unit (MPDU). Valid value range is 2-64. The default
value and recommended value is 64. Setting this value to 64 results in
less overhead and higher throughput.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
119
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
Table 10: Multi-Edit AP Properties (continued)
Field
Description
ADDBA Support
Block acknowledgement. Provides acknowledgement of a group of
frames instead of a single frame. ADDBA Support must be enabled if
Aggregate MPDU is enable.
LDPC
Increases the reliability of the transmission resulting in a 2dB increased
performance compared to traditional 11n coding.
STBC
Space Time Block Coding. A simple open loop transmit diversity
scheme. When enabled, STBC conﬁguration is 2x1 (two spatial streams
combined into one spatial stream). TXBF overrides STBC if both are
enabled for single stream rates.
TXBF
Tx Beam Forming is a technique of re-aligning the transmitter
multipath spatial streams phases in order to get better signal-to-noise
ratio on the receiver side. For the AP37xx and AP38xx models, valid
values are Enabled or Disabled. For the 39xx APs, this setting is only
available on Radio1. The valid values are: MU_MIMO and Disabled.
ft
ra
Static Conﬁguration
EWC Search List
Deﬁnes the list of IP addresses that the AP is conﬁgured to try to
connect to in the event that the current connection to the controller is
lost.
Tunnel MTU
Maximum transmission unit. Determines the largest packet size than
can be transmitted by an IP interface without the packet needing to be
broken down into smaller units.
WLAN Assignments
WLAN Assignment Option
Determines action on the WLAN assignment list associated with one
or more APs. Valid values are Clear WLAN List or Reconﬁgure WLAN
List.
Discovery and Registration
When a wireless AP is powered on, it automatically begins a discovery process to determine its own IP
address and the IP address of the controller. When the discovery process is successful, the AP registers
with the controller. For more information, see Figure 12.
Warning
Only use power supplies that are recommended by Extreme Networks.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
120
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
ft
Figure 12: Wireless AP Discovery Process
Wireless AP Discovery
Wireless APs discover the IP address of a controller using a sequence of mechanisms that allow for the
possible services available on the enterprise network. The discovery process is successful when the AP
successfully locates a controller to which it can register.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
121
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
Ensure that the appropriate services on your enterprise network are prepared to support the discovery
process. The following steps are used to ﬁnd a known controller:
Use the predeﬁned static IP addresses for the controllers on the network (if conﬁgured).
You can specify a list of static IP addresses of the controllers on your network. On the Static
Conﬁguration tab, add the addresses to the Wireless Controller Search List.
Caution
Wireless APs conﬁgured with a static Wireless Controller Search List can connect only to
controllers in the list. Improperly conﬁgured APs cannot connect to a non-existent
controller address, and therefore cannot receive a corrected conﬁguration.
2 Use the IP address of the controller to which the AP last connected successfully.
Once an AP has successfully registered with a controller, it recalls that controller's IP address, and
uses that address on subsequent reboots. The AP bypasses discovery and goes straight to
registration.
ft
ra
If a known controller cannot be located, the following discovery process steps should be followed:
3 Use DHCP Option 60 to query the DHCP server for available controllers. The DHCP server responds
to the AP with Option 43, which lists the available controllers.
For the DHCP server to respond to an Option 60 request from an AP, conﬁgure the DHCP server
with the vendor class identiﬁer (VCI) for each AP. Also, conﬁgure the DHCP server with the IP
addresses of the controllers. For more information, refer to the Getting Started Guide.
4 Use a Domain Name Server (DNS) lookup for the host name Controller.domain-name.
The AP tries the DNS server if it is conﬁgured in parallel with SLP unicast and SLP multicast.
If you use this method for discovery, place an A record in the DNS server for Controller.. The is optional, but if used, ensure it is listed with the DHCP server.
5 Use a multicast SLP request to ﬁnd SLP SAs
The AP sends a multicast SLP request, looking for any SLP Service Agents providing the Extreme
Networks service.
The AP tries SLP multicast in parallel with other discovery methods.
6 Use DHCP Option 78 to locate a Service Location Protocol (SLP) Directory Agent (DA), followed by a
unicast SLP request to the Directory Agent.
To use the DHCP and unicast SLP discovery method, ensure that the DHCP server on your network
supports Option 78 (DHCP for SLP RFC2610). The APs use this method to discover the controller.
This solution takes advantage of two services that are present on most networks:
•
•
DHCP — The standard is a means of providing IP addresses dynamically to devices on a network.
SLP — A means of allowing client applications to discover network services without knowing
their location beforehand. Devices advertise their services using a Service Agent (SA). In larger
installations, a Directory Agent (DA) collects information from SAs and creates a central
repository (SLP RFC2608).
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
122
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
The controller contains an SLP SA that, when started, queries the DHCP server for Option 78 and
if found, registers itself with the DA as service type Extreme Networks. The controller contains a
DA (SLPD).
The AP queries DHCP servers for Option 78 to locate any DAs. The SLP User Agent for the AP
then queries the DAs for a list of Extreme Networks SAs.
Option 78 must be set for the subnets connected to the ports of the controller and the subnets
connected to the APs. These subnets must contain an identical list of DA IP addresses.
Wireless AP Registration
To deﬁne the discovery process parameters:
1 From the top menu, click AP.
2 In the left pane, click Global > Registration.
ft
ra
The following screen appears:
3 Conﬁgure the following parameters:
Security Mode
•
•
The Allow all Wireless APs to connect option is selected by default. For more information, see
Security Mode on page 124.
Allow only approved Wireless APs to connect
Discovery Timers . The discovery timer parameters dictate the number of retry attempts and the
time delay between each attempt.
•
Number of retries
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
123
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
•
Delay between retries
The number of retries is limited to 255 for the discovery. The default number of retries is 3, and
the default delay between retries is 3 seconds.
SSH Access
Set up a Secure Shell password. Click Unmask to display the password as you type.
•
•
Password
Conﬁrm Password
Secure Cluster
Cluster Shared Secret. A common, default cluster ID.
•
•
ft
ra
Click Unmask to display the shared secret value.
Check Use Cluster Encryption . If you disable cluster encryption, the AP cannot participate in the
cluster.
4 Click View SLP Registration to conﬁrm SLP Registration. A screen appears displaying the results of
the diagnostic slpdump tool.
5 From the Wireless AP Registration screen, click Save to save your changes.
Once the discovery parameters are deﬁned, you can connect the AP to a power source. For instructions
on connecting and powering an AP, refer to the Installation Guide for the speciﬁc AP.
Security Mode
Security mode deﬁnes how the controller behaves when registering new, unknown devices. During the
registration process, the controller’s approval of the AP’s serial number depends on the security mode
that has been set:
•
Allow all APs to connect
• If the controller does not recognize the registering serial number, a new registration record is
automatically created for the AP (if within MDL license limit). The AP receives a default
conﬁguration. The default conﬁguration can be the default template assignment.
• If the controller recognizes the serial number, it indicates that the registering device is preregistered with the controller. The controller uses the existing registration record to authenticate
the AP and the existing conﬁguration record to conﬁgure the AP.
•
Allow only approved APs to connect (this is also known as secure mode)
• If controller does not recognize the AP, the AP's registration record is created in pending state (if
within MDL limits). The administrator is required to manually approve a pending AP for it to
provide active service. The pending AP receives minimum conﬁguration only, which allows it to
maintain an active link with the controller for future state change. The AP's radios are not
conﬁgured or enabled. Pending APs are not eligible for conﬁguration operations (VNS
Assignment, default template, Radio parameters) until approved.
• If the controller recognizes the serial number, the controller uses the existing registration record
to authenticate the AP. Following successful authentication, the AP is conﬁgured according to its
stored conﬁguration record.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
124
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
During the initial setup of the network, Extreme Networks recommends that you select the Allow
all Wireless APs to connect option. This option is the most efficient way to get a large number of
APs registered with the controller. Once the initial setup is complete,Extreme Networks
recommends that you reset the security mode to the Allow only approved Wireless APs to
connect option. This option ensures that no unapproved APs are allowed to connect. For more
information, see Conﬁguring Wireless AP Properties on page 156.
Registration After Discovery
Any of the discovery steps 2 through 6 can inform the AP of a list of multiple IP addresses to which the
AP may attempt to connect. Once the AP has discovered these addresses, it sends out connection
requests to each of them. These requests are sent simultaneously. The AP attempts to register only with
the ﬁrst which responds to its request.
When the AP obtains the IP address of the controller, it connects and registers, sending its serial
number identiﬁer to the controller, and receiving from the controller a port IP address and binding key.
ft
ra
Once the AP is registered with a controller, conﬁgure the AP. After the AP is registered and conﬁgured,
you can assign it to one or more Virtual Network Services (VNS) to handle wireless traffic.
The AP is registered with Secure mode and Un-secure mode. For new APs, that option is set in AP
Default Settings dialog.
Viewing a List of All APs
To view a list of all APs:
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
125
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
From the top menu, click AP.
af
Search for any part of the AP string, any column of the AP list. Results:
• APs that match the search criteria appear.
Select one or more APs and apply actions to selected APs.
•
At the top of the screen, enter search criteria and click
APs that match the search criteria are displayed in the list.
To take action on one or more APs, select the check box for the AP and select an action from the
Actions button. For more information, see AP Actions on page 128.
To view AP properties, click the AP row (not the check box). AP details are displayed.
Click Conﬁgure to display AP properties. For more information, see AP Properties Tab Conﬁguration
on page 159.
To add a new AP to the list, click New > Create. For more information, see New Button -- Adding and
Registering a Wireless AP on page 131.
To add a new AP as a clone of an existing AP, click New > Clone. For more information, see Creating
a Clone AP on page 133.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
126
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
Related Links
AP Search Facility on page 127
Understanding AP Status on page 127
AP Actions on page 128
Radio Actions on page 130
New Button -- Adding and Registering a Wireless AP on page 131
Deleting an AP on page 134
AP Properties Tab Conﬁguration on page 159
AP Search Facility
Search for any part of the AP string, any column of the AP list. Results:
APs that match the search criteria appear.
Select one or more APs and apply actions to selected APs.
ft
ra
•
•
To search, do the following:
1 Go to AP > APs.
At the top of the screen, enter search criteria and click
APs that match the search criteria are displayed in the list.
Related Links
AP Actions on page 128
Radio Actions on page 130
New Button -- Adding and Registering a Wireless AP on page 131
Deleting an AP on page 134
Understanding AP Status on page 127
Understanding AP Status
The full AP list can be ﬁltered to display just Foreign APs or just Local APs. When displaying a list of all
APs, the value in the Status column is limited to Foreign or Local. In the left pane, click the Foreign or
Local link to ﬁlter the list respectively. When the list is ﬁltered, the value in the Status column changes.
Possible statuses for Local APs include:
•
•
•
Pending. (You cannot view AP properties for Pending APs.)
Active
In-Active
Possible statuses for Foreign APs include:
•
•
Active
In-Active
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
127
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
For information about changing an AP's status, see AP Actions on page 128.
AP Actions
Take the following actions from the AP Actions button.
ft
ra
Figure 13: AP Actions button
Table 11: AP Actions
Field
Description
Image Upgrade
Select from the list of AP version images and apply to selected APs. If
more than one AP is selected, the upgrade image must be common
between the selected APs. If not, message displays indicating no
common image.
To upgrade without interrupting service, click Upgrade without
interrupting service. If you click this option while the upgrade
scheduler is running, the schedule is interrupted, and the current
upgrade cycle calculates a new schedule that includes APs that
weren't upgraded.
Download appropriate image or select different APs. For information
on downloading an upgrade image, see Downloading a new Wireless
AP Software Image on page 240.
Multi Edit
Opens Multi Edit dialog for selected APs. Conﬁguration changes are
applied to selected APs only. For more information, see AP Multi-Edit
Properties on page 111.
Manage Certiﬁcates
Opens Certiﬁcates screen for selected APs. Conﬁguration changes are
applied to selected APs only. For more information, see Managing
Certiﬁcates on page 211
Approve
Approve — A Wireless AP's status changes from Pending to Approve if
the AP Registration screen was conﬁgured to register only approved
APs.
Release
Release foreign APs after recovery from a failover. Releasing an AP
corresponds to the Availability function. For more information, see
Availability and Session Availability on page 537.
Pending
Change Status to Pending — AP is removed from the Active list, and is
forced into discovery.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
128
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
Table 11: AP Actions (continued)
Description
Reboot
Restart selected APs without using SSH to access it.
On-demand Background Scan
To verify channel assignments and review channel details without
having to run a full ACS, run an on-demand background scan. For
more information, see Running a Background Scan on page 638.
Set Country
Select from a list of countries and apply the command to the selected
APs. You are prompted to conﬁrm your selection.
Apply WLAN
The Apply WLAN dialog appears. Select the radio for each conﬁgured
WLAN Service for the selected AP. List can contain 128 WLAN
Services. You are prompted to conﬁrm your selection. For AP3912 only,
you can select the client port for each service.For the AP3916 only, you
can select CAM on each service.
Reboot Camera
For AP3916 only. Restarts the camera on the AP.
Reset Camera
For AP3916 only. Resets the camera to factory default settings. After
the camera is reset, a DHCP server is required to reassign IP addresses
to the camera.
ft
ra
Field
Multi Edit - IoT
Conﬁgure more than one AP for IoT support.
Related Links
IoT Multi-Edit Conﬁguration on page 129
IoT Thread Gateway on page 196
Modifying the Status of a Wireless AP on page 156
Assigning WLAN Services to Client Ports on page 170
Applying WLAN Service
Select the radio for each conﬁgured WLAN Service for the selected AP. List can contain 128 WLAN
Services. You are prompted to conﬁrm your selection. For AP3912 only, you can select the client port for
each service.
Related Links
Assigning WLAN Services to Client Ports on page 170
IoT Multi-Edit Conﬁguration
Conﬁgure more than one AP at a time for IoT support.
Select the check box next to more than one AP that supports the IoT.
The following APs offer integrated BLE/802.15.4 radios: AP3912i , AP3915i/e, AP3916ic, AP3917i/e/k.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
129
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
2 Click Actions > Multi Edit - IoT.
Figure 14: Multi-Edit - IoT Action
ft
ra
3 Select Enable from the IoT Admin ﬁeld.
4 Select a value from the Application ﬁeld. Valid values are iBeacon, iBeacon Scan, Eddystone-url
Beacon, Eddystone-url Scan, or Thread Gateway. Resulting parameters depend on the application
you select here.
Related Links
Conﬁguring AP as an iBeacon on page 190
Conﬁguring iBeacon Scan on page 192
Conﬁguring AP as an Eddystone-url Beacon on page 194
Conﬁguring Eddystone-url Scan on page 195
Advanced Thread Gateway Properties on page 198
Radio Actions
Take the following actions from the Radio Actions button for the appropriate radio.
Figure 15: Radio 1 Actions
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
130
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
Figure 16: Radio 2 Actions button
Table 12: Radio Actions
Description
Set Tx Power
Apply this command to selected APs. All selected APs must be the
same model and licensed for the same country. Conﬁgure the setting
from the resulting dialog.
First, conﬁgure the selected APs to the same radio mode and same
channel width before setting Tx Power here. When selected AP’s are
conﬁgured for the same width/mode, the Set Tx Power dialog displays
the width/mode and you are able to set the Tx power and channel. For
more information, see Conﬁguration Parameters for Radio Properties
on page 180.
ft
ra
Field
Auto Channel Select
Apply this command to selected APs. For more information about
ACS, see Dynamic Radio Management (DRM) on page 174.
Set Radio Mode
Apply this command to selected APs. All selected APs must be the
same model and licensed for the same country. Conﬁgure the setting
from the resulting dialog.
For more information, see Conﬁguration Parameters for Radio
Properties on page 180.
Set Channel Width
Apply this command to selected APs. All selected APs must be the
same model and licensed for the same country. Conﬁgure the setting
from the resulting dialog.
For more information, see Conﬁguration Parameters for Radio
Properties on page 180.
Related Links
Conﬁguration Parameters for Radio Properties on page 180
Dynamic Radio Management (DRM) on page 174
New Button -- Adding and Registering a Wireless AP
You can manually add and register a wireless AP to the controller, but the AP must still go through the
automatic discovery and registration process to locate the controller. The AP may skip the discovery
process if it has a static list, or has previously connected and registered with the controller. When you
manually add and register an AP, the system applies the default settings to the AP. After the system
registers the AP, you can go in and edit its conﬁguration settings (see Conﬁguring Wireless AP
Properties on page 156).
To add and register an AP manually:
From the top menu, click AP.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
131
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
Regardless of the tab that you click on, the New button displays at the bottom of the page.
2 Click New and select Create or Clone.
Create
Displays the Add Wireless AP dialog. For ﬁeld descriptions, see Table 13 on page 133.
Clone
Displays the Clone AP dialog. See Creating a Clone AP on page 133.
The Add Wireless AP screen displays.
ra
ft
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
132
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
Table 13: Add Wireless AP
Description
Serial #
Type the unique identiﬁer of the AP.
Hardware Type
Select the hardware model of this AP from the drop-down menu. With
ExtremeWireless v10.01 each controller is licensed in a speciﬁc domain.
There are three types of domain licenses: FCC, ROW, EGY, and MNT.
The ExtremeWireless user interface reﬂects the domain of the
controller. The following are use cases for each domain:
• A wireless controller with an FCC license can manage AP37xx,
AP38xx, and AP39xx-FCC. These access points can be deployed in
the United States, Puerto Rico, or Colombia.
• A wireless controller with a ROW license can manage AP37xx,
AP38xx, and AP39xx-ROW. These access points can be deployed
in any country except the United States, Puerto Rico, Egypt, or
Colombia.
• A wireless controller with a MNT license can manage only domainlocked access points, which are the AP39xx-FCC and the AP39xxROW only. The AP39xx-FCC must be deployed in the United
States, Puerto Rico, or Colombia. The AP39xx-ROW must be
deployed in any country except the United States, Puerto Rico,
Egypt, or Colombia.
ft
ra
Field
Note: The AP37xx and AP38xx cannot connect to a controller
licensed in the MNT domain.
•
A wireless controller with a EGY license can manage AP37xx,
AP38xx, and AP39xx-EGY.
Name
Type a unique name for the AP that identiﬁes the access point. The
default value is the AP’s serial number.
Description
Enter a description of this AP.
Add Wireless AP
Click to add the AP with default settings. You can later modify these
settings.
When an AP is added manually, it is added to the controller database
only and does not get assigned.
Close
Click to close this window.
Related Links
Conﬁguring Wireless AP Properties on page 156
Creating a Clone AP on page 133
Creating a Clone AP
Create a new AP with the same type and conﬁguration as the selected AP. Only one AP can be selected
for the Clone action.
1 Select an AP from the AP list and click New > Clone.
2 Enter the Serial # and Name of the new clone AP.
3 Click Apply.
Related Links
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
133
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
Viewing a List of All APs on page 125
New Button -- Adding and Registering a Wireless AP on page 131
Deleting an AP
To delete an AP from the controller AP list:
1 Go to AP > APs.
2 Select the APs to delete.
3 Click Delete.
Wireless AP Default Conﬁguration
Default wireless AP conﬁguration acts as a conﬁguration template that can be automatically assigned to
new registering APs. The default AP conﬁguration allows you to specify common sets of radio
conﬁguration parameters and VNS assignments for APs.
ft
ra
Conﬁguring the Default Wireless AP Settings
Wireless APs are added with default settings. You can modify the system’s AP default settings, and then
use these default settings to conﬁgure newly added APs. In addition, you can base the AP default
settings on an existing AP conﬁguration or you can make pre-conﬁgured APs inherit the properties of
the default AP conﬁguration when they register with the system.
Each AP model has its own tab:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Common Conﬁguration — Conﬁgure common conﬁguration, such as WLAN assignments and static
conﬁguration options for all APs. See Conﬁguring Common Conﬁguration Default AP Settings on
page 135.
AP37xx W78xC— Conﬁgure the default settings for the Radar series APs. See Conﬁguring AP37xx,
W78xC Default AP Settings on page 146.
AP37xx Dual Band — Conﬁgure the default settings for the Radar series APs. See Conﬁguring
AP37xx Dual Band Default Settings on page 145
AP38xx— Conﬁgure the default settings for the ExtremeWireless Radar series APs. See Conﬁguring
AP38xx Default AP Settings on page 143.
AP3801— Conﬁgure the default settings for the ExtremeWireless Radar series APs. See Conﬁguring
AP3801 Default AP Settings on page 143.
AP3805— Conﬁgure the default settings for the ExtremeWireless Radar series APs. See Conﬁguring
AP3805 Default AP Settings on page 144.
•
AP3912 — Conﬁgure the default settings for the ExtremeWireless wall plate AP. See Conﬁguring
AP3912 Default AP Settings on page 139.
•
AP3915 — Conﬁgure the default settings for the ExtremeWireless AP3915, BLE Radio enabled AP.
See Conﬁguring AP3915 Default AP Settings on page 138.
AP3916ic — Conﬁgure the default settings for the ExtremeWireless Integrated Camera AP. See
Conﬁguring AP3916 Default AP Settings on page 137.
•
•
AP3917 — Conﬁgure the default settings for the ExtremeWireless AP3917, BLE Radio enabled AP.
See Conﬁguring AP3917 Default AP Settings on page 136.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
134
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
•
•
AP3935 — Conﬁgure the default settings for the ExtremeWireless indoor series AP. See Conﬁguring
AP3935 Default AP Settings on page 140.
AP3965 — Conﬁgure the default settings for the ExtremeWireless outdoor series AP. See
Conﬁguring AP3965 Default AP Settings on page 142.
Conﬁguring Common Conﬁguration Default AP Settings
To conﬁgure common conﬁguration default AP settings:
1 From the top menu, click AP.
2 In the left pane, click Global > Default Settings.
The Common Conﬁguration tab is displayed.
ft
ra
Note
Ports 1, 2, and 3, are available on the AP3912. Port 1 is the port that corresponds to the
Camera (CAM) function of the AP3916ic.
3 In the Static Conﬁguration section, you can specify an EWC search list or use the search list
provided from the AP. Do one of the following:
Check Learn EWC Search List from AP to accept the AP's search list, or clear the check box to
specify a common search list for all APs. For more information about creating an EWC Search List,
see Table 22 on page 201.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
135
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
4 In the WLAN Assignments section, you can associate a WLAN assignment to a radio.
•
•
If the controller is in an availability pair, you can apply default WLAN assignments to foreign APs,
by selecting the Apply default WLAN assignments to foreign APs check box. For more
information, see Availability on page 537.
To associate a WLAN Service in the list to a radio and or a client port, select the check box
matching the radio and or port for the selected WLAN.
• One WLAN can be assigned per port. The assignment enables the port.
• Wireless and wired users associated to the same WLAN service receive identical service. They
are affected by the same policies and ﬁlters.
Note
Airtime % is available for AP38xx and AP39xx access point models that are assigned
WLANS conﬁgured with Reserved Airtime.
5 Click Save Settings.
ft
ra
Related Links
Conﬁguring Airtime Fairness: Reservation Mode on page 406
Conﬁguring AP3917 Default AP Settings
To conﬁgure AP3917 default AP settings:
1 From the top menu, click AP.
2 In the left pane, click Global > Default Settings.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
136
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
3 Click the AP3917 FCC tab.
ra
Figure 17: AP3917 Default Settings
4 Conﬁgure the following Default AP Settings as required:
•
•
•
AP Properties
Radio Settings
Advanced Settings
ft
For detailed information, see AP Default Settings on page 148.
5 Click Save Settings.
Conﬁguring AP3916 Default AP Settings
To conﬁgure AP3916 default AP settings:
1 From the top menu, click AP.
2 In the left pane, click Global > Default Settings.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
137
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
3 Click the AP3916 ROW tab.
af
Figure 18: AP3916 Default Settings
4 Conﬁgure the following Default AP Settings as required:
•
•
•
AP Properties
Radio Settings
Advanced Settings
For detailed information, see AP Default Settings on page 148.
5 Click Save Settings.
Conﬁguring AP3915 Default AP Settings
To conﬁgure AP3915 default AP settings:
1 From the top menu, click AP.
2 In the left pane, click Global > Default Settings.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
138
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
3 Click the AP3915 FCC tab.
ra
Figure 19: AP3915 Default Settings
4 Conﬁgure the following Default AP Settings as required:
AP Properties
Radio Settings
Advanced Settings
ft
•
•
•
For detailed information, see AP Default Settings on page 148.
5 Click Save Settings.
Conﬁguring AP3912 Default AP Settings
To conﬁgure AP3912 default AP settings:
1 From the top menu, click AP.
2 In the left pane, click Global > Default Settings.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
139
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
3 Click the AP3912 FCC tab.
ft
Figure 20: AP3912 Default Settings
4 Conﬁgure the following Default AP Settings as required:
•
•
•
AP Properties
Radio Settings
Advanced Settings
For detailed information, see AP Default Settings on page 148.
5 Click Save Settings.
Conﬁguring AP3935 Default AP Settings
ExtremeWireless 10.01 associates the license key to a speciﬁc Wireless Controller, and each license key
applies to a speciﬁc regulatory domain (FCC or ROW). The FCC domain operates in the United States,
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
140
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
Colombia and Puerto Rico. The ROW domain operates outside these countries. The AP3935 can be
licensed to operate within an FCC or ROW regulatory domain.
To conﬁgure AP3935 default AP settings:
1 From the top menu, click AP.
2 In the left pane, click Global > Default Settings.
3 Click the AP3935 FCC tab.
ft
Figure 21: AP3935 FCC Default Settings
4 Conﬁgure the following Default AP Settings as required:
•
•
•
AP Properties
Radio Settings
Advanced Settings
For detailed information, see AP Default Settings on page 148.
5 To save your changes, click Save Settings.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
141
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
Conﬁguring AP3965 Default AP Settings
ExtremeWireless 10.01 associates the license key to a speciﬁc Wireless Controller, and each license key
applies to a speciﬁc regulatory domain (FCC or ROW). The FCC domain operates in the United States,
Colombia and Puerto Rico. The ROW domain operates outside these countries. The AP3965 can be
licensed to operate within an FCC or ROW regulatory domain.
To conﬁgure AP3965 default AP settings:
1 From the top menu, click AP.
2 In the left pane, click Global > Default Settings.
3 Click the AP3965 FCC tab.
Figure 22: AP3965 FCC Default Settings
4 Conﬁgure the following Default AP Settings as required:
•
•
•
AP Properties
Radio Settings
Advanced Settings
For detailed information, see AP Default Settings on page 148.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
142
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
5 To save your changes, click Save Settings.
Conﬁguring AP38xx Default AP Settings
To conﬁgure AP38xx default AP settings:
From the top menu, click AP.
2 In the left pane, click Global > Default Settings.
3 Click the AP38xx tab.
ft
Figure 23: AP38xx Default Settings
4 Conﬁgure the following Default AP Settings as required:
•
•
•
AP Properties
Radio Settings
Advanced Settings
For detailed information, see AP Default Settings on page 148.
5 To save your changes, click Save Settings.
Conﬁguring AP3801 Default AP Settings
To conﬁgure AP3801 default AP settings:
From the top menu, click AP.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
143
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
2 In the left pane, click Global > Default Settings.
3 Click the AP3801 tab.
ra
Figure 24: AP3801 Default Settings
4 Conﬁgure the following Default AP Settings as required:
AP Properties
Radio Settings
Advanced Settings
ft
•
•
•
For detailed information, see AP Default Settings on page 148.
5 To save your changes, click Save Settings.
Conﬁguring AP3805 Default AP Settings
To conﬁgure AP3805 default AP settings:
1 From the top menu, click AP.
2 In the left pane, click Global > Default Settings.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
144
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
3 Click the AP3805 ROW tab.
ra
Figure 25: AP3805 Default Settings
4 Conﬁgure the following Default AP Settings as required:
•
•
•
AP Properties
Radio Settings
Advanced Settings
ft
For detailed information, see AP Default Settings on page 148.
5 To save your changes, click Save Settings.
Conﬁguring AP37xx Dual Band Default Settings
This AP37xx proﬁle supports two concurrent Wi-Fi radios (2.4 GHz and 5 GHz). To conﬁgure AP37xx
default AP settings:
1 From the top menu, click AP.
2 In the left pane, click Global > Default Settings.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
145
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
3 Click the AP37xx tab.
ra
Figure 26: AP37xx Default Settings
4 Conﬁgure the following Default AP Settings as required:
•
•
•
AP Properties
Radio Settings
Advanced Settings
ft
For detailed information, see AP Default Settings on page 148.
5 Click Save Settings.
Conﬁguring AP37xx, W78xC Default AP Settings
To conﬁgure AP37xx, W78xC default AP settings:
1 From the top menu, click AP.
2 In the left pane, click Global > Default Settings.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
146
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
3 Click the AP37xx W78xC tab.
ra
Figure 27: AP37xx W78xC Default Settings
4 Conﬁgure the following Default AP Settings as required:
AP Properties
Radio Settings
Advanced Settings
ft
•
•
•
For detailed information, see AP Default Settings on page 148.
5 Click Save Settings.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
147
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
AP Default Settings
Table 14: AP Default Settings
Field
Description
AP Properties
Determines if the AP broadcasts LLDP information. This option is
disabled by default.
If SNMP is enabled on the controller and you enable LLDP, the LLDP
Conﬁrmation dialog is displayed.
Select one of the following:
• Proceed (not recommended) — Enables LLDP and keeps SNMP
(Simple Network Management Protocol) running.
• Disable SNMP publishing, and proceed — Enables LLDP and
disables SNMP.
• For more information on using SNMP, see the Extreme Networks
ExtremeWireless Maintenance Guide
Announcement Interval
Determines how often the AP advertises its information by sending a
new LLDP (Link Layer Discovery Protocol) packet when LLDP is
enabled. This value is measured in seconds. If there are no changes to
the AP conﬁguration that impact the LLDP information, the AP sends
a new LLDP packet according to this schedule.
ft
ra
LLDP
Note: Announcement Interval is not applicable on all AP models.
Announcement Delay
Determines the length of time that delays the new packet delivery. The
announcement delay helps minimize LLDP (Link Layer Discovery
Protocol) packet traffic when LLDP is enabled. This value is measured
in seconds. If a change to the AP conﬁguration occurs which impacts
the LLDP information, the AP sends an updated LLDP packet.
Note: Announcement Delay is not applicable on all AP models.
Time to Live
Determines the lifespan of the LLDP (Link Layer Discovery Protocol)
packet. The Time to Live value is calculated as four times the
Announcement Interval value. It cannot be directly edited.
Note: Time to Live is not applicable on all AP models.
Country
Select the country of operation.
Radio Settings (Radio 1 and Radio 2)
Admin mode
Select On to enable this radio; Select Off to disable this radio.
Radio mode
Click the radio mode based on the type of AP. For more information
on the available Radio modes, see Conﬁguring Wireless AP Radio
Properties on page 174.
The available radio settings are dependent on the radio mode you
select.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
148
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
Table 14: AP Default Settings (continued)
Description
Channel Width
Click the channel width for the radio:
• 20 MHz — Click to allow 802.11n clients to use the primary channel
(20 MHz) and non-802.11n clients, beacons, and multicasts to use
the 802.11b/g radio protocols.
• 40 MHz — Click to allow 802.11n clients that support the 40 MHz
frequency to use 40 MHz, 20 MHz, or the 802.11b/g radio protocols.
802.11n clients that do not support the 40 MHz frequency can use
20 MHz or the 802.11b/g radio protocols and non-802.11n clients,
beacons, and multicasts use the 802.11b/g radio protocols.
• 80 MHz — Click to allow 802.11ac clients to use the 80MHz
frequency. Applies to AP38xx and AP39xx Radio 1 only.
• Auto — Click to automatically switch between 20 MHz, 40 MHz,
and 80 MHz channel widths, depending on how busy the extension
channels are.
RF Domain
Uniquely deﬁnes a group of APs that cooperate in managing RF
channels and transmission power levels. The maximum length of the
string is 16 characters.
ft
ra
Field
Auto Tx Power Ctrl (ATPC)
Determines if the AP will automatically adapt transmission power
signals. Click to either enable or disable ATPC from the Auto Tx Power
Ctrl drop-down list. ATPC automatically adapts transmission power
signals according to the coverage provided by the AP. After a period of
time, the system stabilizes itself based on the RF coverage of your
Wireless APs.
Note: When enabled, Min Tx Power and Auto Tx Power Ctrl Adjust
parameters can be edited, and the ATPC algorithm will adjust the AP
power between Max Tx power and Min Tx Power. When disabled, the
Max Tx Power selected value or the largest value in the compliance
table will be the power level used by the radio, whichever is smaller.
Max Tx Power
Click the appropriate Tx power level from the Max TX Power dropdown list. The values in the Max TX Power drop-down are in dBm and
will vary by AP. The values are governed by compliance requirements
based on the country, radio, and antenna selected. Changing this value
below the current Min Tx Power value will change the Min Tx Power to
a level lower than the selected Max TX Power.
Note: If Auto Tx Power Ctrl (ATPC) is disabled, the selected value or
the largest value in the compliance table will be the power level used
by the radio, whichever is smaller.
Min Tx Power
If ATPC is enabled, select the minimum Tx power level that is equal or
lower than the maximum Tx power level. We recommend that you use
the lowest supported value if you do not want to limit the potential Tx
power level range that can be used.
Note: The Min Tx Power setting cannot be set higher than the Max Tx
Power setting.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
149
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
Table 14: AP Default Settings (continued)
Field
Description
Auto Tx Power Ctrl Adjust
The Auto Tx Power Ctrl Adj parameter is a correction parameter that
allows you to manually adjust (up or down) the Tx Power calculated by
the ATPC algorithm. If ATPC is enabled, click the Tx power level that
can be used to adjust the ATPC power levels that the system has
assigned. Extreme Networks recommends that use 0 dB during your
initial conﬁguration. If you have an RF plan that recommends Tx power
levels for each AP, compare the actual Tx power levels your system has
assigned against the recommended values your RF plan has provided.
Use the Auto Tx Power Ctrl Adjust value to achieve the recommended
values. Valid range is from -(Max Tx Power - Min Tx Power) dB to (Max
Tx Power - Min Tx Power) dB.
ft
ra
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
150
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
Table 14: AP Default Settings (continued)
Description
Channel Plan
If ACS is enabled you can deﬁne a channel plan for the AP. Deﬁning a
channel plan allows you to control which channels are available for use
during an ACS scan. For example, you may want to avoid using
speciﬁc channels because of low power, regulatory domain, or radar
interference.
• For 5 GHz Radio nodes, click one of the following:
• All channels — ACS scans all channels for an operating channel
and, when ACS is triggered, the optimal channel is selected
from all available channels.
• All Non-DFS Channels — ACS scans all non-DFS channels for
an operating channel. With ACS, the AP selects the best nonDFS channel.
• Custom — To conﬁgure individual channels from which the ACS
selects an operating channel, click Conﬁgure. The Custom
Channel Plan dialog displays. By default, all channels
participate in the channel plan. Click the individual channels
you want to include in the channel plan. To select contiguous
channels, use the Shift key. To select multiple, non-contiguous
channels in the list, use the CTRL key. Click OK to save the
conﬁguration.
• All channels including weather radar — ACS selects the best
channel from the available channels list. Selected channel may
be DFS, weather-radar DFS or non-DFS. Weather-radar
channels are approved for selected AP models in selected
countries. Consult the compliance information for the selected
AP.
The weather channel includes 5600-5650MHz sub-bands
and requires a listening period before the AP can provide
wireless service. During the listening period, the Current
Channel ﬁeld for DFS channels displays the value DFS
Timeout, and the weather channel ﬁelds display DFS
Timeout . In Europe, the listening period can be up to 10
minutes. In the U.S., this period is 1 minute.
• For 2.4 GHz Radio nodes, click one of the following:
• 3 Channel Plan — ACS scans the following channels: 1, 6, and 11
in North America, and 1, 7, and 13 in the rest of the world.
• 4 Channel Plan — ACS scans the following channels: 1, 4, 7, and
11 in North America, and 1, 5, 9, and 13 in the rest of the world.
• Auto — ACS scans the default channel plan channels: 1, 6, and
11 in North America, and 1, 5, 9, and 13 in the rest of the world.
• Custom — If you want to conﬁgure individual channels from
which the ACS selects an operating channel, click Conﬁgure.
The Add Channels dialog is displayed. Click the individual
channels you want to add to the channel plan while pressing
the CTRL key, and then click OK.
ft
ra
Field
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
151
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
Table 14: AP Default Settings (continued)
Field
Description
Antenna Selection
Antenna Selection — Click the antenna, or antenna combination, you
want to conﬁgure on this radio.
When you conﬁgure 11n Wireless APs to use speciﬁc antennas, the
transmission power is recalculated; the Current Tx Power Level value
for the radio is automatically adjusted to reﬂect the recent antenna
conﬁguration. It takes approximately 30 seconds for the change to the
Current Tx Power Level value to be reﬂected in the ExtremeWireless
Assistant. Also, the radio is reset causing client connections on this
radio to be lost.
Note: Antenna Selection is not applicable on all AP models.
Advanced dialog – AP Properties
Poll Timeout
Type the timeout value, in seconds. The AP uses this value to trigger
re-establishing the link with the controller if the AP does not get an
answer to its polling. The default value is 10 seconds.
ft
ra
Note: If you are conﬁguring session availability, the Poll Timeout value
should be 1.5 to 2 times of Detect link failure value on AP Properties
screen. For more information, see Session Availability on page 545.
Secure Tunnel
This feature, when enabled, provides encryption, authentication, and
key management between the AP and/or controllers.
Select the desired Secure Tunnel mode from the drop-down list:
• Disabled — Secure Tunnel is turned off and no traffic is encrypted.
All SFTP/SSH/TFTP traffic works normally.
• Encrypt control traffic between AP & Controller — An IPSEC tunnel
is established from the AP to the controller and all SFTP/SSH/
TFTP/WASSP control traffic is encrypted. The AP skips the
registration and authentication phases and when selected, the
Secure Tunnel Lifetime feature can be conﬁgured.
• Encrypt control and data traffic between AP & Controller — This
mode only beneﬁts routed/bridged@Controller Topologies. An
IPSEC tunnel is established from the AP to the controller and all
SFTP/SSH/TFTP/WASSP control and data traffic is encrypted. The
AP skips the registration and authentication phases, and when
selected, the Secure Tunnel Lifetime feature can be conﬁgured.
Note: This option is not available for AP3805 models.
•
Debug mode — An IPSEC tunnel is established from the AP to the
controller, no traffic is encrypted, and all SFTP/SSH/TFTP traffic
works normally. The AP skips the registration and authentication
phases and when selected, the Secure Tunnel Lifetime feature can
be conﬁgured.
Note: Changing a Secure Tunnel mode will automatically disconnect
and reconnect the AP.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
152
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
Table 14: AP Default Settings (continued)
Field
Description
Secure Tunnel Lifetime
Enter an interval (in hours) at which time the keys of the IPSEC tunnel
are renegotiated.
Note: Changing the Secure Tunnel Lifetime setting will not cause any
AP disruption.
Click to Enable or Disable SSH to the AP.
Location-based Service
Click to Enable or Disable location-based service on this AP. Locationbased service allows you to use this AP with an AeroScout or Ekahau
solution.
Maintain client sessions in event of poll
failure
Click to Enable or Disable (using a bridged at AP VNS) the AP remains
active if a link loss with the controller occurs. This option is disabled by
default.
Restart service in the absence of
controller
Click to Enable or Disable (if using a bridged at AP VNS) to ensure the
AP continues providing service if the AP’s connection to the controller
is lost. If this option is enabled, it allows the AP to start a bridged at AP
VNS even in the absence of a controller.
Use broadcast for disassociation
Click to Enable or Disable if you want the AP to use broadcast
disassociation when disconnecting all clients, instead of disassociating
each client one by one. This affects the behavior of the AP under the
following conditions:
• If the AP is preparing to reboot or to enter one of the special
modes (DRM initial channel selection).
• If a BSSID is deactivated or removed on the AP.
ft
ra
Remote Access
This option is disabled by default.
IP Multicast Assembly
Click to Enable or Disable multicast frames assembling for groups of
APs using AP Multi-editing settings (for more information, see AP
Multi-Edit Properties on page 111 ).
Balanced Channel List Power:
This simpliﬁes power settings such that they will function across all
channels in the channel plan.
LED
Select the desired LED pattern from the drop-down list. Options
include: Off, WDS Signal Strength, Identify, and Normal.
Radio Settings
DTIM
Type the desired DTIM (Delivery Traffic Indication Message) period —
the number of beacon intervals between two DTIM beacons. To ensure
the best client power savings, use a large number. Use a small number
to minimize broadcast and multicast delay. The default value is 5.
Beacon Period
Deﬁnes the time, in milliseconds, between beacon transmissions. The
default value is 100 milliseconds.
RST/CTS
Type the packet size threshold, in bytes, above which the packet will
be preceded by an RTS/CTS (Request to Send/Clear to Send)
handshake. The default value is 2346, which means all packets are sent
without RTS/CTS. Reduce this value only if necessary.
Frag. Threshold
Type the fragment size threshold, in bytes, above which the packets
will be fragmented by the AP prior to transmission. The default value is
2346, which means all packets are sent un-fragmented.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
153
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
Table 14: AP Default Settings (continued)
Field
Dynamic Channel Selection
Description
Click one of the following:
Monitor Mode — If traffic or noise levels exceed the conﬁgured
DCS thresholds, an alarm is triggered and an information log is
generated.
• Active Mode — If traffic or noise levels exceed the conﬁgured DCS
thresholds, an alarm is triggered and an information log is
generated. In addition, the AP ceases operating on the current
channel and ACS automatically selects an alternate channel for the
AP to operate on.
•
Type the noise interference level, measured in dBm, after which ACS
scans for a new operating channel for the AP if the threshold is
exceeded.
DCS Channel Occupancy Threshold
Type the channel utilization level, measured as a percentage, after
which ACS scans for a new operating channel for the AP if the
threshold is exceeded.
ft
ra
DCS Noise Threshold
DCS Update Period
Type the time, measured in minutes that determines the period during
which the AP averages the DCS Noise Threshold and DCS Channel
Occupancy Threshold measurements. If either one of these thresholds
is exceeded, then the AP triggers ACS.
DCS Interference Event
(appears if Dynamic Channel Selection is
enabled)
Enable or disable the following DCS Events:
• Bluetooth
• Microwave
• Cordless Phone
• Constant Wave
• Video Bridge
Interference Wait Time
Length of the delay (in seconds) before logging an alarm. Default
setting is 10 seconds.
Preamble
Click a preamble type for 11b-speciﬁc (CCK) rates: Short, or Long. Click
Short if you are sure that there is no 11b APs or client in the vicinity of
this AP. Click Long if compatibility with 11b clients is required.
Protection Rate
Click a protection rate: 1, 2, 5.5, or 11 Mbps. The default and
recommended setting is 11. Only reduce the rate if there are many 11b
clients in the environment or if the deployment has areas with poor
coverage. For example, rates lower than 11 Mbps are required to ensure
coverage.
Protection Mode
Click a protection mode: None, Auto, or Always. The default and
recommended setting is Auto. Click None if 11b APs and clients are not
expected. Click Always if you expect many 11b-only clients.
Protection Type
Click a protection type, CTS Only or RTS CTS, when a 40 MHz or 80
MHz channel is used. This protects high throughput transmissions on
extension channels from interference from non-11n APs and clients.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
154
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
Table 14: AP Default Settings (continued)
Field
Description
Max % of non-unicast traffic per Beacon
period
Enter the maximum percentage of time that the AP transmits nonunicast packets (broadcast and multicast traffic) for each conﬁgured
Beacon Period. For each non-unicast packet transmitted, the system
calculates the airtime used by each packet and drops all packets that
exceed the conﬁgured maximum percentage. By restricting nonunicast traffic, you limit the impact of broadcasts and multicasts on
overall system performance.
Optimized Multicast for power save
Click to optimize for power save.
Adaptable rate for Multicast
Click to enable adaptable rate capabilities.
Multicast to Unicast delivery
Click to set the Multicast to Unicast delivery method from the dropdown list.
Enhanced Rate Control
Min. Basic Rate
ft
ra
For each radio, click the minimum data rate that must be supported by
all stations in a BSS:
• Click 1, 2, 5.5, or 11 Mbps for 11b and 11b+11g modes.
• Click 6, 12, or 24 Mbps for 11g-only mode.
• Click 6, 12, or 24 Mbps for 11a mode.
11n Settings
Protection Mode
Click a protection mode: None, Auto, or Always. The default and
recommended setting is Auto. Click None if 11b APs and clients are not
expected. Click Always if you expect many 11b-only clients.
Protection Type
Click a protection type, CTS Only or RTS CTS, when a 40 MHz channel
is used. This protects high throughput transmissions on extension
channels from interference from non-11n APs and clients.
Extension Channel Busy Threshold
Type the extension channel threshold percentage, which if exceeded,
disables transmissions on the extension channel (40 MHz).
Aggregate MSDUs
Click an aggregate MSDU mode: Enabled or Disabled. Aggregate
MSDU increases the maximum frame transmission size.
Aggregate MPDUs
Click an aggregate MPDU mode: Enabled or Disabled. Aggregate
MPDU provides a signiﬁcant improvement in throughput.
Aggregate MPDU Max Length
Type the maximum length of the aggregate MPDU. The value range is
1024-65535 bytes.
Agg. MPDU Max # of Sub-frames
Type the maximum number of sub-frames of the aggregate MPDU.
The value range is 2-64.
ADDBA Support
Click an ADDBA support mode: Enabled or Disabled. ADDBA, or block
acknowledgement, provides acknowledgement of a group of frames
instead of a single frame. ADDBA Support must be enabled if
Aggregate MPDU is enable.
LDPC
Click an LDPC mode: Enabled or Disabled. LDPC increases the
reliability of the transmission resulting in a 2dB increased performance
compared to traditional 11n coding.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
155
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
Table 14: AP Default Settings (continued)
Field
Description
STBC
Click an STBC mode: Enabled or Disabled. STBC is a simple open loop
transmit diversity scheme. When enabled, STBC conﬁguration is 2x1
(two spatial streams combine into one spatial stream). TXBF will
override STBC if both are enabled for single stream rates.
TxBF
Tx Beam Forming is a technique of re-aligning the transmitter
multipath spatial streams phases in order to get better signal-to-noise
ratio on the receiver side. Click a TXBF mode: For the AP37xx and
AP38xx models, valid values are Enabled or Disabled. For the 39xx
APs, this setting is only available on Radio1 and valid values are MUMIMO and Disabled.
Conﬁguring Wireless AP Properties
ft
ra
Wireless APs are added with default settings, which you can adjust and conﬁgure according to your
network requirements. In addition, you can modify the properties and the settings for each radio on the
AP.
You can also locate and select APs in speciﬁc registration states to modify their settings. For example,
this feature is useful when approving pending APs when there are a large number of other APs that are
already registered. On the Access Approval screen, click Pending to select all pending APs, then click
Approve to approve all selected APs.
Conﬁguring AP settings can include the following processes:
•
•
•
Modifying the Status of a Wireless AP on page 156
AP Properties Tab Conﬁguration on page 159
Setting Up the Wireless AP Using Static Conﬁguration on page 199
When conﬁguring APs, you can choose to conﬁgure individual APs or simultaneously conﬁgure a group
of APs. For more information, see AP Multi-Edit Properties on page 111 .
Modifying the Status of a Wireless AP
If during the discovery process, the controller security mode was Allow only approved Wireless APs to
connect, then the status of the AP is Pending. Modify the security mode to Allow all Wireless APs to
connect.
Related Links
Security Mode on page 124
AP Rehoming on page 156
AP Actions on page 128
AP Rehoming
You can balance your AP deployment by switching an AP from local to foreign (and from foreign to
local). The AP will continue providing service without interruption while the APs are redeployed. If the
availability link is down, the conversion will be completed when the link is established.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
156
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
The rehomed AP will establish an active tunnel to the new controller and radio conﬁguration is
preserved once conversion is complete.
•
•
•
WLAN assignments are not affected by rehoming.
WDS and Mesh APs cannot be converted from local to foreign.
A rehomed AP will be removed from load balance groups.
AP Dashboard
ExtremeWireless offers a dashboard of statistical information for each AP in the network. The following
information is displayed for each AP:
•
•
Software version running on the AP
Country
AP Role
ft
ra
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
IP address. Supports both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses.
IoT MAC. Mac address for the Internet of Things enablement. Displays for AP3912 and AP3916 when
IoT is enabled.
Model Number
Number of 802.3 clients (AP3912)
Camera IP (AP3916)
Number of radios
Channel number if applicable
Channel Mode
Power level
The following APs offer integrated BLE/802.15.4 radios: AP3912i , AP3915i/e, AP3916ic, AP3917i/e/k.
AP properties for these access points display the IoT MAC address and channel and the TX Power Level
for the BLE radio when the IoT is enabled.
Figure 28: AP3916 Dashboard with IoT Enabled
The dashboard displays a graphical representation over the last hour for the following:
•
•
•
•
Client count. Associated clients per radio
Devices by Type classiﬁcation
Noise ﬂoor for both bands
Channel utilization for both bands
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
157
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
Clients
ft
Figure 29: AP Dashboard
Displays the number of clients on each radio in 10-minute intervals. Use this information to gain visibility
over time into AP utilization per radio. Details for the AP3912 and AP3916 show the number of 802.3
clients. These are clients that utilize the wired client ports that are available on these AP models.
Devices by Type
Offers visibility into the type of devices connected to your network by percentage. Use this information
to understand the BYOD usage on your network.
Noise (dBm)
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
158
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
Tracks the noise level for each AP radio in 10-minute intervals. Use this information to understand
channel performance over time.
Channel Utilization (%)
Tracks the percentage of traffic on each radio. Use this information to understand channel usage over
time, in 10-minute intervals.
Click Conﬁgure to display conﬁguration options for the AP. For more information, see AP Properties Tab
Conﬁguration on page 159.
Related Links
AP Properties Tab Conﬁguration on page 159
Channel Inspector Report on page 637
AP Properties Tab Conﬁguration
ft
ra
Use the AP Properties tab to view and conﬁgure basic AP properties. Some of the AP properties can be
viewed and conﬁgured via the Advanced dialog.
1 From the top menu, click AP.
2 Click the appropriate wireless AP in the list (not the check box). The AP dashboard displays.
For more information, see AP Dashboard on page 157.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
159
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
3 Click Conﬁgure. The AP Properties tab displays.
ft
Related Links
AP Dashboard on page 157
AP Properties Tab - Basic Settings on page 161
AP Properties Tab - Advanced Settings on page 164
Professional Install Settings on page 166
Assigning Wireless AP Radios to a VNS on page 168
Conﬁguration Parameters for Radio Properties on page 180
Conﬁguring IoT Applications on page 189
Setting Up the Wireless AP Using Static Conﬁguration on page 199
Setting Up 802.1x Authentication for a Wireless AP on page 203
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
160
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
AP Properties Tab - Basic Settings
Description
Serial #
Read-only. Displays a unique identiﬁer (serial number) that is assigned
during the manufacturing process.
Host Name
Read-only. This value, which is based on AP Name, cannot be directly
edited. This value depicts the AP Host-Name value. If the AP Name
value does begin with a number, for example when it is the AP serial
number, the AP model is prepended to the value. This value is used for
tracking purposes on the DHCP server.
Name
The default value of the AP Name is the serial number, but it can be
modiﬁed to any desired AP Name. Supported characters include:
alphanumeric, blank space, hyphen, underscore, and period. Up to 255
characters.
Location
Deﬁne the location of the AP.
When a client roams to an AP with a different location, Area
Notiﬁcation is triggered. The Area Notiﬁcation feature is designed to
track client locations within pre-deﬁned areas using either the Location
Engine (for more information, see Conﬁguring the Location Engine on
page 609) or the AP Location ﬁeld. When the clients change areas, a
notiﬁcation is sent.
Location functionality on the AP is useful when access to Extreme
Management Center OneView is not available.
ft
ra
Field
Zone
Zone is a label that can be sent to a RADIUS server in place of an AP
BSSID in the called-station-id attribute. It can be easier to base
authorization decisions on the zone label rather than on the BSSID.
Each AP can have its own Zone label although it is often useful to
assign the same Zone to multiple APs.
Description
Type comments for the AP.
Topology
Read only. The Topology name with which the AP is registered.
AP Environment
Select — Indoor or Outdoor. This property is available for outdoor APs
only, indicating where the AP is deployed. The Outdoor APs can be
deployed in both indoor and outdoor environments. AP placement
should depend on the country of operation that is selected and the
country regulatory domain requirements for radio emissions. For more
information, see Outdoor Access Point Installation on page 167.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
161
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
Field
Description
Hardware Type
Select the hardware model of this AP from the drop-down menu. With
ExtremeWireless v10.01 each controller is licensed in a speciﬁc domain.
There are three types of domain licenses: FCC, ROW, EGY, and MNT.
The ExtremeWireless user interface reﬂects the domain of the
controller. The following are use cases for each domain:
• A wireless controller with an FCC license can manage AP37xx,
AP38xx, and AP39xx-FCC. These access points can be deployed in
the United States, Puerto Rico, or Colombia.
• A wireless controller with a ROW license can manage AP37xx,
AP38xx, and AP39xx-ROW. These access points can be deployed in
any country except the United States, Puerto Rico, Egypt, or
Colombia.
• A wireless controller with a MNT license can manage only domainlocked access points, which are the AP39xx-FCC and the AP39xxROW only. The AP39xx-FCC must be deployed in the United States,
Puerto Rico, or Colombia. The AP39xx-ROW must be deployed in
any country except the United States, Puerto Rico, Egypt, or
Colombia.
ft
ra
Note: The AP37xx and AP38xx cannot connect to a controller
licensed in the MNT domain.
•
A wireless controller with a EGY license can manage AP37xx,
AP38xx, and AP39xx-EGY.
Application Version
Displays the ExtremeWireless release version.
Status
Approved — Indicates that the AP has received its binding key from the
controller after the discovery process.
If no status is shown, that indicates that the AP has not yet successfully
been approved for access with the secure controller.
You can modify the status of an AP on the Access Approval screen. For
more information, see Modifying the Status of a Wireless AP on page
156.
Active Clients
Displays the number of wireless devices currently associated with the
AP.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
162
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
Field
Description
Role
Displays the role for the AP.
Note: You can only view these options here. You cannot change them.
Options include:
• Traffic Forwarding — Normal Operation. Applies to all APs.
• Guardian — Once the AP is conﬁgured as a Guardian, the AP stops
forwarding traffic and dedicates both radios to threat detection
and countermeasures. For more information, see Conﬁguring an AP
as a Guardian on page 221. The AP can be conﬁgured in one of
three sub-modes:
• Out-of-Service with its radios off
• Providing full bridging functionality without RADAR
• Providing full bridging functionality and In-Service RADAR.
ft
ra
•
For more information, see Conﬁguring a Guardian Scan Proﬁle on
page 577.
AirDefense Sensor — AP39xx integration with the AirDefense
Services Platform (ADSP). Alternative to the Guardian AP
conﬁguration. For more information, see Conﬁguring an AirDefense
Proﬁle on page 568.
Country
Click the country of operation.
Note: The antenna you select determines the available channel list and
the maximum transmitting power for the country in which the AP is
deployed.
Related Links
AP Properties Tab - Advanced Settings on page 164
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
163
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
AP Properties Tab - Advanced Settings
Field
Description
Poll Timeout
Type the timeout value, in seconds. The AP uses this value to trigger reestablishing the link with the Controller if the AP does not get an answer to
its polling. The default value is 10 seconds.
Note: If you are conﬁguring session availability, the Poll Timeout value
should be 1.5 to 2 times of Detect link failure value on AP Properties screen.
For more information, see Session Availability on page 545.
Secure Tunnel
ft
ra
This feature, when enabled, provides encryption, authentication, and key
management between the AP and/or controllers.
Select the desired Secure Tunnel mode from the drop-down list:
• Disabled — Secure Tunnel is turned off and no traffic is encrypted. All
SFTP/SSH/TFTP traffic works normally.
• Encrypt control traffic between AP & Controller — An IPSEC tunnel is
established from the AP to the controller and all SFTP/SSH/TFTP/
WASSP control traffic is encrypted. The AP skips the registration and
authentication phases and when selected, the Secure Tunnel Lifetime
feature can be conﬁgured.
• Encrypt control and data traffic between AP & Controller — This mode
only beneﬁts routed/bridged@Controller Topologies. An IPSEC tunnel
is established from the AP to the controller and all SFTP/SSH/TFTP/
WASSP control and data traffic is encrypted. The AP skips the
registration and authentication phases, and when selected, the Secure
Tunnel Lifetime feature can be conﬁgured.
Note: This option is not available for AP3805 models.
•
Debug mode — An IPSEC tunnel is established from the AP to the
controller, no traffic is encrypted, and all SFTP/SSH/TFTP traffic works
normally. The AP skips the registration and authentication phases and
when selected, the Secure Tunnel Lifetime feature can be conﬁgured.
Note: Changing a Secure Tunnel mode will automatically disconnect and
reconnect the AP.
Secure Tunnel Lifetime
Available when Secure Tunnel is enabled. Enter an interval (in hours) at
which time the keys of the IPSEC tunnel are renegotiated.
Note: Changing the Secure Tunnel Lifetime setting will not cause any AP
disruption.
Enable SSH Access
Click to enable or disable SSH for access to the AP.
Enable location-based-service
Enable or disable the AeroScout, Ekahau, or Centrak location-based service
for the AP.
Maintain client session in event of
poll failure
Select this option (if using a bridged at AP VNS) if the AP should remain
active if a link loss with the controller occurs. This option is enabled by
default.
Restart service in the absence of
controller
Select this option (if using a bridged at AP VNS) to ensure the AP’s radios
continue providing service if the AP’s connection to the controller is lost. If
this option is enabled, it allows the AP to start a bridged at AP VNS even in
the absence of a controller.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
164
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
Field
Description
Use broadcast for disassociation
Select this option if you want the AP to use broadcast disassociation when
disconnecting all clients, instead of disassociating each client one by one.
This affects the behavior of the AP under the following conditions:
• If the AP is preparing to reboot or to enter one of the special modes
(DRM initial channel selection).
If
• a BSSID is deactivated or removed on the AP.
This option is disabled by default.
Enable LLDP
ft
ra
Click to enable or disable the AP from broadcasting LLDP information. This
option is disabled by default.
If SNMP is enabled on the controller and you enable LLDP, the LLDP
Conﬁrmation dialog is displayed.
Select one of the following:
• Proceed (not recommended) — Select this option to enable LLDP and
keep SNMP running, and then click OK.
• Disable SNMP publishing, and proceed — Select this option to enable
LLDP and disable SNMP, and then click OK.
For
more information on enabling SNMP, see the ExtremeWireless
•
Maintenance Guide.
Announcement Interval
If LLDP is enabled, type how often the AP advertises its information by
sending a new LLDP packet. This value is measured in seconds.
If there are no changes to the AP conﬁguration that impact the LLDP
information, the AP sends a new LLDP packet according to this schedule.
Note: The Time to Live value cannot be directly edited. The Time to Live
value is calculated as four times the Announcement Interval value.
Announcement Delay
If LLDP is enabled, type the announcement delay. This value is measured in
seconds. If a change to the AP conﬁguration occurs which impacts the
LLDP information, the AP sends an updated LLDP packet. The
announcement delay is the length of time that delays the new packet
delivery. The announcement delay helps minimize LLDP packet traffic.
IP Multicast Assembly
Click to Enable or Disable IP Multicast Assembly on this Wireless AP. If
Enabled, the IP Multicast Assembly feature assembles multicast data
packets that were too large to ﬁt the MTU size of the tunnel and were
fragmented in order to ﬁt the tunnel header. This feature is disabled by
default.
Active OBSS channel width
adjustment
When enabled, this setting avoids channel overlap by shrinking channels,
when ACS detects an overlapping BSS.
Before a radio provides service, it performs an overlapping BSS coexistence
scan to ensure that the radio's channel will not overlap with a nearby
operating AP's secondary channels. This behavior is in accordance with the
802.11 standard and provides data to the Channel Inspector Report.
If the channel width is set to 40 or 80 MHz and an overlap is detected, ACS
shrinks the channel to 20 or 40MHz to avoid the overlap.
When this setting is disabled, the radio starts the service in spite of the
overlap.
By default, this option is enabled for newly deployed APs and is disabled
for existing AP deployments, ensuring backward compatibility with
previous ExtremeWireless releases.
Balanced Channel List Power
This simpliﬁes power settings such that they will function across all
channels in the channel plan.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
165
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
Field
Description
Low Power Mode Override
Check this box to have AP ALWAYS operate in 4x4 mode regardless of
what was negotiated with the Switch PoE. When this option is cleared, the
AP operates in 2x2 or 4x4 depending on what was negotiated with the
Switch PoE using the 2-event classiﬁcation.
• AP sends Power Status element with "Power Mode" set to 0 when "Low
Power Mode Override" is enabled.
• AP sends Critical Log "entering Low Power mode" only if negotiated .af
with Switch PoE and "Low Power Mode Override" is disabled.
Otherwise, Critical Log is not sent.
• Controller "Network Health" shows only APs that have "Power Mode"
bit in the Power Status set to 1.
The default conﬁguration for the 39xx AP is disabled.
Select the desired LED pattern from the drop-down list. Options include:
Off, WDS Signal Strength, Identify, and Normal.
Real Capture
Click Start to start real capture server on the AP. Default capture server
timeout is set to 300 seconds and the maximum conﬁgurable timeout is 1
hour. While the capture session is active, the AP interface operates in
promiscuous mode.
From the Wireshark GUI, set the capture interface to the IP address of the
selected AP, and select null authentication. Once Wireshark connects to
the AP, the AP's interfaces are listed as available to capture traffic. eth0 is
the wired interface, wlan0 is the 5Ghz interface, and wlan1 is the 2.4Ghz
interface. You can capture bidirectional traffic on eth0, wiﬁ0, and wiﬁ1. The
capture on wiﬁ0 and wiﬁ1 does not include internally generated hardware
packets by the capturing AP.
The capturing AP does not report its own Beacons, Retransmission, Ack
and 11n Block Ack. If this information is needed, perform Real Capture from
a second AP that is close by. Make sure both APs are on the same wireless
channel. Broadcast an SSID to activate the radios, but do not broadcast the
SSID of the AP you are troubleshooting. You do not want the clients to
connect to the second capturing AP.
Capture statistics are found on the Active Wireless APs report (see Viewing
Statistics for APs on page 627).
ft
ra
LED
Related Links
AP Properties Tab - Basic Settings on page 161
Professional Install Settings
The Professional Install option is only available for AP models with external antennas. The ﬁelds and
corresponding antenna value options that appear on the Professional Install dialog depend on the
selected AP and the antenna models that are available. Select an antenna for each available port. By
default, the two antennas must be identical. However, you have the option to select No Antenna for the
second antenna port. The AP3915e and AP3917e access point models offer an external IoT antenna.
Select the antenna model from the drop-down ﬁeld. Choose the desired attenuation for each radio from
the drop-down list. Selectable range is from 0 to 30 dBI.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
166
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
Figure 30: Professional Install dialog AP3917
ft
ra
Outdoor Access Point Installation
The FCC regulations for the indoor and outdoor installation are different. The professional installer must
conﬁgure the access point transmitters accordingly. Products that are speciﬁcally intended to be placed
outdoors are conﬁgured at the factory for compliant outdoor operation. Professional installers should
review the following to assess the legality of outdoor deployments:
•
•
•
When a transmitter is placed indoors but the antenna is placed outdoors, the FCC interprets this as
an outdoor installation.
When a transmitter is placed indoors and the antenna is oriented to intentionally radiate outdoors,
the FCC interprets this as an outdoor installation.
When the transmitter is placed on a loading dock or inside a covered stadium with a retractable
cover, the FCC views this as an outdoor installation.
Antenna Gain
Antenna gain is the ratio of an antenna's radiation intensity in a given direction to the intensity
produced by a no-loss, isotropic antenna radiating equally in all directions. An antenna's gain along the
horizon and at an elevation of 30 degree may vary. The elevation gain is deﬁned as the maximum
antenna gain at 30 to 150 degrees above the horizon. If elevation gain is conﬁgured, the transmit (TX)
power calculations maximize the allowable TX power for an elevation below 30 degree.
Access Points must conform to U.S. Federal Communications Commission's (FCC) limitations. FCC has
now stipulated a 21dBm Effective Isotropic Radiated Power (EIRP) limit for power directed 30 degrees
above the horizon. For Extreme Networks -supplied antennas, compatible with 5.0 GHz on the access
point, refer to the Antenna Guide for Elevation Gain information. If using a third-party antenna, you
must obtain the antenna-elevation gain information from the antenna manufacturer.
The elevation gain should be conﬁgured if the access point:
•
Is deployed outdoors, and
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
167
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
•
•
Is used with a dipole antenna (Panel antennas and polarized antennas are for point to point only and
are excluded from this requirement.) and
Is transmitting in the 5.15 - 5.25 GHz Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure-1 (UNII-1) band.
Professional installers must complete the following steps to ensure compliance with the FCC rule:
Note
ExtremeWireless determines the antenna peak gain and elevation gain based on the user
conﬁgured settings.
1 Conﬁgure the antenna type from the Professional Install dialog.
2 Conﬁgure the antenna placement from the AP Environment ﬁeld on the AP Properties tab.
3 Conﬁgure the Country ﬁeld on the AP Properties tab.
The ﬁrmware uses this information with hardcoded maximum limits (that are determined during
testing) to limit the EIRP below 21dBm for outdoor use in UNII-1 band. For information on speciﬁc
antennas, refer to the ExtremeWireless External Antenna with Wave 2.
ft
ra
Related Links
AP Properties Tab - Basic Settings on page 161
Professional Install Settings on page 166
Outdoor Access Point Installation on page 167
Assigning Wireless AP Radios to a VNS
The following describe methods of assigning AP radios to a VNS:
•
VNS conﬁguration — When a VNS is conﬁgured, you can assign AP radios to the VNS through its
associated WLAN Service. For more information, see Conﬁguring WLAN Services on page 318.
Note
To conﬁgure foreign AP radios to a VNS, use the VNS conﬁguration method. Foreign APs
are listed and available only for VNS assignment from the WLAN Services tab. For more
information, see Conﬁguring a VNS on page 390.
•
AP Multi-edit — When you conﬁgure multiple APs simultaneously, use the AP Multi-edit feature. For
more information, see AP Multi-Edit Properties on page 111 .
•
Wireless AP conﬁguration — When you conﬁgure an individual AP, assign its radios to a speciﬁc
WLAN Service.
To assign wireless AP radios when conﬁguring an AP:
1 From the top menu, click AP.
2 Click the appropriate AP in the list (not the check box). The AP Details dialog is displayed.
3 Click Conﬁgure.
The AP Properties tab is displayed.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
168
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
4 Click the WLAN Assignment tab.
ft
Note
Airtime % is available for AP38xx and AP39xx access point models that are assigned
WLANS conﬁgured with Reserved Airtime.
5 In the Radio 1 and Radio 2 columns, select the radio check box that you want to assign for each
WLAN Service.
6 To save your changes, click Apply.
Related Links
Assigning WLAN Services to Client Ports on page 170
AP Properties Tab Conﬁguration on page 159
Conﬁguration Parameters for Radio Properties on page 180
Setting Up 802.1x Authentication for a Wireless AP on page 203
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
169
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
AP Multi-Edit Properties on page 111
Conﬁguring Airtime Fairness: Reservation Mode on page 406
NEW!
Assigning WLAN Services to Client Ports
When conﬁguring client ports on access point models AP391x that offer client ports, you can assign one
or more client ports to a single WLAN service. Client ports offer 802.1x authentication and policy
support.
Note
Network access for the AP3916ic camera function is controlled through policy deﬁnition,
assigned as a the CAM port. The camera port on the AP3916 is treated as a wired client port.
1 From the top menu, click AP.
2 Select a speciﬁc AP.
ft
ra
Port options depend on the AP model you select:
•
•
•
•
AP3912 supports wired client ports 1-3.
AP3916ic supports the wired CAM port for a camera.
AP3917i/e supports 1 client port.
Additionally, all the AP391x models, including AP3915i/e, support IoT Thread Gateway using the
AP as a border gateway router.
The AP Properties dialog appears.
3 Click Conﬁgure.
4 Select the WLAN Assignment tab.
5 Select one or more client ports for each WLAN Service.
All Port Assignments:
•
•
One WLAN can be assigned per port. The assignment enables the port.
Wireless and wired users associated to the same WLAN service receive identical service. They are
affected by the same policies and ﬁlters.
The wired ports for the AP391x default to auto-negotiation for speed and mode. To conﬁgure ﬁxed
speed and mode values (for instance, 100Mbps and Full Duplex), select the Static Conﬁguration tab
and select the speed and mode settings for the Ethernet port and each client port. Conﬁgure the
values that the client hardware supports.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
170
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
ft
Figure 31: Port Conﬁguration for AP3912 Wired Ports
CAM Port Assignments:
• The topology associated with the role that is assigned to the CAM port (either through WLAN
assignment or through device MBA authentication) must be conﬁgured to allow ONVIF camera
discovery and video streaming. Conﬁgure the default topology to explicitly allow multicast
bridging of WS-Discovery group (239.255.255.0).
•
When the camera port is unassigned, it is disabled, and the camera is disconnected from the
network and turned off.
•
One policy deﬁnition for wired and wireless users. Users on wired ports can receive the same
default policy. However, the camera function (CAM) can be assigned a speciﬁc device policy to
separate user service and video surveillance networks.
•
The camera function can be assigned to B@AP and B@AC topologies and Mac Based
Authentication for dynamic policies.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
171
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
•
•
•
Conﬁgure MAC authentication (MBA) for network attached devices or collect device metrics
through RADIUS accounting from the Auth&Acct tab.
WLAN SSID, Privacy, and QoS settings are not relevant for the camera functionality.
Captive Portal and 802.1x are not supported on the CAM port.
Note
Bind the WLAN Service to the VNS to activate service.
af
Figure 32: WLAN Services Port Assignment
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
172
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
ft
ra
Figure 33: Assigning Ports to WLAN Service on the AP3912
Figure 34: Assigning the Camera Port to WLAN Service on the AP3916ic
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
173
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
ft
ra
Figure 35: Assigning the IoT Port to WLAN Service on the AP3915
Related Links
Conﬁguring IoT Applications on page 189
Setting Up the Wireless AP Using Static Conﬁguration on page 199
Conﬁguring Common Conﬁguration Default AP Settings on page 135
Conﬁguring Wireless AP Radio Properties
Wireless AP radio properties can vary depending on the model of the AP being conﬁgured. For speciﬁc
information on modifying a wireless 802.11n AP, see Modifying 11n and 11ac Wireless AP Radio Properties
on page 178.
Dynamic Radio Management (DRM)
Use the Dynamic Radio Management (DRM) controller function to establish the optimum radio
conﬁguration for your APs.
Consider the following deployment methodologies:
•
•
Plan the wireless RF deployment using various site survey methodologies including the
ExtremeCloud RF planner. Conﬁgure each AP’s channel width and channel according to the RF plan.
Use the DRM automatic tool to conﬁgure the deployed AP’s channel width and channel according to
the channel plan.
• Use DRM Auto Channel Selection (ACS) to automatically assign the APs to appropriate channels
and channel width.
• Use Auto Tx Power Control (ATPC) to set transmit power and let the AP dynamically adapt
transmit power.
• Use Dynamic Channel Selection (DCS) to monitor channel occupancy around the APs and
optionally allow the AP to dynamically adapt the channel.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
174
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
The controller’s DRM functionality:
•
•
Adjusts transmit power levels to balance coverage between APs assigned to the same RF domain
and operating on the same channel.
Triggers ACS for all selected APs in the deployment, simultaneously. The APs determine the
deployment density and the optimal channel width for the selected group.
Density deployment is based on the following factors:
• The number of channels conﬁgured in the channel list
• The number of APs that have to be set up
• The number of detected APs that do not belong to the deployment.
Each AP is set to the best available channel. The channel inspector displays the RF environment seen
by each AP. Use the Channel Inspector Report to understand why an AP selects a channel and, if
necessary, to make manual adjustments.
AP39xx and AP38xx perform overlapping BSS (OBSS) scan every time the radio is restarted. This
scan results are used as follows:
ft
ra
• Channel inspector is always updated with the latest RF environment seen by the AP.
• If the channel width is set to 40MHz or 80MHz and the AP property Active OBSS channel width
adjustment is enabled, the AP shrinks its channel to avoid overlapping with other APs detected
in the area. (An OBSS overlap occurs when a primary channel and a secondary channel overlap.)
After the interfering AP is shut down and the AP’s radio is reset, the channel width returns to
40MHz or 80MHz.
Note
When setting a ﬁxed channel width to 40 MHz or 80 MHz, the Active OBSS channel width
adjustment setting must be disabled. This setting is disabled by default for existing APs in
order to maintain existing behavior and the existing channel plan. For APs that are newly
added to the network, this setting is enabled by default.
•
AP39xx and AP38xx return to original channel after a RADAR event in order to restore original
channel plan.
When a RADAR event is detected, the channel is marked and the AP selects a new channel from the
allowed channel list. After 30 minutes, if there are no clients associated with the AP, the AP returns
to the original channel. If there are associated clients, the AP tries to return to the original channel
every ﬁve minutes until there are no clients associated with the radio.
The DRM feature consists of three functions:
Auto Channel Selection (ACS)
ACS provides an easy way to optimize channel arrangement based on the current situation in the ﬁeld.
An optimal solution is provided only if ACS is triggered on all APs in a deployment, or all APs placed in a
distinct area like a ﬂoor. ACS forces the channel width selection of the involved APs to Auto width. The
ACS algorithm selects the optimal channel width for all the selected APs and places each AP on the
best channel available in its area. Use the Channel Inspector Report to visualize why the AP was placed
on the selected channel.
Triggering ACS on a single AP or on a subset of APs can be useful but it is not an optimal solution. The
ACS algorithm places the selected APs as best it can considering the channels occupied by other
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
175
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
operating APs. ACS relies on the RF channel information observed at the time it is triggered. Once an
AP has selected a channel, it remains operating on that channel until you change the channel or trigger
ACS again.
ACS can be triggered by one of the following events:
•
•
A new AP registers with the controller and the AP Default Settings channel is Auto.
A user selects Auto from the Request New Channel drop-down list on the Wireless AP’s radio
conﬁguration tabs.
•
•
•
A user selects Auto from the Channel drop-down list on the AP Multi-edit screen.
If Dynamic Channel Selection (DCS) is enabled in active mode and a DCS threshold is exceeded.
A Wireless AP detects radar on its current operating channel and it employs ACS to select a new
radar free channel. The AP returns to the original channel under the following condition:
• A 30-minute Non-Occupancy timer expired per the DFS standard.
• The AP does not disrupt service to any clients.
•
•
You can initiate ACS from the Channel Inspector Report.
ft
ra
ACS is triggered for Site deployments or Cloud deployments by sending the ACS command to one
of the member APs, which will distribute the ACS command to all other member APs. Each Site is
considered an RF domain.
•
Channel Plan — The ACS algorithm selects channels from the conﬁgured channel plan. You can
deﬁne the channel plan for each AP or accept the default plan. It is recommended that all APs in a
deployment have identical channel plans. Deﬁning a channel plan allows you to limit the available
channels for use during an ACS scan. For example, you may want to avoid using speciﬁc channels
because of allowed power limits on that channel or regulatory domain, or avoid DFS channel RADAR
interference.
•
Multi-Edit — The best way to trigger ACS between multiple APs is to use the AP Multi Edit option.
First, select Radio 1 or Radio 2 actions, and then select Auto Channel Select. APs that conﬁgure ACS
together, must all be part of the same RF domain. Therefore, set the RF Domain before ACS is
started. ACS between multiple APs must start at the same time.
Dynamic Channel Selection (DCS)
DCS allows a Wireless AP to monitor RF channel conditions and noise levels on the channel on which
the AP is currently operating. DCS can operate in the following modes:
•
Monitor — When DCS is enabled in monitor mode the AP monitors channel occupancy and traffic or
noise levels on the channel on which the AP is currently operating. The DCS monitor alarm and
generated stats can be used to evaluate the RF environment of your deployed APs.
•
Active — When DCS is enabled in active mode and channel occupancy traffic or noise levels exceed
the conﬁgured DCS thresholds, ACS is triggered to move the AP from a busy / noisy channel to the
best available channel. Also, an alarm is triggered and an information log is generated.
Note
If DCS is enabled, DCS statistics can be viewed in the Wireless Statistics by Wireless APs
display. For more information, see Working with Reports and Statistics on page 621.
Related Links
AP Properties Tab - Advanced Settings on page 164
Use Cases for Dynamic Radio Management on page 178
Conﬁguration Parameters for Radio Properties on page 180
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
176
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
AP Multi-Edit Properties on page 111
Radio Advanced Properties on page 184
Channel Inspector Report on page 637
ATPC
The purpose of ATPC is to automatically adjust the coverage cell around an AP. During initial
deployment, the Tx Power of each AP is adjusted to provide coverage without overlapping the coverage
cell of a neighboring AP. To maintain optimal performance, it is important to maintain a small cell sizes
to encourage WLAN clients to roam to the closest AP and operate at high data rates. This practice frees
the channel as fast as possible and reduces congestion.
Setting the AP transmit power too high can cause interference and potentially exceed useful bounds.
Setting the AP transmit power too low may introduce coverage gaps in the installation.
ft
ra
ATPC operates over a group of APs conﬁgured to participate in the same RF domain. Conﬁgure the RF
Domain parameter as a unique string across all the APs that provide service coverage, ensuring that
cell shaping is not inﬂuenced by non-participating APs. ATPC operates by periodically broadcasting
custom probe requests that allow the other APs in range to determinate the “RF Distance / Path Loss”
to the sending AP. Every 10 seconds, each AP evaluates the Path Loss to its neighbors. If Path Loss is
less then 70dB, the AP reduces its Tx Power. If the Path Loss is more than 70dB, the AP boosts its Tx
Power.
When all APs are operating, the cells size of each AP is adjusted to cover the surrounding area. If one
AP fails, the APs around it increase their Tx Power, increasing the cell size, and compensating for the
loss of the failed AP. If an RF obstructing object is moved between the APs, the APs increase Tx Power
in order to maintain coverage.
The ATPC feature is conﬁgured for each radio. When you check Auto Tx Power Ctrl (ATPC)
check box, you are enabling the radio to participate in the AP group that collaborates to automatically
adjust the cell size. When ATPC is enabled, the following parameters are available for conﬁguration:
•
•
•
Max Tx Power
Min Tx Power
Auto Tx Power Ctrl Adj
The Max and Min Tx Power parameters set the power range used by the ATPC. The Auto Tx Power Ctrl
Adj parameter allows you to manually adjust the Tx Power calculated by the ATPC algorithm (either up
or down). The Current Tx Power Level ﬁeld on the AP / Radio page displays the actual AP Tx
Power.
ATPC preserving Power Setting — In some cases operators may use ATPC to initially set up the power
setting of the APs over a service area, but then want to “freeze” this setting during normal operation of
the network. When the Auto Tx Power Ctrl (ATPC)check box is cleared you have two choices:
•
•
Maintain the ATPC-acquired Tx Power value after turning ATPC off.
Set the Tx Power to the Max Tx Power value.
The ATPC feature allows you to use ATPC to achieve a Tx Power level required for the installation, and
then statically maintain this value if ATPC is turned off.
Related Links
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
177
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
Conﬁguration Parameters for Radio Properties on page 180
Use Cases for Dynamic Radio Management
The following scenarios outline use cases for Dynamic Radio Management (DRM).
•
Using ACS with a set of APs
When you trigger ACS for a set of APs, the channel width is automatically set to Auto and ACS
determines the deployment density and the desired channel width to minimize co-channel
interference. A channel plan is created with non-overlapping cells, and each AP performs an
overlapping BSS (OBSS) scan to avoid channel overlap.
•
Manually Selecting Channels and Channel Width
ft
ra
When you select a ﬁxed channel and channel width, the AP radio is set to the requested channel and
width. The AP performs an overlapping BSS (OBSS) scan and sends the results to the Channel
Inspector. If the setting Active OBSS channel width adjustment is not enabled, the radio uses the
manually selected channel and width, and the detected overlap is not remedied automatically.
If Active OBSS channel width adjustment is enabled, the detected overlap is corrected by shrinking
the channel width before the radio is enabled. The channel width can recover after a subsequent
radio reset if the OBSS scan does not detect another channel overlap.
Modifying 11n and 11ac Wireless AP Radio Properties
The ExtremeWireless 37xx/W78xC series are 802.11n-compliant access points. AP38xx and AP39xx
series are 11n and 11ac-compliant. This section describes how to conﬁgure/modify properties of an 11n or
11ac AP.
Channel Bonding
Channel bonding improves the effective throughput of the wireless LAN. In contrast to legacy APs
which use radio channel spacings that are only 20 MHz wide, 11n wireless APs can use two channels at
the same time to create a 40 MHz wide channel. 11ac wireless APs can use four channels at the same
time to create an 80 MHz wide channel.
The 40 MHz channel width is achieved by bonding the primary channel (20 MHz) with an extension
channel.
Channel bonding is predeﬁned on both Radio 1 and Radio 2. Channel bonding is enabled by selecting
the Channel Width on the Radio tabs. When selecting Channel Width, the following options are
available:
•
•
20 MHz — Channel bonding is not enabled:
• 802.11n clients use the primary channel (20 MHz)
• Non-802.11n clients, as well as beacons and multicasts, use the 802.11a/b/g radio protocols.
40 MHz — Channel bonding is enabled:
• 802.11n clients that support the 40 MHz channel width can use 40 MHz, 20 MHz, or the
802.11a/b/g radio protocols.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
178
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
• 802.11n clients that do not support the 40 MHz channel width can use 20 MHz or the 802.11a/b/g
•
radio protocols.
• Non-802.11n clients, beacons, and multicasts use the 802.11a/b/g radio protocols.
80 MHz — Channel bonding is enabled:
• 802.11ac clients that support the 80 MHz channel width can use 80 MHz, 40 MHz, 20 MHz, or the
802.11a/b/g radio protocols.
• 802.11n clients that do not support the 80 MHz channel width can use 20 MHz, 40 MHz, or the
802.11a/b/g radio protocols.
• Non-802.11n clients, beacons, and multicasts use the 802.11a/b/g radio protocols.
•
Auto — Channel bonding is automatically enabled or disabled, switching between 20 MHz, 40 MHz,
and 80 MHz, depending on how busy the extension channel(s) are. If the extension channel is busy
above a prescribed threshold percentage, which is deﬁned in the 40 MHz Channel Busy Threshold
box, channel bonding is disabled.
Channel Selection — Primary and Extension
ft
ra
The primary channel of the wireless 802.11n AP is selected from the Request New Channel drop-down
list. If auto is selected, the ACS feature selects the primary channel. The channels in the Request New
Channel drop-down list show which extension channel(s) are being used for bonding.
Guard Interval
The guard intervals ensure that individual transmissions do not interfere with one another. The wireless
802.11n AP provides a shorter guard interval that increases the channel throughput. You can select the
guard interval to improve the channel efficiency. The guard interval is selected from the Guard Interval
drop-down list. Longer guard periods reduce the channel efficiency.
Aggregate MSDU and MPDU
The wireless 802.11n AP provides aggregate Mac Service Data Unit (MSDU) and aggregate Mac Protocol
Data Unit (MPDU) functions, which combine multiple frames together into one larger frame for a single
delivery. This aggregation reduces the overhead of the transmission and results in increased throughput.
The aggregate methods are enabled and deﬁned selected from the Aggregate MSDUs and Aggregate
MPDUs drop-down lists.
Antenna Selection
Wireless APs have differing numbers of antennas, internal or external, depending on the AP model.
Wireless APs by default transmit on all antennas. Depending on your deployment requirements, you can
conﬁgure the AP to transmit on speciﬁc antennas. You can conﬁgure the wireless 802.11ac AP to
transmit on speciﬁc antennas for both radios, including all the available modes:
•
•
Radio 1 — a/n/ac, ac-strict modes
Radio 2 — b/g, g/n, b/g/n, n-strict modes
When you conﬁgure the AP to use speciﬁc antennas, the following occurs:
•
Transmission power is recalculated — The Current Tx Power Level value for the radio is
automatically adjusted to reﬂect the recent antenna conﬁguration. It takes approximately 30
seconds for the change to the Current Tx Power Level value to be reﬂected in the Wireless
Assistant.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
179
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
•
Radio is reset — The radio is reset causing client connections on this radio to be lost.
To modify wireless AP radio properties:
1 From the top menu, click AP.
2 Click the appropriate wireless AP in the list (not the check box). The AP dashboard displays.
3 Click Conﬁgure. The AP Properties tab displays.
4 Click the Radio tab you want to modify.
Conﬁguration Parameters for Radio Properties
Table 15: Radio Properties
Field
Description
Base Settings
BSS Info
ft
ra
BSS Info is read-only. After WLAN Service conﬁguration, the Basic
Service Set (BSS) section displays the MAC address on the AP for each
WLAN Service and the SSIDs of the WLAN Services to which this radio
has been assigned.
Admin Mode
Radio Mode - Radio 1
Select On to enable the radio; select Off to disable the radio.
Note: Depending on the radio modes you select, some of the radio
settings may not be available for conﬁguration. The AP hardware
version dictates the available radio modes.
Click one of the following radio options for Radio 1:
• a — Click to enable the 802.11a mode of Radio 1 without 802.11n
capability.
• a/n — Click to enable the 802.11a mode of Radio 1 with 802.11n
capability.
• a/n/ac — Click to enable the 802.11ac mode of Radio 1 with
802.11ac capability.
• ac-strict — Click to enable the 802.11ac mode of Radio 1 with
802.ac strict capability.
• n-strict — Click to enable the 802.11a mode of Radio 1 with 802.11n
strict capability.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
180
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
Table 15: Radio Properties (continued)
Field
Radio Mode - Radio 2
Description
Note: Depending on the radio modes you select, some of the radio
settings may not be available for conﬁguration.
ft
ra
Click one of the following radio options for Radio 2:
• b — Click to enable the 802.11b-only mode of Radio 2. If selected,
the AP uses only 11b (CCK) rates with all associated clients.
• — Click to enable the 802.11g-only mode of Radio 2.
• b/g — Click to enable both the 802.11g mode and the 802.11b mode
of Radio 2. If selected, the AP uses 11b (CCK) and 11g-speciﬁc
(OFDM) rates with all of the associated clients and will not transmit
or receive 11n rates.
• g/n — Click to enable both the 802.11g mode and the 802.11nb
mode of Radio 2. If selected, the AP uses 11n and 11g-speciﬁc
(OFDM) rates with all of the associated clients. The AP will not
transmit or receive 11b rates.
• b/g/n — Click to enable b/g/n modes of Radio 2. If selected, the
AP uses all available 11b, 11g, and 11n rates.
• n-strict — Click to enable the 802.11n-strict mode of Radio 2. If
selected, the AP can be conﬁgured to use 11n-strict rates with all of
the associated clients. With n-strict mode enabled, the AP does
not transmit or receive 11b or 11g rates.
Basic Radio Settings
RF Domain
Type a string that uniquely identiﬁes a group of APs that cooperate in
managing RF channels and transmission power levels. The maximum
length of the string is 16 characters. The RF Domain is used to identify
a group of APs. The RF Domain feature is part of the Auto Tx Power
Control (ATPC) feature (for more information, see Conﬁguring
Wireless AP Radio Properties on page 174).
Current Channel
Read-only. The actual channel the ACS has assigned to the AP radio.
The Current Channel value and the Last Requested Channel value may
be different because the ACS automatically assigns the best available
channel to the AP, ensuring that a AP’s radio is always operating on
the best available channel.
Last Requested Channel
Read-only. The last wireless channel that you had selected to
communicate with the wireless devices.
Request New Channel
Click the wireless channel you want the wireless AP to use to
communicate with wireless devices.
Weather channels (116, 120, 124, 128) are supported for European
compliance. See Channel Plan.
Click Auto to request the ACS to search for a new channel for the AP,
using a channel selection algorithm. This forces the AP to go through
the auto-channel selection process again.
Note: ACS in the 2.4 GHz radio band with 40 MHz channels is not
recommended due to severe co-channel interference.
Depending on the regulatory domain (based on country), some
channels may be restricted. The default value is based on North
America. For more information, refer to the appropriate AP Installation
Guide.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
181
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
Table 15: Radio Properties (continued)
Field
Description
Auto Tx Power Ctrl (ATPC)
Click to either enable or disable ATPC from the Auto Tx Power Ctrl
drop-down list. ATPC automatically adapts transmission power signals
according to the coverage provided by the AP. After a period of time,
the system stabilizes itself based on the RF coverage of your Wireless
APs.
Note: When enabled, Min Tx Power and Auto Tx Power Ctrl Adjust
parameters can be edited, and the ATPC algorithm will adjust the AP
power between Max Tx power and Min Tx Power. When disabled, the
Max Tx Power selected value or the largest value in the compliance
table will be the power level used by the radio, whichever is smaller.
The actual Tx power level used by the AP radio.
Max Tx Power
Displays dynamic power level based on channel selected. Select the
Max TX Power from the drop-down list. The values in the Max TX
Power drop-down are in dBm and will vary by AP. The values are
governed by compliance requirements based on the country, radio,
and antenna selected. Changing this value below the current Min Tx
Power value will change the Min Tx Power to a level lower than the
selected Max TX Power.
ft
ra
Current Tx Power Level
Note: If Auto Tx Power Ctrl (ATPC) is disabled, the selected value or
the largest value in the compliance table will be the power level used
by the radio, whichever is smaller.
Min Tx Power
If ATPC is enabled, select the minimum Tx power level that is equal or
lower than the maximum Tx power level. Extreme Networks
recommends that you use 0 dBm if you do not want to limit the
potential Tx power level range that can be used.
Note: The Min Tx Power setting cannot be set higher than the Max Tx
Power setting.
Auto Tx Power Ctrl Adjust
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
The Auto Tx Power Ctrl Adj parameter is a correction parameter that
allows you to manually adjust (up or down) the Tx Power calculated by
the ATPC algorithm. If ATPC is enabled, click the Tx power level that
can be used to adjust the ATPC power levels that the system has
assigned. It is recommended that you use 0 dBm during the initial
conﬁguration. If you have an RF plan that recommends Tx power levels
for each AP, compare the actual Tx power levels your system has
assigned against the recommended values your RF plan has provided.
Use the Auto Tx Power Ctrl Adjust value to achieve the recommended
values. Valid range is from - (Max Tx Power - Min Tx Power) dB to
(Max Tx Power - Min Tx Power) dB.
182
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
Table 15: Radio Properties (continued)
Description
Channel Plan - Radio 1
If ACS is enabled you can deﬁne a channel plan for the AP. Deﬁning a
channel plan allows you to control which channels are available for use
during an ACS scan. For example, you may want to avoid using
speciﬁc channels because of low power, regulatory domain, or radar
interference.
• For 5 GHz Radio nodes, click one of the following:
• All channels — ACS scans all channels for an operating channel
and, when ACS is triggered, the optimal channel is selected
from all available channels.
• All Non-DFS Channels — ACS scans all non-DFS channels for
an operating channel. With ACS, the AP selects the best nonDFS channel.
• Custom — To conﬁgure individual channels from which the ACS
selects an operating channel, click Conﬁgure. The Custom
Channel Plan dialog displays. By default, all channels
participate in the channel plan. Click the individual channels
you want to include in the channel plan. To select contiguous
channels, use the Shift key. To select multiple, non-contiguous
channels in the list, use the CTRL key. Click OK to save the
conﬁguration.
• All channels including weather radar — ACS selects the best
channel from the available channels list. Selected channel may
be DFS, weather-radar DFS or non-DFS. Weather-radar
channels are approved for selected AP models in selected
countries. Consult the compliance information for the selected
AP.
The weather channel includes 5600-5650MHz sub-bands
and requires a listening period before the AP can provide
wireless service. During the listening period, the Current
Channel ﬁeld for DFS channels displays the value DFS
Timeout, and the weather channel ﬁelds display DFS
Timeout . In Europe, the listening period can be up to 10
minutes. In the U.S., this period is 1 minute.
• For 2.4 GHz Radio nodes, click one of the following:
• 3 Channel Plan — ACS scans the following channels: 1, 6, and 11
in North America, and 1, 7, and 13 in the rest of the world.
• 4 Channel Plan — ACS scans the following channels: 1, 4, 7, and
11 in North America, and 1, 5, 9, and 13 in the rest of the world.
• Auto — ACS scans the default channel plan channels: 1, 6, and
11 in North America, and 1, 5, 9, and 13 in the rest of the world.
• Custom — If you want to conﬁgure individual channels from
which the ACS selects an operating channel, click Conﬁgure.
The Add Channels dialog is displayed. Click the individual
channels you want to add to the channel plan while pressing
the CTRL key, and then click OK.
ft
ra
Field
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
183
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
Table 15: Radio Properties (continued)
Description
Channel Plan - Radio 2
If ACS is enabled, you can deﬁne a channel plan for the AP. Deﬁning a
channel plan allows you to limit which channels are available for use
during an ACS scan. For example, you may want to avoid using
speciﬁc channels because of low power, regulatory domain, or radar
interference. Click one of the following:
• 3 Channel Plan — ACS scans the following channels: 1, 6, and 11 in
North America, and 1, 7, and 13 in most other parts of the world.
• 4 Channel Plan — ACS scans the following channels: 1, 4, 7, and 11
in North America, and 1, 5, 9, and 13 in most other parts of the
world.
• Auto — ACS scans the default channel plan channels: 1, 6, and 11 in
North America, and 1, 5, 9, and 13 in most other parts of the world.
• Custom — If you want to conﬁgure individual channels from which
the ACS selects an operating channel, click Conﬁgure. The Add
Channels dialog is displayed. Click the individual channels you
want to add to the channel plan while pressing the CTRL key, and
then click OK.
ft
ra
Field
View
Click to open a new dialog that displays the selected Channel Plan for
the antenna.
Related Links
Radio Advanced Properties on page 184
Radio Actions on page 130
AP Properties Tab Conﬁguration on page 159
Assigning Wireless AP Radios to a VNS on page 168
Setting Up the Wireless AP Using Static Conﬁguration on page 199
Setting Up 802.1x Authentication for a Wireless AP on page 203
Radio Advanced Properties
Table 16: Advanced Radio Properties
Field
Description
Advanced Dialog - Base Settings
DTIM period
Type the desired DTIM (Delivery Traffic Indication Message) period —
the number of beacon intervals between two DTIM beacons. To ensure
the best client power savings, use a large number. Use a small number
to minimize broadcast and multicast delay. The default value is 5.
Beacon Period
Deﬁnes the time, in milliseconds, between beacon transmissions. The
default value is 100 milliseconds.
RTS/CTS Threshold
Type the packet size threshold, in bytes, above which the packet is
preceded by an RTS/CTS (Request to Send/Clear to Send) handshake.
The default value is 2346, which means all packets are sent without
RTS/CTS. Reduce this value only if necessary.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
184
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
Table 16: Advanced Radio Properties (continued)
Field
Description
Frag. Threshold
Type the fragment size threshold, in bytes, above which the packets
are fragmented by the AP prior to transmission. The default value is
2346, which means all packets are sent unfragmented. Reduce this
value only if necessary.
Maximum Distance
Enter a value from 100 to 15,000 meters that identiﬁes the maximum
link distance between APs that participate in a WDS. This value
ensures that the acknowledgement of communication between APs
does not exceed the timeout value predeﬁned by the 802.11 standard.
The default value is 100 meters. If the link distance between APs is
greater than 100 meters, conﬁgure the maximum distance up to
15,000 meters so that the software increases the timeout value
proportionally with the distance between APs.
Do not change the default setting for the radio that provides service to
802.11 clients only.
Advanced Dialog - Basic Radio Settings
ft
ra
Dynamic Channel Selection
To enable Dynamic Channel Selection, click one of the following:
Monitor Mode — If enabled, a selection of DCS Interference Events
appears in a separate dialog. If traffic or noise levels exceed the
conﬁgured DCS thresholds, an alarm is triggered and an
information log is generated.
Active
Mode — If enabled, a selection of DCS Interference Events
•
appears in a separate dialog. If traffic or noise levels exceed the
conﬁgured DCS thresholds, an alarm is triggered and an
information log is generated. In addition, the AP ceases operating
on the current channel and ACS is employed to automatically
select an alternate channel for the AP to operate on.
•
Probe Suppression
Click to Enable Probe Suppression.
Forced Disassociate — Click to enable.
RSS Threshold — 90 (Range of -50 to -100).
•
•
Applies to AP37xx, AP38xx, and AP39xx series APs.
Min. Basic Rate
Click the minimum data rate that must be supported by all stations in
a BSS: 6, 12, or 24 Mbps and MCS0-MCS7 for n Radio (MCS0, 1 to
MCS7,1 for a/n/c radio). If necessary, the Max Basic Rate choices adjust
automatically to be higher or equal to the Min Basic Rate.
Advanced Dialog - Multicast Settings
Max % of non-unicast traffic per Beacon
period
Enter the maximum percentage of time that the AP transmits nonunicast packets (broadcast and multicast traffic) for each conﬁgured
Beacon Period. For each non-unicast packet transmitted, the system
calculates the airtime used by each packet and drops all packets that
exceed the conﬁgured maximum percentage. By restricting nonunicast traffic, you limit the impact of broadcasts and multicasts on
overall system performance.
Optimized for power save
Click to optimize for power save.
Adaptable rate
Click to enable adaptable rate capabilities.
Multicast to Unicast delivery
Click to set the Multicast to Unicast delivery method from the dropdown list.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
185
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
Table 16: Advanced Radio Properties (continued)
Field
Description
Advanced Dialog - 11n Settings
Guard Interval
Intended to eliminate interference between symbols during
transmission. It is the space between the symbols being transmitted.
Valid values are Long or Short. Enabling Short Guard Interval increases
throughput, but can increase interference. Enabling Long Guard
Interval can increase overhead due to additional idle time.
Protection Mode
Click a protection mode: None, Auto, or Always. The default and
recommended setting is Auto. Click None if 11b APs and clients are not
expected. Click Always if you expect many 11b-only clients.
Extension Channel Busy Threshold
Click a protection type, CTS Only or RTS CTS, when a 40 MHz channel
is used. This protects high throughput transmissions on extension
channels from interference from non-11n APs and clients.
Aggregate MSDUs
Click an aggregate MSDU mode: Enabled or Disabled. Aggregate
MSDU increases the maximum frame transmission size.
ft
ra
Aggregate MPDUs
Click an aggregate MPDU mode: Enabled or Disabled. Aggregate
MPDU provides a signiﬁcant improvement in throughput.
Aggregate MPDU Max Length
Type the maximum length of the aggregate MPDU. The value range is
1024-65535 bytes. For the 802.11ac radio (Radio 1 of the AP38xx), the
range is 1024-1048575.
Agg. MPDU Max # of Sub-frames
Type the maximum number of sub-frames of the aggregate MPDU.
The value range is 2-64.
ADDBA Support
Click an ADDBA support mode: Enabled or Disabled. ADDBA, or block
acknowledgement, provides acknowledgement of a group of frames
instead of a single frame. ADDBA Support must be enabled if
Aggregate APDU is enable.
LDPC
Click an LDPC mode: Enabled or Disabled. LDPC increases the
reliability of the transmission resulting in a 2dB increased performance
compared to traditional 11n coding.
STBC
Click an STBC mode: Enabled or Disabled. STBC is a simple open loop
transmit diversity scheme. When enabled, STBC conﬁguration is 2x1
(two spatial streams combine into one spatial stream). TXBF overrides
STBC if both are enabled for single stream rates.
TXBF
Tx Beam Forming is a technique of re-aligning the transmitter
multipath spatial streams phases in order to get better signal-to-noise
ratio on the receiver side. Click a TXBF mode: For the AP37xx and
AP38xx models, valid values are Enabled or Disabled. For the 39xx
APs, this setting is only available on Radio1 and valid values are MUMIMO and Disabled.
Advanced Dialog - 11b Settings
Preamble
Click a preamble type for 11b-speciﬁc (CCK) rates: Short or Long. Click
Short if you are sure that there is no pre-11b AP or a client in the
vicinity of this wireless AP. Click Long if compatibility with pre-11b
clients is required.
Advanced Dialog - 11g Settings
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
186
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
Table 16: Advanced Radio Properties (continued)
Description
Protection Mode
Click a protection mode: None, Auto, or Always. The default and
recommended setting is Auto. Click None if 11b APs and clients are not
expected. Click Always if you expect many 11b-only clients.
Protection Rate
Click a protection rate: 1, 2, 5.5, or 11 Mbps. The default and
recommended setting is 11. Only reduce the rate if there are many 11b
clients in the environment or if the deployment has areas with poor
coverage. For example, rates lower than 11 Mbps are required to ensure
coverage.
Protection Type
Click a protection type: CTS Only or RTS CTS. The default and
recommended setting is CTS Only.
Click RTS CTS only if an 11b AP that operates on the same channel is
detected in the neighborhood, or if there are many 11b-only clients in
the environment. The overall throughput is reduced when Protection
Mode is enabled, due to the additional overhead caused by the RTS/
CTS.
The overhead is minimized by setting Protection Type to CTS Only and
Protection Rate to 11 Mbps. The overhead causes the overall
throughput to be sometimes lower than if just 11b mode is used. If
there are many 11b clients, it is recommended that you disable 11g
support (11g clients are backward compatible with 11b APs).
An alternate approach, although potentially a more expensive method,
is to dedicate all APs on a channel for 11b (for example, disable 11g on
these APs) and disable 11b on all other APs. The difficulty with this
method is that the number of APs must be increased to ensure
coverage separately for 11b and 11g clients.
ft
ra
Field
Achieving High Throughput with 11n and 11ac Wireless APs
To achieve high throughput with the wireless APs, conﬁgure your system as described in this section.
Note
Some client devices choose a 2.4 GHz radio even when a 5 GHz high-speed radio network is
available. You may need to force those client devices to use only 5 GHz if you have conﬁgured
high throughput only on the 5 GHz radio.
To achieve high throughput with a wireless AP:
1 From the top menu, click AP.
2 Click the appropriate wireless AP in the list (not the check box). The AP dashboard displays.
3 Click Conﬁgure. The AP Properties tab displays.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
187
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
4 For Radio 2 conﬁgure the following:
•
•
•
•
In the Radio Mode drop-down list, click b/g/n.
In the Channel Width drop-down list, click 40 MHz.
Under Advanced Settings, in the Guard Interval drop-down list, click Short.
In the 11g Settings section, click None in the Protection Mode drop-down list.
Note
Do not disable 802.11g protection mode if you have 802.11b or 802.11g client devices
using this AP. Instead, conﬁgure only Radio 1 for high throughput unless it is acceptable
to achieve less than maximum 802.11n throughput on Radio 2.
•
If only 802.11n devices are present, disable 11n protection and 40 MHz protection:
• Protection Mode — Click None.
• Protection Type — Click CTS only or RTS CTS.
ft
ra
Note
Do not disable 802.11n protection mode if you have 802.11b or 802.11g client devices
using this AP. Instead, conﬁgure only Radio 1 for high throughput unless it is
acceptable to achieve less than maximum 802.11n throughput on Radio 2.
•
•
•
•
•
Aggregate MSDUs — Click Enabled.
Aggregate MPDUs — Click Enabled.
Aggregate MPDUs Max Length — Click 65535 (for the 802.11ac AP models).
•
•
In the Admin Mode drop-down list, click the On option.
In the Radio Mode drop-down list, click the a/n option for the AP3825, and click a/n/ac for the
AP3865 and the 39xx series APs).
In the Channel Width drop-down list, click 40 MHz (for the AP3825 and for the AP3865 and
39xx series, click 80 MHz).
Agg. MPDUs Max # of Sub-frames — Type 64.
ADDBA Support — Click Enabled.
5 Click the Radio 1 tab, and then do the following:
•
•
•
In the Guard Interval drop-down list, click Short.
If only 802.11n devices are present, disable 11n protection and 40 MHz protection:
• Protection Mode — Click None.
• Protection Type — Click CTS only or RTS CTS.
•
•
•
•
•
Aggregate MSDUs — Click Enabled.
Aggregate MPDU — Click Enabled.
Aggregate MPDU Max Length — Click Enabled.
Agg. MPDU Max # of Sub-frames — Type 64.
ADDBA Support — Click Enabled.
6 From the top menu, click VNS.
7 In the left pane select WLAN Services and select the WLAN service to conﬁgure.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
188
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
8 Click the Privacy tab. Some client devices do not use 802.11n mode if they are using WEP or TKIP for
security. Do one of the following:
•
•
Select None.
Select WPA-PSK, and then clear the WPA v.1 option:
• Select WPA v.2.
• In the Encryption drop-down list, click AES only.
Note
To achieve the strongest encryption protection for your VNS, it is recommended
that you use WPA v.2.
9 Click the QoS tab. From the QoS tab, you can select WMM and Flexible Client Access (FCA) to get
better throughput.
Note
For FCA, go to VNS > Global > Wireless QoS and set the Fairness Policy to 100% Airtime.
ft
ra
10 In the Wireless QoS section, select the WMM option. Some 802.11n client devices remain at legacy
rates.
NEW!
Conﬁguring IoT Applications
Conﬁgure IoT support from the IoT tab access point models AP391x
ExtremeWireless supports Real Time Location Systems (RTLS) on APs that offer integrated BLE/
802.15.4 radios for connectivity to Internet of Things (IoT) sensors and devices. The AP must be BLE
enabled.
ExtremeWireless supports the following applications. Each supported AP can be conﬁgured for one
application at a time.
•
•
iBeacon — AP is an Apple iBeacon. AP sends beacons in Apple iBeacon format.
iBeacon Scan — AP scans for Apple iBeacons, ﬁltering beacons based on conﬁguration parameters
and reports ﬁndings to an Application Server.
•
Eddystone-url Beacon — AP sends a compressed URL in a beacon for automatic presentation of a
website. Eddystone-url is supported by both iOS and Android 4.4 operating systems.
Eddystone-url Scan — AP scans for Eddystone-url beacons, ﬁltering beacons based on conﬁguration
parameters and reports ﬁndings to an Application Server.
•
•
Thread Gateway — AP is a gateway router to the Thread Network. Thread is a mesh networking
protocol based on IEEE 802.15.4 for IoT devices.
Related Links
IoT iBeacon on page 190
IoT iBeacon Scan on page 191
Eddystone-url Beacon on page 193
Eddystone-url Scan on page 195
IoT Thread Gateway on page 196
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
189
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
IoT iBeacon
iBeacon is Apple's technology standard that allows mobile apps to identify a beacon position in the
physical world. It delivers content based on the identiﬁed location.
Extreme Wireless access point models AP391x support iBeacon.
Related Links
Conﬁguring AP as an iBeacon on page 190
IoT iBeacon Scan on page 191
Conﬁguring IoT Applications on page 189
IoT Multi-Edit Conﬁguration on page 129
Conﬁguring AP as an iBeacon
ra
With the iBeacon application, conﬁgure a supported AP as an iBeacon in an IoT network. The following
APs offer integrated BLE/802.15.4 radios: AP3912i , AP3915i/e, AP3916ic, AP3917i/e/k.
To conﬁgure iBeacon support from the IoT tab:
From the top menu, click AP. The AP screen displays.
Click the appropriate wireless AP in the list (not the check box). The AP dashboard displays.
Click Conﬁgure. The AP Properties tab displays.
Click the IoT tab, and select IoT Admin.
From the Application ﬁeld, select iBeacon.
Figure 36: IoT Admin Tab iBeacon Application
6 Conﬁgure the following parameters:
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
190
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
Table 17: IoT iBeacon Application Settings
Field
Description
Application
Determines application type. Select iBeacon
Advertise Interval
The advertising interval for the beacon application. Valid values are:
Min (100ms) and Max (10240ms). The default value is Min (100ms).
UUID
Identiﬁer used to differentiate a large group of related beacons. A
company can have a network of beacons with the same UUID.
Major
Identiﬁes a subset of beacons within the larger set. This value could
represent a venue speciﬁc attribute, such as a speciﬁc store or wing in
a building. Valid values are 0 to 65635.
Minor
Identiﬁes an individual beacon. Used to more precisely pinpoint
beacon location. This value complements the UUID and Major values
to provide more granular identiﬁcation of a speciﬁc location, such as a
particular shelf, door-way, or item. Valid values are 0 to 65635.
ft
ra
Related Links
IoT iBeacon on page 190
Conﬁguring IoT Applications on page 189
IoT Multi-Edit Conﬁguration on page 129
IoT iBeacon Scan
With iBeacon Scan, an AP scans for beacons, ﬁltering data based on conﬁguration parameters and
reports ﬁndings to an Application Server. ExtremeWireless forwards an iBeacon report as a JSON
message to the customer's Application Server. The iBeacon report includes the following data:
•
•
•
•
•
AP serial number
The MAC address of the iBeacon tag
The RSSI
The signal strength of the iBeacon tag
The UUID of the iBeacon tag including Major and Minor values.
The following ﬁlters can be applied at the AP to specify the message stream:
•
•
UUID. The Global Unique Identiﬁer. iBeacon messages with corresponding UUID are sent to the
Application Server. All other UUID values are omitted.
Minimum Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI). Transfers messages that meet the conﬁgured
RSSI threshold. Messages received with an RSSI below the conﬁgured threshold are omitted.
Refer to the Integration Guide for details on the format of the iBeacon RTLS message.
The customer's Application Server handles the business logic and presentation of the IoT report. The
Application Server:
•
•
•
Calculates the distance between the BLE tag and the AP, based on the signal strength for the tag/
radio channel
Maps AP Serial Number to a physical location
Tracks BLE tags.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
191
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
From ExtremeWireless, conﬁgure iBeacon Scan parameters under AP conﬁguration.
Related Links
Conﬁguring iBeacon Scan on page 192
IoT Multi-Edit Conﬁguration on page 129
Conﬁguring IoT Applications on page 189
Conﬁguring iBeacon Scan
The following APs offer integrated BLE/802.15.4 radios: AP3912i , AP3915i/e, AP3916ic, AP3917i/e/k.
To conﬁgure iBeacon Scan support from the IoT tab:
From the top menu, click AP. The AP screen displays.
Click the appropriate wireless AP in the list (not the check box). The AP dashboard displays.
Click Conﬁgure. The AP Properties tab displays.
Click the IoT tab, and select IoT Admin.
From the Application ﬁeld, select iBeacon Scan.
Figure 37: iBeacon Scan Application
6 Conﬁgure the following parameters:
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
192
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
Table 18: iBeacon Scan Settings
Description
Application
Determines application type. Select iBeacon Scan
Destination IP Address
IP address of the customer Application Server that receives the
beacon report.
Destination Port
Destination Port on the customer Application Server that presents the
beacon report.
Scan Interval
Determines how long to wait between scans. Valid values are: Min
(100ms) and Max (10240ms). The default value is Min (100ms).
Scan Window
Determines how long to scan per channel. Valid values are Min
(100ms) and Max (10240ms).Value must be less than Scan Interval
value. Default value is 100ms.
UUID
Identiﬁer used to differentiate a large group of related beacons. A
company can have a network of beacons with the same UUID.
Used for ﬁltering data. ExtremeWireless forwards data with matching
UUID to the Application Server and ﬁlters out all other UUID data. If
UUID conﬁgured value is all zeros, no ﬁltering occurs.
ft
ra
Field
Min RSSI
This is the signal strength required to include the packet in the BLE
report. Valid values: -10 to -100. Default value is -100. Data from
beacons with an RSSI that is less than the Min RSSI conﬁgured value is
ﬁltered out.
Related Links
IoT iBeacon Scan on page 191
IoT Multi-Edit Conﬁguration on page 129
NEW!
Eddystone-url Beacon
Eddystone-url is a Google technology standard that supports the physical web by providing a beacondelivered URL that offers content based on the identiﬁed location. Eddystone-url is supported by both
iOS and Android 4.4 operating systems.
An AP sends a beacon that includes a compressed URL. A mobile device app accepts the beacon, and
the mobile user can access the URL that is provided in the beacon.
This technology automatically presents websites to mobile users at the AP location. Possible use cases
include:
•
•
•
Registration at a medical facility or school.
Online payment at a parking garage.
Detailed information about a museum exhibit.
The beacon format is deﬁned by a Google speciﬁcation. Both the URL and the Advertising Interval are
conﬁgurable parameters on the AP.
Related Links
Conﬁguring AP as an Eddystone-url Beacon on page 194
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
193
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
Conﬁguring AP as an Eddystone-url Beacon
Conﬁgure an AP with integrated BLE radio as an Eddystone-url Beacon in an IoT network. The following
APs offer integrated BLE/802.15.4 radios: AP3912i , AP3915i/e, AP3916ic, AP3917i/e/k.
To conﬁgure Eddystone-url Beacon support from the IoT tab:
From the top menu, click AP. The AP screen displays.
2 Click the appropriate wireless AP in the list (not the check box). The AP dashboard displays.
3 Click Conﬁgure. The AP Properties tab displays.
4 Click the IoT tab, and select IoT Admin.
5 From the Application ﬁeld, select Eddystone-url Beacon.
ft
ra
Figure 38: IoT Admin Tab Eddystone-url Beacon Application
6 Conﬁgure the following parameters:
Table 19: IoT Eddystone-url Beacon Application Settings
Field
Description
Application
Determines application type. Select Eddystone-url Beacon
URL
The URL that is included with the Eddystone-url beacon. The URL is
limited to 17 characters. The 17 characters does not include the
protocol, but it does include the domain name. A secure protocol
(HTTPS address) is required. The URL is compressed, effectively
allowing more than a 17-character input. See https://github.com/
google/eddystone/tree/master/eddystone-url for the Eddystone-url
compression rules to more accurately judge the length of your URL. If
necessary, also ﬁnd third-party URL Shortening Services available on
the internet.
Advertise Interval
The advertising interval for the beacon application. Valid values are:
Min (100ms) and Max (10240ms). The default value is Min (100ms).
Related Links
Eddystone-url Beacon on page 193
Conﬁguring IoT Applications on page 189
IoT Multi-Edit Conﬁguration on page 129
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
194
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
NEW!
Eddystone-url Scan
BLE-enabled APs capture beacons and send them to a conﬁgured Application Server. Upon reception,
the server application triggers possible actions such as updating statistics related to beacon location or
communicating with a mobile device application.
An AP scans for beacons, ﬁltering data based on conﬁguration parameters and reports ﬁndings to an
Application Server. ExtremeWireless forwards the report as a JSON message to the customer's
Application Server. The report includes the following data:
•
•
•
•
•
AP Serial Number
The MAC address of the beacon tag
Decoded URL
Device transmission power
The signal strength of the iBeacon tag
ft
ra
The following ﬁlters can be applied at the AP to specify the message stream:
•
Minimum Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI). Transfers messages that meet the conﬁgured
RSSI threshold. Messages received with an RSSI below the conﬁgured threshold are omitted.
Note
Only scanned frames with Eddystone-url format are supported. The UUID must be 0xFEAA.
Refer to the Integration Guide for details on the format of the beacon RTLS message.
The customer's Application Server handles the business logic and presentation of the IoT report. The
Application Server:
•
•
•
Calculates the distance between the BLE tag and the AP, based on the signal strength for the tag/
radio channel
Maps AP Serial Number to a physical location
Tracks BLE tags.
From ExtremeWireless, conﬁgure Eddystone-url Scan parameters under AP conﬁguration.
Conﬁguring Eddystone-url Scan
The following APs offer integrated BLE/802.15.4 radios: AP3912i , AP3915i/e, AP3916ic, AP3917i/e/k.
To conﬁgure Eddystone-url Scan support from the IoT tab:
From the top menu, click AP. The AP screen displays.
2 Click the appropriate wireless AP in the list (not the check box). The AP dashboard displays.
3 Click Conﬁgure. The AP Properties tab displays.
4 Click the IoT tab, and select IoT Admin.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
195
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
5 From the Application ﬁeld, select Eddystone-url Scan.
ft
ra
Figure 39: Eddystone-url Scan Application
6 Conﬁgure the following parameters:
Table 20: Eddystone-url Scan Settings
Field
Description
Application
Determines application type. Select Eddystone URL Scan
Destination IP Address
IP address of the customer Application Server that receives the
beacon report.
Destination Port
Destination Port on the customer Application Server that presents the
beacon report.
Scan Interval
Determines how long to wait between scans. Valid values are: Min
(100ms) and Max (10240ms). The default value is Min (100ms).
Scan Window
Determines how long to scan per channel. Valid values are Min
(100ms) and Max (10240ms).Value must be less than Scan Interval
value. Default value is 100ms.
Min RSSI
This is the signal strength required to include the packet in the BLE
report. Valid values: -10 to -100. Default value is -100. Data from
beacons with an RSSI that is less than the Min RSSI conﬁgured value is
ﬁltered out.
Related Links
Eddystone-url Scan on page 195
IoT Multi-Edit Conﬁguration on page 129
Conﬁguring IoT Applications on page 189
IoT Thread Gateway
The ExtremeWireless Thread Network solution makes use of a single infrastructure to combine a
wireless network with an IoT sensor network, while integrating with an enterprise backbone network.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
196
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
Each AP391x, with integrated BLE/802.15.4 radios, creates a separate Thread Network identiﬁed with a
separate PAN ID. Sensors scan, ﬁnd the AP Thread Network, and build a Mesh network with that AP
serving as the border gateway router. The AP routes network traffic between its own Thread Network
interface and the IoT interface.
To conﬁgure a Thread Network, do the following:
•
Conﬁgure a VNS:
• Create a new VNS.
• Enable IPv6 multicast
•
Assign a VLAN.
Note
The VLAN must have a Router with DHCPv6-PD — Thread Network supports IPv6
addressing only. If the DHCPv6 server provides global address, all sensors in the network
receive the global address, and therefore, can be managed from the Cloud IPv6 network.
Conﬁgure IoT Thread Gateway on an AP391x.
Conﬁgure a WLANS with an IoT port enabled.
Conﬁgure a whitelist that deﬁnes the allowed sensor nodes and joiner sensors for the Thread
Network.
ft
ra
•
•
•
Note
If the whitelist is not conﬁgured, all sensors with password THREAD are accepted into the
network.
Related Links
Conﬁguring an AP as a Thread Gateway on page 197
Advanced Thread Gateway Properties on page 198
Managing an IoT Whitelist on page 671
IoT Multi-Edit Conﬁguration on page 129
Conﬁguring an AP as a Thread Gateway
To conﬁgure the Thread Network on each supported AP, take the following steps:
From the top menu, click AP. The AP screen displays.
2 Click the AP row (not the check box) for an AP model that offers a BLE/802.15.4 radio.
The AP dashboard displays.
3 Click Conﬁgure. The AP Properties tab displays.
4 Click the IoT tab, and select IoT Admin.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
197
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
5 From the Application ﬁeld, select Thread Gateway and click Advanced.
ft
ra
Figure 40: IoT Admin Tab Thread Gateway Application
The Advanced Thread Gateway parameters dialog displays.
Related Links
Advanced Thread Gateway Properties on page 198
IoT Thread Gateway on page 196
Advanced Thread Gateway Properties
Conﬁgure the following parameters on the selected AP. The AP serves as a border gateway router for its
own Thread Network.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
198
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
Figure 41: IoT Thread Gateway Properties
ft
ra
Note
The conﬁgured Thread Gateway displays on the Active Clients report, indicating that the
gateway is up and running.
Table 21: Thread Gateway Properties
Field
Description
Application
Determines application type. Select Thread Gateway
Name
Thread Network name. Default value is the AP serial number. Each AP
creates a separate Thread Network identiﬁed with separate Short PAN
ID and Extended PAN ID.
Channel
The IEEE Standard: 802.15.4 AP channel number.
Short PAN ID
A 16-bit, MAC-layer addressing ﬁeld used in RF data transmissions
between devices in a Thread Network. The default value is derived
from the AP serial number. The Short PAN ID identiﬁes the APs Thread
Network.
Extended PAN ID
A 64-bit, MAC-layer addressing ﬁeld used in RF data transmissions
between devices in a Thread Network. The default value is derived
from the AP serial number. This value must be unique. It is used for a
more speciﬁc network identiﬁcation.
Master Key
Indicates the Network Master Key used to encrypt communication
between nodes in a Thread Network.
Related Links
Conﬁguring an AP as a Thread Gateway on page 197
IoT Thread Gateway on page 196
Setting Up the Wireless AP Using Static Conﬁguration
Static conﬁguration settings allow you to set up branch office support. These settings can be employed
whenever required, and are not dependent on branch topology. In the branch office model, while the
controller is at a central office, APs are installed in remote sites. The APs must be able to interact in both
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
199
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
the local site network and the central office network. When this is the case, a static conﬁguration is
recommended.
For initial conﬁguration of a wireless AP to use a static IP address assignment:
•
Allow the AP to ﬁrst obtain an IP address using DHCP. By default, APs are conﬁgured to use the
DHCP IP address conﬁguration method.
•
•
Allow the AP to connect to the controller using the DHCP assigned IP address.
•
After the AP has successfully registered to the controller, use the Static Conﬁguration tab to
conﬁgure a static IP address for the AP, and then save the conﬁguration.
Once the static IP address has been conﬁgured on the AP, the AP can then be moved to its target
location, if applicable.
Note
If a wireless AP with a statically conﬁgured IP address (without a statically conﬁgured
Wireless Controller Search List) cannot register with the controller within the speciﬁed
number of retries, the wireless AP uses SLP, DNS, and SLP multicast as a backup
mechanism.
ft
ra
To set up a wireless AP using static conﬁguration:
From the top menu, click AP. The AP screen displays.
Click the appropriate wireless AP in the list (not the check box). The AP dashboard displays.
Click Conﬁgure. The AP Properties tab displays.
Click the Static Conﬁguration tab.
Conﬁgure the following parameters:
a Select a VLAN (Virtual LAN) setting for the AP.
Caution
Caution should be exercised when using this feature. For more information, see
Conﬁguring VLAN Tags for Wireless APs on page 203. If the Wireless AP VLAN is not
conﬁgured properly (wrong tag), connecting to the AP may not be possible. To recover
from this situation, you need to reset the AP to its factory default settings. For more
information, see the Extreme Networks ExtremeWireless Maintenance Guide .
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
200
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
b Select a method of IP address assignment for the AP.
ft
ra
Note
Client Port conﬁguration is available for the AP3912. For more information, see
Assigning WLAN Services to Client Ports on page 170.
Table 22: Static Conﬁguration Properties
Field/Button
Description
VLAN Settings
Tagged
Select if you want to assign this AP to a speciﬁc VLAN and type the value in the
box.
Untagged
Select if you want this AP to be untagged. This option is selected by default.
VLAN ID
Enter a VLAN ID. Valid values are 2 to 4094
IP Address Assignment
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
201
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
Table 22: Static Conﬁguration Properties (continued)
Field/Button
Description
Use DHCP
Select to enable Dynamic Host Conﬁguration Protocol (DHCP). This option is
enabled by default.
Static Values
Select to specify the IP address of the AP.
IP Address
Type the IP address of the AP.
Netmask
Type the appropriate subnet mask to separate the network portion from the host
portion of the address.
Gateway
Type the default gateway of the network.
Ethernet Port
Ethernet Speed
If the AP has an Ethernet port, select values in the Ethernet Speed and Ethernet
Mode drop down lists.
Ethernet Mode
If the AP has an Ethernet port, select values in the Ethernet Speed and Ethernet
Mode drop down lists.
ft
ra
Tunnel MTU
Enter a static MTU value, from 600 to 1500, in the Tunnel MTU box. The
maximum MTU can be increased to 1800 bytes by enabling Jumbo Frames
support (for more information, see Setting Up the Data Ports on page 51). If the
wireless software cannot discover the MTU size, it enforces the static MTU size.
Set the MTU size to allow the source to reduce the packet size and avoid the
need to fragment data packets in the tunnel.
LACP
Applies to the AP38xx and AP39xx only. Click to Enable Link Aggregation
Control Protocol. This feature allows higher throughput by combining the two
Ethernet ports. This feature is disabled by default.
Wireless Controller Search List
Up
Select a controller and click the Up button to modify the order of the controllers.
When an AP searches for a controller to register with, it begins with the ﬁrst
controller in the list.
Down
Select a controller and click the Up button to modify the order of the controllers.
When an AP searches for a controller to register with, it begins with the ﬁrst
controller in the list.
Delete
Click to remove the controller from the list so that it can no longer control the AP.
Add
In the Add box, type the IP address of the controller that will control this AP then
click the Add button to add the IP address is added to the list. Repeat this
process to add the IP addresses of up to three controllers.
This feature allows the AP to bypass the discovery process. If the Wireless
Controller Search List box is not populated, the AP uses SLP unicast/multicast,
DNS, or DHCP vendor option 43 to discover a controller.
For the initial AP deployment, it is necessary to use one of the described options
in Discovery and Registration on page 120.
Additional Buttons
Copy to Defaults
To make this AP’s conﬁguration be the system’s default AP settings, click Copy
to Defaults. A pop-up dialog asking you to conﬁrm the conﬁguration change is
displayed.To conﬁrm resetting the system’s default AP settings, click OK.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
202
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
Table 22: Static Conﬁguration Properties (continued)
Field/Button
Description
Reset to Defaults
If you have an AP that is already conﬁgured with its own settings, but would like
the AP to be reset to use the system’s default AP settings, use the Reset to
Defaults feature
Apply
Click to save your changes.
Related Links
AP Properties Tab Conﬁguration on page 159
Assigning Wireless AP Radios to a VNS on page 168
Conﬁguration Parameters for Radio Properties on page 180
Setting Up 802.1x Authentication for a Wireless AP on page 203
Conﬁguring VLAN Tags for Wireless APs
ft
ra
Caution
Exercise caution while conﬁguring a VLAN ID tag. If a VLAN tag is not conﬁgured properly,
the connectivity between the controller and the AP will be lost.
To conﬁgure Wireless APs with a VLAN tag:
Connect the AP in the central office to the controller port (or to a network point) that does not
require VLAN tagging.
From the top menu, click AP.
Click the Static Conﬁguration tab.
In the VLAN Settings section, select Tagged - VLAN ID.
In the Tagged - VLAN ID text box, type the VLAN ID on which the AP operates.
To save your changes, click Save. The AP reboots and loses connection with the controller.
Log out from the controller.
Disconnect the AP from the central office network and move it to the target location.
Power up the AP. The AP connects to the controller.
If the AP does not connect to the controller, the AP was not conﬁgured properly. To recover from this
situation, reset the AP to its factory default settings, and reconﬁgure the static IP address.
Setting Up 802.1x Authentication for a Wireless AP
802.1x is an authentication standard for wired and wireless LANs. The 802.1x standard can be used to
authenticate access points to the LAN to which they are connected. 802.1x support provides security for
network deployments where access points are placed in public spaces.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
203
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
To successfully set up 802.1x authentication of a Wireless AP, the AP must be conﬁgured for 802.1x
authentication before the AP is connected to a 802.1x enabled switch port.
Caution
If the switch port to which the AP is connected is not 802.1x enabled, the 802.1x
authentication does not take effect.
802.1x authentication credentials can be updated at any time, whether or not the AP is connected with
an active session. If the AP is connected, the new credentials are sent immediately. If the AP is not
connected, the new credentials are delivered the next time the AP connects to the controller.
There are two main aspects to the 802.1x feature:
•
•
Credential management — The controller and the AP are responsible for the requesting, creating,
deleting, or invalidating the credentials used in the authentication process.
Authentication — The AP is responsible for the actual execution of the EAP-TLS or PEAP protocol.
ft
ra
802.1x authentication can be conﬁgured on a per-AP basis. For example, 802.1x authentication can be
applied to speciﬁc APs individually or with a multi-edit function.
The 802.1x authentication supports two authentication methods:
•
PEAP (Protected Extensible Authentication Protocol)
• Is the recommended 802.1x authentication method
• Requires minimal conﬁguration effort and provides equal authentication protection to EAP-TLS
• Uses user ID and passwords for authentication of access points
•
EAP-TLS
• Requires more conﬁguration effort
• Requires the use of a third-party Certiﬁcate Authentication application
• Uses certiﬁcates for authentication of access points
• The controller can operate in either proxy mode or pass through mode.
Proxy mode — The controller generates the public and private key pair used in the certiﬁcate.
Pass through mode — The certiﬁcate and private key are created by the third-party Certiﬁcate
Authentication application.
Note
Although a wireless AP can support using both PEAP and EAP-TLS credentials
simultaneously, it is not recommended to do so. Instead, it is recommended that
you use only one type of authentication and that you install the credentials for only
that type of authentication on the wireless AP.
Related Links
AP Properties Tab Conﬁguration on page 159
Assigning Wireless AP Radios to a VNS on page 168
Conﬁguration Parameters for Radio Properties on page 180
Setting Up the Wireless AP Using Static Conﬁguration on page 199
Setting Up 802.1x Authentication for Wireless APs Using Managing Certiﬁcates on page 209
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
204
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
Conﬁguring 802.1x EAP-TLS Authentication
EAP-TLS authentication uses certiﬁcates for authentication. A third-party Certiﬁcate Authentication
application is required to conﬁgure EAP-TLS authentication. Certiﬁcates can be overwritten with new
ones at any time.
With EAP-TLS authentication, the controller can operate in the following modes:
•
•
Proxy Mode on page 205
Pass Through Mode on page 207
Note
When a wireless AP that is conﬁgured with 802.1x EAP-TLS authentication is connected to
a controller, the AP begins submitting logs to the controller thirty days before the
certiﬁcate expires to provide administrators with a warning of the impending expiry date.
Proxy Mode
ft
ra
In proxy mode, the controller generates the public and private key pair used in the certiﬁcate. You can
specify the criteria used to create the Certiﬁcate Request. The Certiﬁcate Request that is generated by
the controller is then used by the third-party Certiﬁcate Authentication application to create the
certiﬁcate used for authentication of the Wireless AP. To successfully conﬁgure 802.1x authentication of
a Wireless AP, the AP must ﬁrst be conﬁgured for 802.1x authentication before the AP is deployed on a
802.1x enabled switch port.
To Conﬁgure 802.1x EAP-TLS Authentication in Proxy Mode:
1 From the top menu, click AP.
2 In the AP list, click the wireless AP (not the check box) for which you want to conﬁgure 802.1x EAPTLS authentication.
3 Click the 802.1x tab.
4 Click Generate Certiﬁcate Signing Request. The Generate Certiﬁcate Signing Request window is
displayed.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
205
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
ra
5 Type the criteria to be used to create the certiﬁcate request. All ﬁelds are required:
• Country name — The two-letter ISO abbreviation of the name of the country
• State or Province name — The name of the State/Province
Locality name (city) — The name of the city
Organization name — The name of the organization
Organizational Unit name — The name of the unit within the organization
Common name — Click the value you want to assign as the common name of the wireless AP.
(See Table 23 on page 212 for credential parameters and values.)
•
ft
•
•
•
•
Email address — The email address of the organization
6 Click Generate Certiﬁcate Signing Request. A certiﬁcate request ﬁle is generated (.csr ﬁle
extension). The name of the ﬁle is the AP serial number. The File Download dialog is displayed.
7 Click Save. The Save as window is displayed.
8 Navigate to the location on your computer that you want to save the generated certiﬁcate request
ﬁle, and then click Save.
9 In the third-party Certiﬁcate Authentication application, use the content of the generated certiﬁcate
request ﬁle to generate the certiﬁcate ﬁle (.cer ﬁle extension).
10 On the 802.1x tab, click Browse. The Choose ﬁle dialog is displayed.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
206
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
11 Navigate to the location of the certiﬁcate ﬁle, and click Open. The name of the certiﬁcate ﬁle is
displayed in the X509 DER / PKCS#12 ﬁle box.
12 To save your changes, click Save.
The 802.1x EAP-TLS (certiﬁcate and private key) authentication in proxy mode is assigned to the AP.
The wireless AP can now be deployed to a 802.1x enabled switch port.
Pass Through Mode
In pass through mode, the certiﬁcate and private key are created by the third-party Certiﬁcate
Authentication application. To successfully conﬁgure 802.1x authentication of a wireless AP, the AP
must ﬁrst be conﬁgured for 802.1x authentication before the AP is deployed on a 802.1x enabled switch
port.
Before you conﬁgure 802.1x using EAP-TLS authentication in pass through mode, create a certiﬁcate
using the third-party Certiﬁcate Authentication application and save the certiﬁcate ﬁle in PKCS #12 ﬁle
format (.pfx ﬁle extension) on your system.
ft
ra
To Conﬁgure 802.1x EAP-TLS Authentication in Pass Through Mode:
1 From the top menu, click AP.
2 Click the appropriate wireless AP in the list (not the check box). The AP dashboard displays.
3 Click Conﬁgure. The AP Properties tab displays.
4 Click the 802.1x tab.
5 Click Browse. The Choose ﬁle window is displayed.
6 Navigate to the location of the certiﬁcate ﬁle (.pfx) and click Open. The name of the certiﬁcate ﬁle is
displayed in the X509 DER / PKCS#12 ﬁle box.
7 In the Password box, type the password that was used to protect the private key.
Note
The password that was used to protect the private key must be a maximum of 31
characters long.
8 To save your changes, click Save.
The 802.1x EAP-TLS authentication in pass through mode is assigned to the wireless AP. The AP can
now be deployed to a 802.1x enabled switch port.
Viewing 802.1x Credentials
When 802.1x authentication is conﬁgured on a wireless AP, the light bulb icon on the 802.1x tab for the
conﬁgured AP is lit to indicate which 802.1x authentication method is used. A wireless AP can be
conﬁgured to use both EAP-TLS and PEAP authentication methods. For example, when both EAP-TLS
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
207
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
and PEAP authentication methods are conﬁgured for the AP, both light bulb icons on the 802.1x tab are
lit.
Note
You can view only the 802.1x credentials of wireless APs that have an active session with the
controller. If you attempt to view the credentials of a wireless AP that does not have an active
session, the AP Credentials window displays the following message: Unable to query wireless
AP: not connected.
To view current 802.1x credentials:
1 From the top menu, click AP.
2 In the AP list, click the wireless AP (not the check box) for which you want to view its current 802.1x
credentials.
3 Select the 802.1x tab.
4 In the Current Credentials section, click Get Certiﬁcate details.
The Wireless AP Credentials window is displayed.
ft
ra
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
208
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
Deleting 802.1x Credentials
Caution
Exercise caution when deleting 802.1x credentials. For example, deleting 802.1x credentials
may prevent the AP from being authenticated or cause it to lose its connection with the
controller.
To delete current 802.1x credentials:
1 From the top menu, click AP.
2 In the AP list, click the wireless AP (not the check box) for which you want to view its current 802.1x
credentials.
3 Select the 802.1x tab.
4 Do the following:
•
•
To delete EAP-TLS credentials, click Delete EAP-TLS credentials.
To delete PEAP credentials, click Delete PEAP credentials.
ft
ra
The credentials are deleted and the AP settings are updated.
Note
If you attempt to delete the 802.1x credentials of a wireless AP that currently does not
have an active session with the controller, the credentials are deleted only after the AP
connects with the controller.
Setting Up 802.1x Authentication for Wireless APs Using Managing
Certiﬁcates
In addition to conﬁguring APs individually, you can also conﬁgure 802.1x authentication for multiple APs
simultaneously by using the AP 802.1x Multi-edit feature.
When you use the AP 802.1x Multi-edit feature, you can choose to:
•
•
Assign EAP-TLS authentication based on generated certiﬁcates to multiple APs by uploading
a .pfx, .cer, or .zip ﬁle.
Assign PEAP credentials to multiple APs based on a user name and password that you deﬁne
To conﬁgure 802.1x EAP-TLS Authentication in Proxy Mode using Multi-edit:
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
209
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
From the top menu, click AP.
The AP screen displays.
ft
2 In the APs list, select one or more APs to conﬁgure. To search for a speciﬁc AP, enter the AP in the
search bar and click
3 Click Actions > Manage Certiﬁcates
4 In the Certiﬁcate Signing Request section, type the following:
• Country name — The two-letter ISO abbreviation of the name of the country
•
•
•
•
•
•
State or Province name — The name of the State/Province
Locality name (city) — The name of the city
Organization name — The name of the organization
Organizational Unit name — The name of the unit within the organization
Common name — Click the value you want to assign as the common name of the wireless AP
(see Table 23 on page 212 for credential parameters and values).
Email address — The email address of the organization
• Key Size — If the email address key size is different from the default value shown, you can
change it by selecting a new value from the drop down menu.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
210
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
5 Click Generate Certiﬁcates. The AP 802.1x Multi-edit progress dialog is displayed, which provides
the status of the conﬁguration process. Once complete, the File Download dialog is displayed.
6 Click Save. The Save as window is displayed.
7 Navigate to the location on your computer that you want to save the generated
certiﬁcate_requests.tar ﬁle, and then click Save.
The certiﬁcate_requests.tar ﬁle contains a certiﬁcate request (.csr) ﬁle for each AP.
8 Do one of the following:
•
For each certiﬁcate request, generate a certiﬁcate using the third-party Certiﬁcate
Authentication application. This method produces a certiﬁcate for each wireless AP. Once
complete, zip all the certiﬁcates ﬁles (.cer) into one .zip ﬁle.
•
ft
ra
Use one of the certiﬁcate requests and generate one certiﬁcate using the Certiﬁcate
Authentication application. This method produces one certiﬁcate that can be applied to all APs.
9 In the Bulk Certiﬁcate Upload section, click Browse. The Choose ﬁle window is displayed.
10 Navigate to the location of the ﬁle (.zip or .cer), and then click Open. The name of the ﬁle is
displayed in the PFX, CER or ZIP Archive box.
11 Click Upload and Set certiﬁcates.
Once complete, the Settings updated message is displayed in the footer of the Wireless Assistant.
The 802.1x EAP-TLS authentication conﬁguration is assigned to the APs. The APs can now be deployed
to 802.1x enabled switch ports.
Conﬁguring 802.1x EAP-TLS Authentication in Pass Through Mode Using Multi-edit
When you conﬁgure 802.1x EAP-TLS authentication in pass through mode using Multi-edit, do one of
the following:
•
Generate a certiﬁcate for each AP using the third-party Certiﬁcate Authentication application. When
generating the certiﬁcates:
• Use the Common name value (either Name, Serial, or MAC) of the AP to name each generated
certiﬁcate.
• Use a common password for each generated certiﬁcate.
• All .pfx ﬁles created by the third-party Certiﬁcate Authentication application must be zipped into
•
one ﬁle.
Generate one certiﬁcate, using the third-party Certiﬁcate Authentication application, to be applied
to all APs. When generating the certiﬁcate, use the Common name value (either Name, Serial, or
MAC) of the wireless AP to name the generated certiﬁcate.
The 802.1x PEAP authentication conﬁguration is assigned to the APs. The APs can now be deployed to
802.1x enabled switch ports.
Managing Certiﬁcates
To conﬁgure certiﬁcates, take the following steps:
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
211
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
Certiﬁcate Signing Request
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Country name — The two-letter ISO abbreviation of the name of the country
State or Province name — The name of the State/Province
Locality name (city) — The name of the city
Organization name — The name of the organization
Organizational Unit name — The name of the unit within the organization
Common name — Click the value you want to assign as the common name of the wireless AP
(see Table 23 on page 212 for credential parameters and values).
Email address — The email address of the organization
• Key Size — If the email address key size is different from the default value shown, you can
change it by selecting a new value from the drop down menu.
2 Click Generate Certiﬁcates. The AP 802.1x Multi-edit progress window is displayed, which provides
the status of the conﬁguration process. Once complete, the File Download dialog is displayed.
3 Click Save. The Save as window is displayed.
ft
ra
4 Navigate to the location on your computer that you want to save the generated
certiﬁcate_requests.tar ﬁle, and then click Save.
The certiﬁcate_requests.tar ﬁle contains a certiﬁcate request (.csr) ﬁle for each AP.
5 Do one of the following:
•
For each certiﬁcate request, generate a certiﬁcate using the third-party Certiﬁcate
Authentication application. This method produces a certiﬁcate for each wireless AP. Once
complete, zip all the certiﬁcates ﬁles (.cer) into one .zip ﬁle.
•
Use one of the certiﬁcate requests and generate one certiﬁcate using the Certiﬁcate
Authentication application. This method produces one certiﬁcate that can be applied to all APs.
Bulk Certiﬁcate Upload
6 Click Browse. The Choose ﬁle window is displayed.
7 Navigate to the location of the ﬁle (.zip or .cer), and then click Open. The name of the ﬁle is
displayed in the PFX, CER or ZIP Archive box.
8 Click Upload and Set certiﬁcates. Once complete, the Settings updated message is displayed in the
footer of the Wireless Assistant.
The 802.1x EAP-TLS authentication conﬁguration is assigned to the APs. The APs can now be
deployed to 802.1x enabled switch ports.
PEAP Authentication
PEAP authentication uses user ID and passwords for authentication. To successfully conﬁgure 802.1x
authentication of a wireless AP, the AP must ﬁrst be conﬁgured for 802.1x authentication before the AP is
deployed on an 802.1x enabled switch port.
9 In the Username drop-down list, click the value you want to assign as the user name credential:
10 In the Password drop-down list, click the value you want to assign as the password credential.
Table 23: Credential Parameters
Parameter
Value
Name
The name of the wireless AP, which is assigned on the AP Properties tab. The AP name can be
edited.
Serial
The serial number of the AP. This setting cannot be edited.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
212
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
Table 23: Credential Parameters (continued)
Parameter
Value
MAC
The MAC address of the AP. The setting cannot be edited.
Other
Click to specify a custom value. A text box is displayed. In the text box, type the value you want
to assign as the user name credential.
11 To save your changes, click Save.
The 802.1x PEAP authentication conﬁguration is assigned to the AP. The AP can now be deployed to
an 802.1x enabled switch port.
Related Links
Setting Up 802.1x Authentication for Wireless APs Using Managing Certiﬁcates on page 209
Conﬁguring Co-Located APs in Load Balance Groups
ft
ra
You can conﬁgure APs that are co-located in an open area, such as a classroom, a conference hall, or an
entrance lobby, to act as a load balance group. Load balancing distributes clients across the co-located
APs that are members of the load balance group. The co-located APs should provide the same SSID,
have Line-of-Sight (LoS) between each other, and be deployed on multiple channels with overlapping
coverage.
Assign an AP's radio to the load balance group for the client distribution to occur. Load balancing
occurs only among the assigned AP radios of the load balance group. Each radio can be assigned only
to one load balance group. Multiple radios on the same AP do not have to be in the same load balance
group. The radios that you assign to the load balance group must be on APs that are controlled by the
same controller.
The load balance group uses one or more WLAN services for all APs assigned to the load balance
group. You can conﬁgure two types of load balance groups:
•
Client Balancing load group – performs load balancing based on the number of clients across all APs
in the group and only for the WLANs assigned to the load group. This is different from load control
in the Radio Preference group— load control APs make decisions in isolation from each other.
•
Radio Preference load group – performs band preference steering and load control. Band preference
steering is a mechanism to move 11a-capable clients to the 11a radio on the AP, relieving congestion
on the 11g radio. No balancing is done between the 11a and 11g radios. Load control is disabled by
default. A radio load group executes band preference steering and/or load control across the radios
on each AP in the group. Each AP balances in isolation from the other APs, but all APs in the load
group have the same conﬁguration related to the band preference and load control.
Client balancing on the controller is AP-centric and requires no input from the client. The AP radios in
the client balance group share information with secure (AES) messaging using multicast on the wired
network. All APs in a client balance group must be in the same SIAPP cluster to ensure that each AP can
reach all other APs in the client balance group over the wired subnet. If the APs in a client balance
group are not in the same SIAPP cluster, client balancing happens independently within the subgroups
deﬁned by SIAPP clusters.
The beneﬁts of conﬁguring your co-located APs that are controlled by the same controller as a client
balance group are the following:
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
213
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
•
•
•
•
Resource sharing of the balanced AP
Efficient use of the deployed 2.4 and 5 GHz channels
Reduce client interference by distributing clients on different channels
Scalable 802.11 deployment: if more clients need to be served in the area, additional APs can be
deployed on a new channel
You can assign a maximum of 32 APs to a client balance group. Table 24 lists the maximum number of
load balance groups for each controller.
Table 24: Maximum Number of Load Balance Groups
ExtremeWireless Appliance
Number of load balance groups
C4110
32
C5110
64
C5210
64
C5215
64
ft
ra
C25
C35
V2110
64
V2110 (MS Hyper-V platform)
32
Currently, all APs support load balance groups.
To create a load balance group, see Creating a Load Balance Group on page 214.
Creating a Load Balance Group
To create a load balance group:
1 From the top menu, click AP.
2 In the left pane, click Load Groups.
3 Click New. The Add Load Group window displays.
4 Enter a unique name for a load group ID, and select a Type from the drop-down menu and then click
Add. The options are:
•
Client Balancing — load balancing based on the number of clients across all APs in the load
balance group and only for the WLANs assigned to the group.
•
Radio Preference —band preference steering and load control on this load group.
If you are adding a Client Balancing load balancing group, the Radio Assignment tab becomes available.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
214
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
ra
If you are adding a Radio Preference load balancing group, the Radio Preference tab becomes available.
ft
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
215
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
ft
ra
The radios for both types of load groups can be assigned to a WLAN, on the WLAN Assignment tab.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
216
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
ra
You can ﬁlter the display of AP Groups. In the left pane, Expand Client Balancing to see only Client
Balancing groups. Expand Radio Preference to see only Radio Preference groups.
Note
For more information about the ﬁelds on these screens, see Conﬁguration Parameters for AP
Load Groups on page 217.
ft
Conﬁguration Parameters for AP Load Groups
Table 25: AP Load Groups
Field/Button
Description
Load Group ID
Enter a unique name for the load group. You can create load groups
with the same name on different controller; however, the groups are
treated as separate groups according to the home controller where the
group was originally created.
Type
The type of load group is displayed. Options include:
• Client Balancing - select to perform load balancing based on the
number of clients across all APs in the load balance group and only
for the WLAN Services assigned to the group.
• Radio Preference - select to perform band preference steering and
enforce load control settings on this load group.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
217
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
Table 25: AP Load Groups (continued)
Field/Button
Description
New
Click to create a new load group. The Add Load Group window.
Delete
Click to delete this load group.
Save
Click to save your changes.
Radio Assignment tab - Available for load groups assigned the Client Balancing type.
Select AP Radios
From the drop-down menu, select the AP radios that you want to
assign to the load group. Options include:
• All radios
• Radio 1
• Radio 2
• Clear all radios
ft
ra
You can assign a radio to only one load balance group. A radio that is
assigned to another load balance group has an asterisk next to it. If
you select a radio that has been assigned to another load balance
group, the radio is reassigned to the new load balance group.
Note: You can assign each radio of an AP to different load balance
groups.
Radio Preference tab - Available for load groups assigned the Radio Preference type
Band Preference
Select the Enable check box to enable band preference for this load
group.
You can apply band preference to a VNS assigned in the load group.
Enabling band preference enables you to move an 11a-capable client to
an 11a radio to relieve congestion on an 11g radio. A client is considered
11a capable if the AP receives requests on an 11a VNS that already
belongs to a load group with band preference enabled. After you
conﬁgure band preference, if a client tries to re-associate with an 11g
radio, it is rejected if the AP determines that the client is 11a capable.
Load Control
Select the following parameters for each radio assigned to this load
group:
• Enable: Select this check box to enable Radio Load Control (RLC)
for individual radios (Radio1 and Radio2) associated with this Load
Group.
• Max. # of Clients: Enter the maximum number of clients for Radio
1 and Radio 2. The default limit is 60. The valid range is: 5 to 60.
• Strict Limit: Select this check box to enable a strict limit on the
number of clients allowed on a speciﬁc radio, based on the max #
of clients allowed. Limits can be enforced separately for radio1 and
radio 2.
AP Assignment
Select the APs on which you want to enforce the Band Preference and
Load Control settings.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
218
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
Table 25: AP Load Groups (continued)
Field/Button
Description
WLAN Assignment tab
WLAN Name
Click the check box of the one or more WLAN services that you want
to assign to all member radios of the load balance group. You can
select up to the radio limit of eight VNSs.
When you assign a radio to a load group, WLAN service assignment
can be done only from the WLAN Assignment tab on the Wireless AP
Load Groups screen. On all other WLAN Assignment tabs associated
with the member AP radios, the radio check box associated with the
member AP radios is grayed out. When you remove a radio from a
load group, the load group’s WLAN service remains assigned to the
radio, but you can now assign a different WLAN service to the radio.
How Availability Mode Affects Load Balancing
ft
ra
All radios assigned to a load group must belong to APs that are all controlled by the same controller.
Availability mode can be conﬁgured only from the home controller on which the load group was
created. Load balancing continues to operate if member APs fail over to the foreign controller as long as
the WLAN service assignment remains the same.
To ensure that load balancing works properly in availability mode, enable synchronization of the system
conﬁguration and the WLAN services used by the load group when you conﬁgure availability mode. If
you do not enable synchronization, the radios on any AP that fails over may be removed from their
assigned load groups. For more about availability mode, see Conﬁguring Availability Using the
Availability Wizard on page 539.
If you have not conﬁgured synchronization, in a failover situation you are able to change the load
balance group’s WLAN service assignment from the VNS Conﬁguration screens and the Wireless AP
WLAN Assignment screens on the foreign controller.
If you have conﬁgured synchronization, you cannot change the WLAN assignments from the foreign
controller. If you have not conﬁgured synchronization, you must conﬁgure the foreign controller to
ensure that all AP radios in the load balance group have the same WLAN services assigned before the
AP fails over, as originally conﬁgured for the load group. If the WLAN services assigned do not match
when an AP fails over, the affected AP radios are removed from the load group. If you change the
WLAN services to match after the AP fails over, the AP radios still are not allowed to be in the load
group. Reconnect the AP to the home controller to have the radios become part of the load group
again.
Load Balance Group Statistics
You can view load balance group statistics through the Active Wireless Load Groups report. For more
information, see Viewing Load Balance Group Statistics on page 631.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
219
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
Conﬁguring an AP Cluster
APs operating in both ﬁt mode and standalone mode operate in a cluster setup. A cluster is a group of
APs conﬁgured to communicate with each other. Mobile users (MU) can seamlessly roam between the
APs participating in the cluster. Wireless APs extend basic cluster functions with the following
enhancements:
•
•
Client balancing across AP in the Load Group
Client session synchronization between APs in the Site
APs operating on the same subnet with multicast and IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol)
snooping enabled can be formed into a cluster. You assign each AP a common, default cluster ID
(shared secret).
An AP cluster can exist at any point in your network. Each cluster member periodically (every 30
seconds) sends a secure SIAPP (Siemens Inter-AP Protocol) multicast message to update other cluster
members. The SIAPP message includes:
The AP name
The AP Ethernet MAC address
The AP IP address
ft
ra
•
•
•
•
•
•
The client count
The base BSSIDs for both radios
Client session information in a case when APs are members of a Site
Each AP caches locally-stored information about the other cluster members and maintains its own view
of the cluster including the client session information in the Site.
To change an AP cluster’s conﬁguration:
From the top menu, click AP.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
220
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
2 In the left pane, click Global Settings > AP Registration.
ft
ra
3 In the Secure Cluster section, enter a cluster shared secret.
4 Enable cluster encryption by clicking on the User Cluster Encryption check box. APs on which user
cluster encryption is disabled cannot participate in the cluster.
5 Enable or disable support for inter-AP roaming by clicking on the Inter AP Roam check box.
6 Click Save.
Conﬁguring an AP as a Guardian
Wireless access points that are conﬁgured as Guardians do not bridge traffic and instead devote all of
the AP’s resources to threat detection and countermeasures.
When an AP is Approved as a Guardian:
•
•
•
The AP becomes a full time RADAR agent.
The AP is added to a Guardian scan proﬁle.
The AP no longer provides services (WLAN service, load group, site) that were provided prior to the
change.
Note
Once an AP is assigned to a Guardian Scan Proﬁle it will stop forwarding traffic on both
radios.
To conﬁgure an AP as a Guardian Scan Proﬁle:
From the top menu, click WIPS.
2 In the left pane, expand Radar Proﬁles.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
221
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
3 In the left pane, expand Guardian Scan and select an AP from the list or click New.
4 In the Add Scan Proﬁle dialog, select Guardian from the Proﬁle drop-down.
ft
ra
5 Click Add.
For more information, see Conﬁguring a Guardian Scan Proﬁle on page 577.
Conﬁguring a Captive Portal on an AP
ExtremeWireless offers a scalable captive portal solution on the AP that can be managed locally or
through a Cloud solution. The distributed solution is available on ExtremeWireless AP38xx series and
AP39xx series APs.
Firewall Friendly External Captive Portal (FFECP) on the AP for B@AP topologies is an extension to
Firewall Friendly Captive Portal on the controller for tunneled (B@AC and routed) topologies.
You can conﬁgure the FFECP with full authentication using a URI and signature, or you can conﬁgure a
RADIUS server, authenticating with a user name and password.
To conﬁgure an External Captive Portal on an AP, the following is required:
•
•
The WLAN Service topology must be VLAN B@AP.
You must conﬁgure speciﬁc policy rules that deﬁnes which traffic is allowed, which traffic is denied,
and if using Rule-based Redirection, which traffic is redirected.
•
The Captive Portal must be conﬁgured as External Firewall Friendly.
Note
ExtremeWireless supports a non-topology speciﬁc implementation. Extreme will register subdomain “apcp.ezcloudx.com” and populate public/Extreme DNS server with DNS mapping of
1.1.1.1 for FQDN “apcp.ezcloudx.com”.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
222
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
In Figure 42, the default Access Control on the VLAN is Deny. Rules are created to allow the ECP URL,
allow DNS and DHCP traffic, and to allow all outgoing MU traffic, and to redirect speciﬁc traffic.
ft
ra
Figure 42: Example: Policy Rules for non-authenticated role
Related Links
Conﬁguring Firewall Friendly External Captive Portal on an AP on page 223
Controlling Network Access on the AP on page 226
Conﬁguring Firewall Friendly External Captive Portal on page 353
Assigning RADIUS Servers for Authentication on page 340
Conﬁguring Firewall Friendly External Captive Portal on an AP
To conﬁgure a Firewall Friendly External Captive Portal (FFECP) on the AP, take the following steps:
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
223
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
If conﬁguring Rule-based Redirection, verify that Rule-based Redirection is enabled. Go to VNS >
Global > Filtering Mode and select Enable Rule-Based Redirection.
Rule-Based Redirection is enabled by default for new installations of ExtremeWireless v10.11 and
later. When upgrading from an earlier version of ExtremeWireless, this option is cleared by default.
You must enable Rule-Based Redirection from the Filtering Mode screen.
Note
The option to disable Rule-based Redirection is available for backward capability only.
Rule-based Redirection relies on policy rules that are deﬁned for HTTP(S) redirection. Non-Rulebased Redirection automatically redirects an un-authenticated client to ECP when a deny action
occurs on HTTP(S) traffic.
Note
You cannot conﬁgure Captive Portal Redirection using IPv6 classiﬁers. While you can http
to IPv6 websites, you cannot apply Captive Portal redirection to http [s] over IPv6 .
ft
ra
2 Create a basic topology where the topology mode is Bridge Traffic Locally at AP. The topology can
be tagged or untagged. For more information, see Conﬁguring a Basic Topology on page 267 in the
User Guide.
If using RADIUS authentication, FF-ECP on the AP can work with both local and central RADIUS
authentication.
3 Create a role and deﬁne speciﬁc policy rules.
The role must be conﬁgured with the following parameters:
From the VLAN & Class of Service tab, select a default Access Control value for the role.
Select from one of the following:
•
•
•
•
•
None - No role deﬁned
No change - Default setting
Allow - Packets contained to role's default action's VLAN/topology.
Deny - Any packet not matching a rule in the Role is dropped.
Containment VLAN - Any packet not matching a rule is sent to deﬁned VLAN.
For B@AP traffic, only the FF ECP is supported as an external captive portal.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
224
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
On the Policy Rules tab, enable AP Filtering.
Conﬁgure speciﬁc policy ﬁlters.
• Allow DHCP and DNS traffic.
•
•
•
Mobile user access to FF-ECP.
Allow traffic towards mobile user.
HTTP(S) redirection.
ft
ra
Note
ExtremeWireless supports a non-topology speciﬁc implementation. Extreme will
register sub-domain “apcp.ezcloudx.com” and populate public/Extreme DNS server
with DNS mapping of 1.1.1.1 for FQDN “apcp.ezcloudx.com”.
For more information, see Conﬁguring Rule-Based Redirection on page 291 in the User Guide.
4 Conﬁgure a WLAN Service with the following parameter settings:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Default Topology = Bridged at AP, tagged or untagged.
Select an AP.
Conﬁgure Privacy settings.
Conﬁgure the Captive Portal to be External Firewall Friendly.
(Optional) Conﬁgure RADIUS servers for RADIUS authentication. For more information, see
Assigning RADIUS Servers for Authentication on page 340 in the User Guide.
Conﬁgure the following parameters on the ECP:
• The Identity and Shared Secret ﬁelds are required and must match the values used when you
conﬁgured the captive portal.
• When conﬁguring the Allow policy for the ECP, the IP/subnet value speciﬁed on the Filter
Rule Deﬁnition dialog must match the Redirection URL value speciﬁed on the FFECP
Conﬁgure dialog.
• Select the Vendor Speciﬁc Attributes (VSAs) for authentication. For more information, see
Vendor Speciﬁc Attributes on page 344 in the User Guide.
• Select an option for Send Successful Login To.
For FFECP local radius authentication:
• The AP must be in Site mode.
• Local RADIUS authentication is conﬁgured on at least one RADIUS server.
• The Signature option is unchecked.
5 Conﬁgure a VNS with the authenticated and non-authenticated policies.
Related Links
Conﬁguring a Basic Topology on page 267
Conﬁguring Rule-Based Redirection on page 291
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
225
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
Understanding the Filter Rule Deﬁnition Dialog on page 302
Conﬁguring a Basic WLAN Service on page 319
Conﬁguring WLAN Service Privacy on page 330
Conﬁguring Firewall Friendly External Captive Portal on page 353
Assigning RADIUS Servers for Authentication on page 340
Controlling Network Access on the AP
When Rule-based Redirection is disabled, denied HTTP(S) traffic from an non-authenticated client is
automatically redirected to the External Captive Portal by the AP. To control network access after
authentication, conﬁgure roles that have an Access Control of deny and specify that role under Virtual
Networks > General.
To conﬁgure default roles that deny network access after authentication:
ft
ra
1 Go to Virtual Networks and select a VNS or click New.
2 Specify the default roles for Authenticated network traffic. In the Authenticated ﬁeld under Default
Roles, select a role or create a new role that has policy rules deﬁned to deny access.
For more information, see Understanding the Filter Rule Deﬁnition Dialog on page 302
AP3916ic Integrated Camera Deployment
The AP3916ic features an integrated video camera, offering a single device for wireless access and
security purposes. Video management is provided by the customer's Video Management System (VMS)
integrated per ONVIF Proﬁle S 2.4 compliance. The camera deployment process is as follows:
The AP3916ic is connected to the network and the controller discovers the camera IP address.
Per ONVIF speciﬁcation, video management systems query network through WS-Discovery
multicast (239.255.255.250). Allow multicast when conﬁguring the default camera topology.
•
•
•
•
Client IP = IP address of camera module
Device Type = Extreme Networks 2 MP Camera (EXTR2MP-CAM)
AP = AP camera module is ‘associated’ with Radio/Port = CAM
Packet/Byte counters = Indicate Camera Activity
2 Associate a WLAN B@AP or B@AC topology to the camera port.
3 The camera requests a DHCP address.
4 The EWC Active Clients Report lists the IP address of the camera. You can export the client IP
address list to an XML ﬁle.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
226
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
(Optional) The camera IP address can be detected by third-party tools, such as ONVIF Device
Manager.
Note
ExtremeWireless manages the AP and camera ﬁrmware revision. After initial connection,
the AP/camera may undergo a ﬁrmware upgrade. The upgrade process runs before the
device becomes fully active on the network.
5 Based on the reported IP address of the camera, the user associates the camera to the video
surveillance system.
For information about camera conﬁguration settings, see Accessing the Camera Web User Interface
on page 227.
ft
ra
Related Links
AP3916ic (Integrated Camera) on page 104
Assigning WLAN Services to Client Ports on page 170
Upgrading the Camera Image Manually on page 237
Multicast Filtering on page 281
AP3916ic-Camera Web User Interface on page 227
Camera Direct Stream Subscription
If your video management system does not support ONVIF/IP camera discovery, subscribe directly
using Real Time Streaming Protocol (RTSP). With direct stream, video is streamed through RTSP – H.
264 or Motion JPEG (MJPEG):
•
•
Stream 1:
• Max Resolution: 1920x1080 (1080p)
• RTSP URL: rtsp://:554/live/ch00_0
Stream 2:
• Max Resolution: 640x360
• RTSP URL: rtsp://:554/live/ch01_0
AP3916ic-Camera Web User Interface
The AP3916ic is an 11ac Wave 2 AP with an integral security camera that lets you extend your Wireless
LAN and provide simultaneous wireless service, BLE or 802.15.4 coverage and security in public spaces,
such as classrooms and offices.
Extreme Networks offers a web-based user interface to customize and conﬁgure the camera.
Related Links
Accessing the Camera Web User Interface on page 227
Camera UI Basic Functions on page 228
Accessing the Camera Web User Interface
Take the following steps to access the AP3916ic Web User Interface:
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
227
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
Using your browser, navigate to the IP address of the camera.
Find the camera IP address on the AP dashboard of the AP3916ic. Go to the AP list and click on an
AP3916ic.
2 Enter the camera IP address into your browser.
The web UI displays.
ra
Figure 43: AP3916ic Web UI
3 Login with default credentials admin/admin The credentials are case sensitive.
Later, you can customize these credentials. See User Management on page 235.
Note
After the initial login, set a password in accordance with your IT policy regulations. Using
default credentials is a security vulnerability for your network.
ft
Related Links
AP3916ic (Integrated Camera) on page 104
Camera UI Basic Functions on page 228
AP3916ic Integrated Camera Deployment on page 226
Camera Direct Stream Subscription on page 227
Camera UI Basic Functions
Conﬁgure the AP3916ic camera using the web user interface. The AP3916ic web user interface is divided
into the following tabs:
•
•
System on page 229
Network on page 231
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
228
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
•
•
Media on page 232
User Management on page 235
Related Links
Accessing the Camera Web User Interface on page 227
AP3916ic (Integrated Camera) on page 104
Camera Direct Stream Subscription on page 227
System
System settings for the AP3916ic camera:
•
Status — Displays status information about the system, network, and video streams.
ft
ra
Figure 44: Sample System and Network Status
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
229
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
ft
ra
Figure 45: Sample Video Status
•
Time — Date/Time settings for the camera.
Figure 46: Sample Manual Time settings
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
230
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
Figure 47: Sample NTP Server Settings
•
ft
ra
Firmware — Browse to the camera image (.dlf ﬁle) and apply the image. Camera ﬁrmware is
distributed and managed from the controlling ExtremeWireless appliance. If GTAC Support
determines that a speciﬁc ﬁrmware version is required on your device, the on-board ﬁrmware
upload functionality can be used to install the image. GTAC will provide the necessary ﬁrmware (.dﬂ)
ﬁle.
•
Backup — Save camera settings to a backup ﬁle or restore settings from an existing backup ﬁle.
Figure 48: Sample Backup /Restore Settings
•
Reset to Default/Reboot
• Reset Camera Defaults — Rest camera to factory default settings. Backup current settings
before resetting to factory default settings.
• Reboot Camera — Restarts the camera. The current camera settings are retained after a camera
restart.
Network
Network settings for the AP3916ic camera.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
231
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
•
IP Conﬁguration — Conﬁgure network settings for the camera port.
Note
Dynamic IP (DHCP) is the default network Mode.
ft
ra
Figure 49: Sample IP Conﬁguration Settings
•
Universal Plug and Play (UPnP)
Figure 50: Sample Discovery Settings: UPnP
Media
Conﬁgure settings for: video, camera, advanced settings, privacy mask, and audio.
•
Video
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
232
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
ra
Figure 51: Sample Video Conﬁguration Settings
•
Camera
ft
The video feed assumes a ceiling mount default orientation. When installing the AP in any other
orientation, adjust the video feed accordingly. For example,when the AP is installed as a deskmount, the video Mirror/Flip setting should be Flip.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
233
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
ft
ra
Figure 52: Sample Camera Settings
•
Advanced
Figure 53: Sample Camera Advanced Settings
•
Audio
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
234
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
Figure 54: Sample Camera Audio Settings
ft
ra
User Management
Add and delete user accounts, change user settings, and change user password.
• User List
Figure 55: User Management Settings
Note
You cannot delete the Administrator account.
Performing AP Software Maintenance
When a new version of AP software becomes available, you can install it from the controller. You can
conﬁgure each AP to upload the new software version either immediately, or the next time the AP
connects to the controller. You can also set up a maintenance cycle for speciﬁc APs using the options
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
235
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
available on the AP Maintenance Cycle tab. Part of the AP boot sequence seeks and installs its software
from the controller.
Warning
Never disconnect an AP from its power supply during a ﬁrmware upgrade. Disconnecting an
AP from its power supply during a ﬁrmware upgrade may cause ﬁrmware corruption
rendering the AP unusable.
You can modify most of the radio properties on an AP without requiring a reboot of the AP. During
upgrade, the AP keeps a backup copy of its software image. When a software upgrade is sent to the AP,
the upgrade becomes the AP's current image and the previous image becomes the backup. In the event
of failure of the current image, the AP runs the backup image.
Maintaining the List of Current AP Software Images
To maintain the list of current wireless AP software images:
1 From the top menu, click AP.
2 In the left pane, click Global > Maintenance.
The following screen appears:
Figure 56: AP Software Maintenance
3 In the AP Images for Platform drop-down list, click the appropriate platform.
4 To select an image to be the default image for a software upgrade, click it in the list, and then click
Set as default.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
236
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
5 In the Upgrade Behavior section, select one of the following:
•
Upgrade when AP connects using settings from Controlled Upgrade — The Controlled Upgrade
tab is displayed when you click Save. Controlled upgrade allows you to individually select and
control the state of an AP image upgrade: which APs to upgrade, when to upgrade, how to
upgrade, and to which image the upgrade or downgrade should be done. Administrators decide
on the levels of software releases that the equipment should be running.
•
Always upgrade AP to default image (overrides Controlled Upgrade settings) — Selected by
default. Allows for the selection of a default revision level (ﬁrmware image) for all APs in the
domain. As the AP registers with the controller, the ﬁrmware version is veriﬁed. If it does not
match the same value as deﬁned for the default-image, the AP is automatically requested to
upgrade to the default-image.
6 To save your changes, click Save.
Related Links
Upgrading the Camera Image Manually on page 237
ft
ra
Upgrading the Camera Image Manually
The AP3916ic is an 11ac Wave 2 AP with an integral security camera that lets you extend your Wireless
LAN and provide simultaneous wireless service, BLE or 802.15.4 coverage and security in public spaces,
such as classrooms and offices.
The camera image (.dlf ﬁle) is distributed within the controller builds. The AP manages the camera
image — camera images are automatically upgraded with the AP image upgrade when a new camera
image is available.
You have the option to upgrade the camera image manually if necessary. To upgrade the AP3916ic
camera image manually:
1 From the top menu, click AP.
2 In the left pane, click Global > Maintenance.
3 From the AP Software Maintenance tab, under Download AP Images:
a Provide the necessary information to download the camera image ﬁle.
b Select AP3916-Camera as the Platform.
c Click Download.
4 Under Upgrade Behavior, select Upgrade when AP connects using settings from Controlled
Upgrade.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
237
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
5 Click Save.
The Controlled Upgrade tab displays.
ft
ra
Figure 57: Manually Upgrading Camera Image
6 Select the Controlled Upgrade tab.
Figure 58: Controlled Upgrade Tab
7 Select AP Platform: AP3916-camera.
8 Select the camera image ﬁle.
9 Click Camera Image Upgrade.
Scheduling a Maintenance Cycle for Speciﬁc APs
To schedule a maintenance cycle for speciﬁc APs:
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
238
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
Go to AP.
2 In the left pane, click Global Settings > Maintenance.
3 Click the AP Maintenance Cycle tab.
The following screen appears:
af
4 Click the Start At box to display the Choose Time dialog.
5 Adjust the sliders for both Hour and Minute to set the time for the AP maintenance cycle, then click
Done.
6 In the Duration drop-down, select the desired duration time (in hours).
7 Under Recurrence, select the desired frequency.
8 Under Platforms, select the AP(s) that are included in the maintenance cycle.
9 Click Save.
Deleting a Wireless AP Software Image
To delete a wireless AP software image:
From the top menu, click AP. The AP screen displays.
2 In the left pane, click Global > Maintenance.
3 In the AP Images for Platform drop-down list, click the appropriate platform.
4 In the AP Images list, click the image you want to delete.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
239
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
5 Click Delete. The image is deleted.
Downloading a new Wireless AP Software Image
To download a new wireless AP software image:
1 From the top menu, click AP.
2 In the left pane, click Global Settings, then AP Maintenance. The AP Software Maintenance tab is
displayed.
3 In the Download AP Images list, type the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
FTP Server — The IP of the FTP server to retrieve the image ﬁle from.
User ID — The user ID for the controller to use when it attempts to log in to the FTP server.
Password — The corresponding password for the user ID.
Conﬁrm — The corresponding password for the user ID to conﬁrm it was typed correctly.
Directory — The directory on the server in which the image ﬁle to be retrieved is stored.
ft
ra
Filename — The name of the image ﬁle to retrieve.
Platform — The AP hardware type to which the image applies. The are several types of AP and
they require different images.
4 Click Download. The new software image is downloaded.
Deﬁning Parameters for a Controlled Software Upgrade
To deﬁne parameters for a wireless AP controlled software upgrade:
1 From the top menu, click AP.
2 In the left pane, click Global > Maintenance.
3 Under upgrade behavior, select Upgrade when AP connects using settings from Controlled
Upgrade.
The Controlled Upgrade tab displays.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
240
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
4 Click the Controlled Upgrade tab.
af
Note
The Controlled Upgrade tab is displayed only when the Upgrade Behavior is set to
Upgrade when AP connects using settings from Controlled Upgrade on the AP Software
Maintenance tab.
5 In the Select AP Platform drop-down list, click the type of AP you want to upgrade.
6 In the Select an image to use drop-down list, click the software image you want to use for the
upgrade.
7 In the list of registered Wireless APs, select the check box for each AP to be upgraded with the
selected software image.
8 Click Apply AP image version. The selected software image is displayed in the Upgrade To column
of the list.
9 To save the software upgrade strategy to be run later, click Save for later.
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
241
Conﬁguring the ExtremeWireless APs
10 To run the software upgrade immediately, click Upgrade Now. The selected AP reboots, and the new
software version is loaded.
Note
The Always upgrade AP to default image check box on the AP Software Maintenance tab
overrides the Controlled Upgrade settings.
11 To upgrade without interrupting service, click Upgrade without interrupting service. If you click this
option while the upgrade scheduler is running, the schedule is interrupted, and the current upgrade
cycle calculates a new schedule that includes APs that weren't upgraded.
Understanding the ExtremeWireless LED Status
When you power on and boot an AP, you can follow its progress through the registration process by
observing the LED sequence as described in the following sections:
39xx Series Wireless APs
38xx Series Wireless APs on page 251
37xx Series Wireless APs on page 255
ft
ra
•
•
•
After you power on and boot the AP for the ﬁrst time, you can conﬁgure LED behavior as described in
Conﬁguring Wireless AP LED Behavior on page 259.
39xx Series Wireless APs
The following AP39xx model access points are supported by ExtremeWireless:
• AP3917i/e
•
•
•
•
•
AP3916i/e
AP3915i/e
AP3912i/e
AP3935i/e
AP3965i/e
ExtremeWireless™ V10.41.06 User Guide
242

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.4-c005 78.147326, 2012/08/23-13:03:03
Modify Date                     : 2018:04:26 17:57:13-07:00
Create Date                     : 2018:04:26 17:57-07:00
Metadata Date                   : 2018:04:26 17:57:13-07:00
Creator Tool                    : AH XSL Formatter V6.3 MR2 for Linux64 : 6.3.3.24511 (2016/05/17 13:57JST)
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : ExtremeWireless V10.41.06 User Guide
Creator                         : Extreme Networks, Inc.
Document ID                     : uuid:a9513390-4b12-452a-9ddb-4f0b06aa30cc
Instance ID                     : uuid:89f75631-ac09-4163-8912-75cff81b3b85
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 18.0 (Windows)
Page Count                      : 242
Author                          : Extreme Networks, Inc.

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Extreme Networks AP3917E Wireless 802.11 a/ac+b/g/n Access Point User Manual ExtremeWireless V10 41 06 User Guide

Extreme Networks, Inc. Wireless 802.11 a/ac+b/g/n Access Point ExtremeWireless V10 41 06 User Guide

Contents

Extreme Wireless V10.41.06 User Guide Part 1

FCC ID Filing: QXO-AP3917E

Navigation menu

Namespaces

Views

Navigation